^rfiyrtyAt <=JV&. 



UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 




^ 



H 



mt 












■ 
■ 



^'*« 



^^H 






M*f& 






&o>V . I , ^/ 



MW TESTAMENT MANUAL: 



EMBRACING AN 



Historical Tabular View of the Gospels; 

TABLES OF THE 



PARABLES, DISCOURSES, AND MIRACLES OF CHRIST; PREDICTIONS 

IX THE OLD TESTAMENT, WITH THEIR FULFILMENT 

IN THE NEW; CLASSIFICATION OF THE BOOKS 

OF THE NEW TESTAMENT, WITH 

OBSERVATIONS ON EACH. 

BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCHES, DESCRIPTIONS OF PLACES. 
An Important Chronological Table. 



With Paps, 



SHOWING THE JOURNEYS OF JESUS AND ST. PAUL, 

&c, &c. 

COMPILED FROM THE WORKS OF THE MOST 
EMINENT BIBLICAL WRITERS. 



STEPHEN HAWES, 

AUTHOR OF " SYNCIIRONOLOGY OF SACRED AND TROFANK 
HISTORY." ^< 



BOSTON : 

LEE AND SHEPARD, PUBLISHERS. 

NEW YORK: 

LEE, SHEPAHD AXD DILLINGHAM. 

1871. 







Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1870, 

By LEE AND SHEPARD, 

In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 



Electrotype'd at the Boston Stereotype Foundry, 
No. 10 Spring Lane. 



PREFACE. 



This book is not designed as a commentary on the 
New Testament, boat rather as an introduction to a 
careful study and proper understanding of the New 
Testament Scriptures. 

It has been truly said that every word of the Bible 
is from God, and every man is interested in the 
meaning of it. We are aware that many elaborate 
and exceedingly valuable works have been prepared 
and offered to the public as introductions to the study 
of the Bible; but their very size, and consequent ex- 
pense, render them inaccessible to the great mass of 
Bible readers. This Manual we now offer to the pub- 
lic has been selected with great care from the works 
of the most eminent ancient and modern biblical 
critics; and its contents are so condensed, and its 
price so limited, as to make it available to all. Every 
Intelligent reader of the Bible will observe that most 
of the books of the New Testament, especially the 
Epistles, were written to confute some error that was 
creeping into the churches in those primitive days of 
Christianity, or to establish believers more firmly in 
the doctrines and precepts taught by Jesus Christ and 
his immediate followers. These errors seem to be 
clearly set forth by the inspired writers, with the only 
successful and profitable way to meet them; and we 

3 



4 PREFACE. 

are assured that the church would never be free from 
the influence of those false teachers who would en- 
deavor to draw men away from the true faith by de- 
claring "it is vain to serve God" in the manner pre- 
scribed in his word. 

And as this Scripture is being fulfilled in our day, and 
false teachers have arisen who are endeavoring to turn 
men from the faith once delivered to the saints, and 
who would, if it were possible, deceive the very elect, 
we should not determine the meaning of the sacred 
Scriptures according to modern notions and systems, 
but endeavor to carry ourselves back to the very times 
and places in which they were written, and realize the 
ideas and modes of thinking of the sacred writers, 
that we may understand and apply the great truths 
and doctrines which these "holy men of God spake 
as they were moved by the Holy Ghost." 

We should also remember that only an unbiassed 
mind can obtain the genuine sense of Scripture. 

There are many historical circumstances connected 
with the books of the Bible, which it is important for 
the reader to understand, and which we have endeav- 
ored to narrate as far as the limits of this work will 
permit. 

It is important to a right understanding of the 
Scriptures that we have a knowledge of their authors, 
the date when each book was written, the place where 
it was written, the occasion upon which the several 
books were written, their respective scopes or designs, 
and an analysis of each book ; also biblical antiquities, 
including the geography, sacred and profane history, 
and private life of the Jews, and other nations men- 
tioned in the Bible. 

Want of attention to the general scope and design 
of the doctrinal parts of Scripture, particularly of 
the Epistles, has been the source of many and great 



PREFACE. 5 

errors. These should be read through at once with 
close attention to the scope and tenor of the dis- 
course, regardless of the divisions into chapters and 
verses, precisely in the same manner in which we 
would peruse the letters of other ancient writers. 

Great care has been exercised, in the compilation of 
this work, to quote only from such authorities as are 
known and acknowledged to be reliable. We have 
drawn more largely from " Home's Introduction to 
the Study of the Bible " than from any other work, 
but have consulted freely the works of Lardner, Mac- 
knight, Michaelis, Benson, A. Clarke. Barnes, &c, &c. 
The author has long felt the necessity of a work of 
this kind in his own experience in Sabbath schools 
and Bible classes, and trusts it will meet a want 
which must have been experienced by the community 
at large. 

It is too much to suppose that, in a book of this 
kind, where so many quotations and references occur, 
no errors will be found; yet we trust it is as nearly 
correct as could be reasonably expected; for no effort 
has been spared to secure strict accuracy in this re- 
spect. In conclusion, we can only enjoin upon every 
reader of this little volume to obey the divine injunc- 
tion, "Search the Scriptures," that you may "be 
ready always to give an answer to every man that 
asketh you a reason of the hope that is in you," re- 
membering that "all Scripture is given by inspira- 
tion of God, and is profitable for doctrine, for reproof, 
for correction, and for instruction in righteousness." 

S. H. 

Boston, December 10, 1870. 



NAMES AND ORDER OF THE BOOKS OF THE NEW 
TESTAMENT, WITH NUMBER OF CHAPTERS AND 
VERSES IN EACH. 



NAMES. 



Matthew. 

Mark. . . 
Luke. . . . 
John. . . . 
Acts. . . . 
Romans. . . 

1 Corinthians 

2 Corinthians 
Galatians. 
Ephesians 
Philippians 
Colossians. 
i Thessalonians 
2 Thessalonians 



Total. . . 



28 1071 
16 678 
24 1 1 si 
21 880 
28 1006 
16 434 
16 ( 437 
13 256 
6, 149 



*55 
104 

95 

89 
47 1 



NAMES. 



190 6552; 



Brought up, 

1 Timothy. . 

2 Timothy. . 
Titus. . . . 
Philemon. . 
Hebrews. 
Epist. of Jame 

1 Peter. . 

2 Peter. . 

1 John. 

2 John. 

3 John. . 
Jude. . . 
Revelation. 



Total. 



u 



6552 

113 

83 

46 

25 
3°3 
108 

105 
61 

105 
13 
i5 
25 

40S 



260 7959 



CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER OF THE BOOKS OF THE 
NEW TESTAMENT, WITH THE ABBREVIATIONS 
USED IN THE REFERENCES. (As arranged in the 
Cottage Bible.) 

Luke . . Lu. 

Acts Acts. 

1 Timothy. . . . 1 Tim. 
Titus Ti. 

! 1 Peter 1 Pe. 

Jude Ju. 

2 Timothy. ... 2 Tim. 

I 2 Peter 2 Pe. 

I 1 John 1 Jn. 

J 2 John 2 Jn. 

j 3 J^n 3jn. 

; Revelation. . . . Rev. 

John Jn. 



Matthew. . . . 


Matt. 


1 Thessalonians. 


1 Thes. 


2 Thessalonians. 


2 Thes. 


Galatians. . . 


. Gal. 


1 Corinthians. 


. 1 Cor. 


Romans. . . . 


. Rom. 


2 Corinthians. 


. 2 Cor. 


Mark 


Mark. 


Ephesians. . . . 


Eph. 


James. .... 


Ja. 


Colossians. . . 


Col. 


Philemon. . . 


. Philem. 


Philippians. 


Phil. 


Hebrews. . . . 


. Heb. 



CONTENTS 



PAGE 

Names and Order of the Books of the New 
Testament. 6 

Books of the New Testament Chronologi- 
cally ARRANGED. • 6 

Historical Tabular View. • 8 

Parables of Jesus. 12 

Miracles of Christ. 12 

Discourses of Jesus. 13 

Prophecies and Fulfilments. 14 

Classification of the Books of the New 
Testament. 15 

Historical Books of. the New Testament. • 16 

I. Observations on the Canonical Gospels ; II. On the Gospel 
by St. Matthew ; III. On the Gospel bv St. Mark ; IV. On 
the Gospel by St. Luke ; V. On the Gospel by St. John ; 
VI. On the Acts of the Apostles. 

Doctrinal Books of the New Testament. • 22 

I. The Apostolical Epstles ; II. The Epistle to the Romans ; 
III. The First Epistle to the Corinthians; IV. The Second 
Epistle to the Corinthians; V. The Epistle to the Galatians ; 
VI. The Epistle to the Ephesians ; VII. The Epistle to the ~ 
Philippians; VIII. The Epistle to the Colossians ; IX. The 
First Eristle-to the Thessa.onians ; X. The Second Epistle 
to the Thessalonians ; XI. The First Epiftle to Timothy ; 
XII. The Second Enistle to Timothy; XIII. The Eristle to 
Titus ; XIV. The Epistle to Philemon ; XV. The Epistle to 
the Hebrews. 

The Catholic or General Epistles. 49 

I. The Genuineness and Authenticity of the Catholic Epis- 
tles ; II. The General Epistle of James ; III The First Gen- 
eral Episile of Peter; IV. The Second General Epistle of 
Peter; V. The First General Epistle of John ; VI. The 
Second and Third Epistles of John ; VII. The General 
Epistie of Jude. 

The Revelation of St. John the Divine. • • 61 

Tables of the Books of the New Testament. 65 

Biographical Sketches. 67 

Table of St. Paul's Apostolic Journeys. • • 89 

Geographical Description of the Principal 
Places mentioned in the New Testament. 91 

Synchronology of the Principal Events in 
Sacred and Profane History. 143 

7 



© , HISTORICAL TABULAR VIEW. 

No. Event, 

i. The Birth of John foretold at Jerusalem. — Zacharias returns home. 

2. The Birth of Jesus foretold at Nazareth. — Mary visits Elisabeth. 

3. John Baptist born, Hill country of Judea. — Brought up in the 

4. Jesus is born at Bethlehem. — Presented in the Temple 

5. Wise Men from the East worship Jesus, at Bethlehem. — The Holy 

6. Jesus goes from Nazareth to the Passover 

7. John begins to preach and to baptize. 

8. Jesus is baptized. See line on Chart from 

9. Jesus' three temptations. See line from Jordan south-east. 

10. John the Baptist's second testimony to Jesus. 

11. Water changed into wine at Carta. — Jesus departs with his disciples 

12. Jesus cleanses the Temple. — Nicodemus is instructed by Jesus. 

13. Jesus discourses with a woman of Samaria. 

14. Jesus at Cana, heals a nobleman's son, who was sick. 

15. Jesus preaches in a synagogue, and is rejected. 

16. Jesus selects Capernaum to dwell in, and calls four disciples. 

17. Jesus heals a demoniac, Peter's mother- m-law, and others. 

18. Jesus' First General Circuit (Mark i. 35-39), as in every other. 

19. Jesus' Sermon on the Mount. 

20. Jesus' Sermon on the Mount continued. 

21. The first miraculous draught of fishes. — A leper healed. 

22. A man sick of the palsy healed. — Matthew called, etc. 

23. Jesus at the second Passover, in his ministry, heals a lame man. 

24. The disciples pluck corn on the Sabbath day. 

25. The withered hand restored. 

26. Jesus' first partial circuit. 

2j. Jesus chooses twelve Apostles, after prayer all night. 
Jesus delivers a sermon on the plain. 

28. The centurion's servant healed. 

29. Widow's son raised (Luke vii. 1 1-16). — John's messengers answered. 

30. Jesus is anointed at Nain, thence he makes his Second Circuit 

31. A blind and dumb demoniac healed. 

32. Jesus teaches by parables. 

33. Jesus interprets the parables, and adds others. 

34. Jesus calms a storm, in answer to his disciples' prayer. 

35. Jesus casts out devils in the country of the Gadarenes, and returns 

36. Jesus answers the Pharisees. — Restores Jairus' daughter, etc. 

37. Jesus revisits Nazareth (Mat. xiii. 54-58).— Third General Circuit 

38. Jesus sends his 12 apostles, by two and two, to preach and heal the sick, 

39. John the Baptist is beheaded by Herod. 

40. Jesus feeds 5000 men, besides women and children. 

41. Jesus walks upon the Sea of Galilee, and lands at 

42. Jesus preaches in a synagogue. — THE BREAD OF LIFE. 

43. Of unwashen hands and commandment of God. 

44. Jesus heals the daughter of a Syrophenician woman. 

45. Jesus feeds 4000 men, besides women and children, in the 

46. Jesus answers the Pharisees, who demand a sign, etc. 

Jesus heals a blind man, having crossed over the Sea of Galilee to 

47. Jesus foretells his death and resurrection 

48. Jesus appears in glory (Mat. xvii. 1-13). — Heals a demoniac. 

49. Jesus foretells, the second time, his death and resurrection. 
Jesus pays tribute (Mat. xvii. 24-27). — Censures his disciples. 

50. Of humility and forgiveness. 

51. Jesus at the Feast of Tabernacles. 

52. Jesus ' ; The Light of the World." 

53. Jesus heals a man born blind. — The Good Shepherd. 

54. Jesus at the Feast of Dedication (John x. 22-38) Jerusalem. 

55. Jesus restores Lazarus to life, at Bethany in Judea, and departs to 

56. Jesus sends messengers from Ephraim to prepare for him. 



HISTORICAL TABULAR VIEW. 



Place. 
i. Hill country of J udea. 

2. Hill country of Judea. — Returns to Naz. 

3. Wilderness of Judea. 

4. At Jerusalem. 

5. Family go to Egypt. — Return to Naz. 

6. At Jerusalem. 

7. Wilderness of Judea and Jordan. 

8. Nazareth to Jordan. 

9. Jerusalem, and north of Jericho. 

10. Bethabara beyond Jordan. 

11. To Capernaum. 

12. See line from Capernaum to Jerusalem. 

13. At Sychar. 

14. At Capernaum. 

15. At Nazareth. 

16. At the Sea of Galilee. 

17. At Capernaum. 

18. From Capernaum round Galilee. 

19. North of Capernaum. 

20. North of Capernaum. 

21. Lake Gennesaret. — Chorazin. 

22. Capernaum. — Sea of Galilee. 

23. Beihesda, Jerusalem. 

24. Nigh to Jerusalem. 

25. At Capernaum. 

26. By Lake Gennesaret, west side. 

27. North of Capernaum. 
North of Capernaum. 

28. At Capernaum. 

29. At Nain. 

30. Of Galilee. 

31. At Capernaum. 

32. At the Sea of Galilee. 

33. At Capernaum. 

34. On the lake. 

35. To Capernaum. 

36. At Capernaum. 

37. Through all Galilee. 

38. I rom Capernaum. 

39. See Capernaum. 

40. Desert of Bethsaida, east of Galilee. 

41. Bethsaida in Gennesaret. 

42. At Capernaum. 

43. At Capernaum. 

44. Country of Tyre and Sidon. 

45. Desert of Bethsaida, east of Galilee. 
46 Magdala and Dalmanutha. 

Bethsaida, east of the lake. 

47. In the way to Cesarea Philippi. 

48. The holy Mount Hermon. 

49. In Galilee. 

At Capernaum. 

50. At Capernaum. 

51. At Jerusalem. — Mount of Olives. 

52. At Jerusalem. 

53. At Jerusalem. 

54. Departs to Bethabara beyond Jordan. 

55. Ephraira. 
5b. In Samaria. 



Evangelist. 


Luke 




i. 1-25. 

i. 26-56. 


u 




i. 57-So. 
ii. 1-38. 


Mat. 




ii. 1-23. 


Luke 




ii. 40-52. 
iii. 1-20. 


Mat. 




iii. 13-17. 


Luke 
John 




iv. 1-13. 
i. 19-51. 
ii. 1-12. 




ii 


. 13, iii. 21. 


« 


iii. 


22, iv. 42. 
iv. 43-54- 


Luke 




iv. 14-30. 


Mat. 




iv. 12-22. 


Mark 




i. 21-34. 


Mat. 




iv. 23-25. 
vi. -viii. 


«< 




Luke 


v. 


i-ii, 12-16. 


Mark 




ii. 1-22. 


John 




v. . 


Mat. 




xii. 1-8. 


Luke 




vi. 6-1 1. 


Mark 




iii. 7-12. 


Luke 
<< 




vi. 12-16. 

vi. 17-49. 
vii. 1 -10. 


Mat. 




xi. 2-30. 


Luke vii 


.36- 


50, viii. 1-3. 


Mat. 




xii. 22 50. 


" . ' 


xiii. 


1- 1 7, 24-35- 


" xiii. 


36,1 


:8-23, 36-52. 


" xiii 


• 53, 


viii. 18-27. 


Mark 




v. 1-21. 


Mat. 




ix. 10-34. 
ix. 35. 


Mat. ix 


.36, 


x. 1-5, xi. 1. 


Mark 




vi. 14-29. 
yi. 30-44. 


Mat: 




xiv. 22-35. 


John 




vi. 25-71. 


Mark 




vii. 1-23. 


Mat. 




xv. 21-28. 
xv. 29-38. 




XV. 


, 39, xvi. 12. 


Mark 




viii. 22-26. 


Mat. 




xvi. 13-28. 


Mark 




ix. 14-29. 
ix. 30-32. 
ix. 33-50. 


Mat. 




xviii. . 


John 


vii. 2, viii. 1. 






vin. 2-50. 


*' 




ix., x. 1-21 


M 




x. 39-42. 



Luke 



ix. 51-62. 



10 HISTORICAL TABULAR VIEW. 

No. Event. 

57. The Seventy sent (Luke x. 1-24). — The Good Samaritan. 

58. Jesus in Martha's house (Luke x. 38-42). —Teaches how to pray. 

59. Jesus casts out a dumb devil. 

60. Jesus discourses on various topics. 

61. All are warned to repent, etc. 

62. A dropsical man healed. — The Great Supper. 

63. Parable of the Lost Sheep. — Lost Piece of Silver. — Prodigal Son. 

64. The Unjust Steward. — The Rich Man and Lazarus. 

65. Of giving offence. — Ten lepers healed. — Jesus crosses Jordan into 

66. Answer to " When the kingdom of God should come." 

67. Encouragement to prayer. — Unjust judge and importunate widow. 

68. Of divorce (Mat. xix. 3-12). — Little children blessed. 

69. The rich young ruler. — Time of reward. 

70. Parable of laborers hired at different hours. 

71. Jesus a third time predicts his death, etc. 

72. Jesus heals a blind man. 

Jesus and blind Bartimeus, having passed through, 

73. Jesus in Zaccheus's house. — Parable of a nobleman and his servants. 

74. Mary anoints Jesus (see John xii. 1-7). 

75. Jesus' triumphal entry into Jer. from Beth'y (Mat. xxi. 1, xi. 14-17). 

76. Jesus cleanses the temple the second time. 

77. Jesus answers the Pharisees, who question his authority. 

78. The marriage feast. — Of tribute to Caesar. 

79. Jesus answers the Sadducees and Pharisees. 

80. Widow's offering (Mark xii. 38-44). — Of the infidelity of the Jews. 

81. Woes pronounced on the Pharisees. 

82. Destruction of the Temple foretold, etc. 

83. Parables: The Servants — Ten Virgins — Talents. 

84. Judgment of the nations (Mat. xxv. 31-46). — Judas's covenant. 

85. Last Passover (Mat. xxvi. 17-26). — Jesus washes his disciples' feet. 

86. Jesus forewarns Peter, etc. (John xiii. 31-38). — And again. 

87. Jesus directs his disciples how to obtain peace. 

88. Jesus the True Vine. 

89. Jesus promiseth the Holy Ghost to his disciples. 

90. Jesus praye.h for his disc. (Jn. xvii.). — Jeru. — Peter warned 3d time. 

91. Jesus' agony and betrayal. 

92. Jesus before the high priests. — Peter denies Christ. — Judas repents. 

93. Jesus before Pilate. — Scourged. — Arraigned (Mat. xxvii. 11-14). 

94. Jesus sent to Herod (Luke xxiii. 6-12). Scourged, del. to be crucified. 

95. Jesus is crowned and crucified. 

96. Jesus is taken from the cross and buried. 

97. Jesus' resurrection (Mat. xxviii. 1-8 ; 11-15). — Appears to Mary. 

98. Jesus appears to two disciples going to Emmaus, and to the Eleven. 

99. Jesus appears to 500 brethren at once on the Holy Mount 
Jesus appears to certain other disciples. 

100 Jesus' tenth and last appearance. He ascends into heaven. 

Explanation. — The Historical Tabular View of the Gospels and 
the preceding Chart embrace every event in the Gospel History from 
its earliest period to the Ascension of our Lord into Heaven, accord- 
ing to Greswell's arrangement of A Harmony of the Four Gospels. 

They are divided into One Hundred Lessons, having the events 
localized in chronological succession. 

Our Lord attended five feasts in Jerusalem in the course of his minis- 
try, viz.: The Passovers, John ii. 13. No. 12; John v., No. 23. The 
Feast of Tabernacles, John vii. 10, No. 51. The Feast of Dedication, 
John x. 22, No. 54, and the Passover at which he was crucified. 

Nos. i-ii, embrace the events of the private history of John the 
Baptist and of Jesus. 

Nos. ia-32, are the events of our Lord's first year's ministry. 



HISTORICAL TABULAE VIEW. 



11 





Place. 


Evangelist. 


£7- 


Capernaum. 


Luke 


x. 25-37. 


58. 


On the last circuit of Galilee. 


" 


xi. 1-13. 


59- 


On the last circuit of Galilee. 


" 


xi. 14-54. 


60. 


On the last circuit of Galilee. 


<< 


x.i. - -. 


61. 


On the last circuit of Galilee. 


'* 


xiii. 1-35. 


62. 


Oa the last circuit of Galilee. 


u 


xiv. . 


63- 


On the last circuit of Galilee. 


H 


XV. . 


64. 


On the last circuit of Galilee. 


11 


xyi. 1 -3 1. 


65 


Peraea (Mat. xix. i, 2). Ditto. 


" 


xvii. 1 -19. 


66. 


Peraea. 


m 


xvii. 20-37. 


67. 


Pcrsea. 


« 


xviii. 1 -14. 


68. 


Peraea. 


Mark 


x. 13-16. 


69. 


Peraea. 


Mat 


xix. 16-30. 


7°- 


Peraea. 


« 


xx. 1-16. 


7 1 - 


In Judea, west of Jordan. 


<< 


xx. 17-28. 


7 2 - 


As he drew nigh to Jericho. 


Luke 


xviii. 35-43. 




As he went out of Jericho. 


Mark 


x. 46-52. 


73- 


In the way to Jerusalem. 


Luke 


xix. 2-27. 


74- 


At Bethany, in Judea. 


Mat. 


xxvi. 6-13. 


75- 


Greeks wish to see Jesus at Jerusalem. 


John 


xii. 20-36. 


76. 


Jerusalem. 


Mat. 


xxi. 12, 13. 


77- 


Jerusalem. 


" 


xxi. 23-46. 


78. 


Jerusalem. 


" 


xxii. 1-22. 


79- 


Jerusalem. 


<< 


xxii. 23-46. 


80. 


Jerusalem. 


John 
Mat. 


xii. 37-59. 


81. 


Jerusalem. 


xxiii. . 


82. 


On Mount of Olives. 


" 


xxiv. 1-44. 


83- 


On Mount of Olives. 


" xxiv. 45, xxv. 30. 


84. 


On Mount of Olives. 


M xxvi. 1-5, xiv. 16. 


s 3 . 


At Jerusalem. 


John 
Luke 


xiii. 1-17. 


86. 


At Jerusalem. 


xxii. 24-38. 


87. 


At Jerusalem. 


John 


xiv. . 


88. 


At Jerusalem. 


" 


XV. . 


89. 


At Jerusalem. 


H 


xvi. . 


90. 


Mount of Olives. 


Mat. 


xxvi. 30-35. 


9i- 


Gethsemane. 


i< 


xxvi. 36-56. 


92. 


Jerusalem. 


" ' xxvi. 57, xxvii. 10. 


93- 


Jerusalem. 


John X' 
Mat. 


nil. 28, xix. 14. 


94. 


Jerusalem. 


xxvii. 15-26. 


95- 


Calvary. 


" 


xxvii. 27-50. 


96. 


Calvary. 


i« 


xxvii. 51-66. 


97- 


Calvary. 


John 
Luke 


xx. 1-18. 


98. 


At Jerusalem. 


xxiv. 13-43- 


99- 


Hermon. 


Mat. 


xxviii. 16-20. 




Lake Tiberias. 


John 


xxi. 1-24. 


100. 


Jerusalem. — Mount of Olives. 


Acts 


i. 4-1 1, 22. 



Explanation. — Nos. 23-43, are the events of our Lord's second 
year's ministry. 

Nos. 44-100, are the events of our Lord's third year's ministry, and 
after the resurrection, until Jesus' ascension. 

To see the chronological order and locality of any fact in the histoiy, 
find in the column of Events the subject required, e. g. y " The Baptism 
of Jesus: " trace the line from the first column on left hand page, across 
both pages, following the corresponding numbers on both pages. On 
left hand page, Xo. 8 is the order of the history. Following N0.8 on the 
r.ght hand page. Mat. is the Evangelist recording the cv^nt. v.hi«.h 
Gosp-1 will be found in all the books, as under, associated with Mark 
and Luke, and the localities of the history are Nazareth and the River 
Jordan. 



THE PARABLES OF JESUS. 

Arranged in Chronological Order. 

PARABLES. PLACES. EVANGELIST. 

Sower Capernaum. Mat. xiii. 1-23. 

Tares Capernaum. Mat. xiii. 24-30, 

36-43. 

Seed springing up imperceptibly. . . . Capernaum. Mark iv. 26-29. 

Grain of Mustard Seed Capernaum. Mat. xii. 31-32. 

Leaven Capernaum. Mat. xiii. 33. 

Found Treasure Capernaum. Mat. xiii. 44. 

Precious Pearl Capernaum. Mat. xiii. 45, 46. 

Net Capernaum. Mat. xiii. 47-50. 

Two Debtors Capernaum. Luke vii. 36-50. 

Unmerciful Servant Capernaum. Mat. xviii. 23-35. 

Samaritan Near Jericho. Luke x. 25-37. 

Rich Fool Galilee. Luke xii. 16-21. 

Servants who waited for their Lord. . . Galilee. Luke xii. 35-48. 

Barren Fig Tree Galilee. Luke xiii. 6-9. 

Lost Sheep Galilee. Luke xv. 3-7. 

Lost Piece of Money Galilee. Luke xv. 8-10. 

Prodigal Son Galilee. Luke xv. 11-32. 

Dishonest Steward *. Galilee. Luke xvi. 1-12. 

Rich Man and Lazarus Galilee. Luke xvi. 19-31. 

Unjust Judge Par<£a. Luke xviii. 1-8. 

Pharisee and Publican Parana. Luke xviii. 9-14. 

Laborers in the Vineyard Paraea. Mat. xx. 1-16. 

Pounds Jericho. Luke xix. 12-27. 

Two Sons Jerusalem. Mat. xxi. 28-32. 

Vineyard Jerusalem. Mat. xxi. 33-46. 

Marriage Feast Jerusalem. Mat. xxii. 1-14. 

Ten Virgins Jerusalem. Mat. xxv. 1-13. 

Talents Jerusalem. Mat. xxv. 14-30. 

Sheep and the Goats Jerusalem. Mat. xxv. 31-46. 



THE MIRACLES OF CHRIST. 

Arranged in Chronological Order. 

MIRACLES'. > PLACES. EVANGELIST. 

Turns Water into Wine Cana. John ii. 1-11. 

Cures the Nobleman's Son of Caper- 
naum. Cana. John iv. 46-64. 

Causes a miraculous Draught of Fishes. Sea of Galilee. Luke v. 1-11. 

Cures a Demoniac Capernaum. Mark i. 22-28. 

Heals Peter's Wife's Mother of a Fever. Capernaum. Mark i. 30, 31. 

Heals a Leper Capernaum. Mark i. 40-45. 

Heals the Centurion's Servant Capernaum. Mat. viii. 5-13. 

Raises the Widow's Son, Nain. Luke vii. n-17. 

Calms the Tempest Sea of Galilee. Mat. viii. 23-27. 

Cures the Demoniacs of Gadara. . . . Gadara. Mat. viii. 28-34. 

Cures a Man of Palsv Capernaum. Mat. ix. 1-8. 

Restores to Life the Daughter of Jairus. Capernaum. Mat. ix. 18, 19, 

Cures a Woman diseased with a Fiux of 23-26. 

Blood Capernaum. Luke viii. 43-48. 

Restores to Sight two Blind Men. . . . Capernaum. Mat. ix. 27-31. 

Hea s one possessed with a Dumb Spirit. Capernaum. Mat. ix. 32, 33. 

Cures an Infirm Man of Bethesda. . . Jerusalem, John v. 1-9. 

Cures a Man with a Withered Hand. . Judea,, Mat. xii. 10-13. 

12 



MIRACLES. PLACES. EVANGELIST. 

Cures a Demoniac. Capernaum. Mat. xii. 22, 23. 

Feeds miraculously Five Thousand. . Decapolis. Mat. xiv. 15-21. 
Heals the Daughter of the Woman of 

Canaan Near Tyre. Mat. xv. 22-2S. 

Heals a Man who was Dumb and Deaf. Decapolis. Mark vii. 31-37. 

Feeds miraculously Four Thousand. . Decapolis. Mat. xv. 32-39. 

Gives Sight to a Blind Man Bethsaida. Mark xiii. 22-26. 

Cures a Boy possessed of a Devil. . . Tabor. Mat. xvii. 14-21. 

Restores to Sight a Man born Blind. . Jerusalem. John ix. 
Heals a Woman under infirmity eighteen 

Years Galilee. Luke xiii. n-17. 

Cures a Dropsy Galilee. Luke xiv. 1-6. 

Cleanses ten Lepers Samaria. Luke xvii. 14-19. 

Raises Lazarus from the Dead. .... Bethany. John xi. 

Restores to Sight two Blind Men. . . . Jericho Mat. xx. 30-34. 

B asts the Fig Tree Olivet. Mat. xxi. 18-22. 

Heals the Ear of Malchus Gethsemane. Luke xxii. 50, 51. 

Causes the miraculous Draught of 

Fishes Sea of Galilee. John xxi. 1-14. 



THE DISCOURSES OF JESUS. 

Arranged in Chronological Order. 

DISCOURSES. PLACES. EVANGELIST. 

t ; ; '*"■; -s t * \ /■ " ■% 

Conversation with Nicodemus Jerusalem. John iii. 1-2 1. 

Conversation with the Woman of Sama- 
ria. Sychar. John iv. 1-12. 

Discourse in the Synagogue of Nazareth. Nazareth. Luke iv. 16-31. 

Sermon on the Mount Nazareth. Mat. v. -vii. 

Instruction to the Apostles Galilee. Mat. x. 

Denunciations against Chorazin, &c. . Galilee. Mat. xi. 20-24. 

Discourse on Occasion of healing the 

Infirm Men at Bethesda Jerusalem. John v. 

Discourse concerning the Disciples 

plucking Corn on the Sabbath. . . Judea. Mat. xii. 1-8. 

Refutation of his working Miracles by 

the agency of Beelzebub Capernaum. Mat. xii. 22-37. 

Discourse on the Bread of Life. . . . Capernaum. John vii. 

Discourse about Internal Purity. . . . Capernaum. Mat. xv. 1-20. 

Discourse against giving or taking Of- 
fence, and forgiving Injuries. . . . Capernaum. Mat. xviii. 

Discourse at the Feast of Tabernacles. Jerusalem. John vii. 

Discourse on the Occasion of the Woman 

taken in Adultery Jerusalem. John viii. i-u. 

Discourse concerning the Sheep. . . . Jerusalem. John x. 

Denunciations against the Scribes and 

Pharisees. .......... . Perasa. Luke xi. 29-36. 

Discourse concerning Humility and 

Prudence. . . Galilee. Luke xiv. 7-14. 

Directions how to attain Heaven. . . . Peraea. Mat. xix. 16-30. 

Discourse concerning his Sufferings. .Jerusalem. Mat. xx. 17-19. 

Denunciations against the Pharisees. . Jerusalem. Mat. xxii. 

Prediction of the Destruction of Jeru- 
salem. . . . Jerusalem. Mat. xxiv. 

The Consolatory Discourse. • . . . . Jerusalem. Tohn xiv. -xvii. 

Discourse as he went to Gethsemane. . Jerusalem. Mat. xxvi. 31-36. 

Discourse to the Disciples before his 

Ascension Jerusalem. Mat. xxviii. 16-23. 

13 



Some of the Principal Promises in the Old Testament 
relating to the Messiah, with their Accomplishment 
in the Exact Words in the New Testaments 



I. 

PROPHECIES RELATIVE TO THE ADVENT, PERSON, 
SUFFERINGS, RESURRECTION, AND ASCENSION 
OF THE MESSIAH. 

* PROPHECIES. 



FULFILMENT. 



Gen. iii. 15. 
Gen. xlix. 10. 
Ps. ii. 7. 
Gen. xii. 3 ; xviii. 

18. u 
Isa. vii. 14. 
Micah v. 2. 
Deut. xviii. 15, 

18. 
Isa. xxxv. 5, 6. 
Zech. ix. 9. 
Ps. xli. 9 ; lv. 12- 

„ H- .. 

Ps. xxn. 16, 17. 

Ps. xxii. 12, 13. 

Ps. lxix. 21. 

Ps. xxxiv. 20. 
Isa. li.i. 9. 

Ps. Ixviii. x8. 



Hag. ii. 7. 
Mai. iii. 1. 
Isa. ix. 6. 
Gen. xlix. 10 ; 

ix. 7. 
Jer. xxxi. 22. 
Mai. iii. 1 ; 

xl.,3- 
Isa. ix. 1, 2. 
Isa. xxix. 18. 
Isa. liii. 3. 
Zech. xi. 12, 
Isa. liii. 5, 8. 
Ps. xxii. 7, 8. 
Ps. xxii. 18. 
Zech. x.i. 10. 
Ps. xvi. 9, 10. 
Joel ii. a& 



Isa. 



Isa. 



i.3- 



Gal. iv. 4. 
Luke ii. 1, 3-5. 
Heb.i. 8. 
Acts iii. 25. 

Mat. i. 24, 25. 
Luke ii. 4-6. 
Jn. iv. 19; vi. 

14- 
Mat. xi. 4, 5. 
Mat. xxi. 7-10. 
Luke xxii. 3, 4. 

Jn. xix. 1, 2. 
Mat. xxvii. 39-42. 
Jn. xix. 29 ; Mat. 

xxv.i. 48. 
Jn. xix. 32, 33. 
Mat. xxvn. 38, 

1 Cor. xv. 4 ; Acts 
i. 9. 



Luke ii. 10. 
(Mat. ii. 1-10. 
J Ino. i. 1, 14. 
|Heb. vii. 14. 

I Luke i. 26-35. 
Mat. iii. 1 ; Lu. 

vii. 27, 28. 
* Mat. iv. 12, 17. 
Mat. xv. 30, 31. 
Luke ix. 58. 
Mat. xxvii. 3-8. 
I Mark xv. 19, 25. 
Luke xxji. 35-37. 
Jn. xix. 23, 24. 
Jn. xix. 34. 
Acts ii. 31. 
Acts ii. 1-4 ; iv. 

3i. 



II. 

PROPHECIES RELATIVE TO THE OFFICES OF THfe 

MESSIAH. 



PROPHECIES. 


FULFILMENT. 


Deut. xviii. 18, 19. 


Isa. Ii. 1. 


Luke vii. 16. 


Mark i. 14. 


Ps. lxxviii. 


Isa. ix. 2. 


See page — . 


Jno. xii. 46. 


Ps. ii. 2. 


Ps. ex. 4. 


Mat. xxvi. 63,64. 


Heb. iv. 14 ; 


Isa. liii. 6, 10-12. 




Eph. v. 2. 


viii. 1. 


Isa. lix. 20. 


Dan. ix. 4. 


Jn. iv. 42. 


Heb. x. 12. 


Isa. liii. 12. 


Dan. ix. 17-19. 


Luke xxiii. 34. 


Jn. xv. 16 ; xvi. 


Ps. ii. 6. 




Luke i. 32, 33. 


23, 24. 


Ps. lxxx. 27^ 36. 


Isa. xl. 11. 


1 Tim. vi. 15. 


Jn. x. 11, 14. 


Ps. viii. 5. 


Jer. xxiii. 5, 6. 


Heb. ii. 9 ; xii. 2. 


Jn. xviii. 33, 36, 




Dan. vii. 13, 14. 




37- . 
Eph. 1. 21. 




Isa. liii. 10, 12. 




Phil. ii. 8-10. 



* The references in the first column correspond with those in tha 
third, and those in the second column with the fourth. 

H 



THE 



NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 



CLASSIFICATION OF THE BOOKS OF THE 
NEW TESTAMENT. 

Various modes of arranging the books of the New 
Testament have obtained at different times. As far back 
as the time of Ignatius, about A. D. 100, the New Testa- 
ment consisted of two codes, or collections, called "Gos- 
pels" and "Epistles," or "Gospels" and "Apostles." 
But the more modern, and certainly more convenient 
arrangement is that of Historical, Doctrinal, and Pro- 
phetical Books. 

The Historical Books comprise the four Gospels, which 
relate to the transactions of Jesus Christ, and the Acts of 
the Apostles, relating principally to the transactions of 
Peter and Paul. 

The Doctrinal Books include the fourteen Epistles 
of St. Paul, and the seven Catholic Epistles, so called 
because they were chiefly addressed to the converted 
Jews who were dispersed throughout the Eoraan em- 
pire. The Revelation of St. John forms the Prophetical 
class of the books of the New Testament. This book, 
Dr. Mill remarks, is fitly placed last, because it predicts 
things that are hereafter to be fulfilled, and is therefore 
of a different kind from the rest; and also because it has, 
towards the end, that remarkable clause (Rev. xxii. 18, 
19) agamst adding to or taking from it, which may be 
applied to all the books of Scripture ; to which observa- 
tion may be added, there are strong reasons for believing 
it to be the last written of all the books of the New Tes- 
tament. 15 



16 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 



CHAPTER I. 

THE HISTORICAL BOOKS OF THE NEW 
TESTAMENT. 

SECTION I. 

OBSERVATIONS ON THE CANONICAL GOSPELS. 

. I. The word which we translate Gospel, among Greek 
profane writers, signifies any good tidings, and corre- 
sponds exactly with our English word Gospel, which is 
derived from the Saxon, and signifies God's word, or 
good tidings. In the New Testament this term is con- 
lined to the glad tidings of the actual coming of the 
Messiah, and is even opposed to the prophecies concern- 
ing Christ (Rom. i. 1, 2). Ecclesiastical writers gave 
the appellation of Gospels to the lives of Christ ; and the 
authors of those sacred histories in which are recorded 
14 the good tidings of great joy to all people" of the 
advent of the Messiah, together with all its joyful cir- 
cumstances, have acquired the title of Evangelists. 

Besides this general title, the sacred writers use the 
term Gospel with a variety of epithets, a part of which 
it may be necessary to mention. 

Thus it is called the Gospel of Peace (Eph. vi. 15), 
because it proclaims peace with God to fallen man 
through Jesus Christ; the Gospel of God concerning 
his Son (Rom. i. 1, 3), because it relates everything 
concerning the conception and birth of Christ, together 
with all his sayings, actions, crucifixion, resurrection, 
and ascension ; the Gospel of his Son (Rom. i. 9), the Gos- 
pel of Salvation (Eph. i. 13), because it offers salvation 
to the lost or miserable ; the Gospel of the Kingdom of 
God (Matt. iv. 23, ix. 35, xxiv. 14; Mark i. 14), because 
it proclaims the power and dominion of the Messiah, 
the nature and privileges of his kingdom, its laws, and 
the duties of its subjects ; the Word or Doctrine of 
the Gospel (Acts xv. 7) ; the Word of Reconciliation 
(2 Cor. v. 19), because it makes known the manner and 
terms by which God is reconciled to sinners ; the Gos- 
pel of Glory (or the Glorious Gospel) of the blessed God 



THE CANONICAL GOSPELS. 17 

(1 Tim. i. 11), and the Gospel of the Grace of God 
(Acts xx. 24), because it is a declaration of God's free 
favor to all men. The blessings and privileges prom- 
ised in the New Testament (1 Cor. ix. 23). the public 
profession of Christian doctrine (Mark viii. 35, x. 29 ; 
2 Tim. i. 8; Philem. ver. 13), and in Gal. i. (J, 8, 0, any 
new doctrines, whether true or false, are respectively 
called the Gospel. 

II. The general design of the Evangelists in writing 
the Gospels was, doubtless, to confirm the Christians of 
that and every succeeding age in their belief in the 
truth that Jesus is the Messiah, the Son of God, through 
whom alone they can obtain eternal life (John xx. 31), 
and also to defend this momentous truth against the 
calumnies of the adversaries of the Christian faith. 

This task was executed by two apostles, Matthew and 
John, and two companions of the apostles, Mark and 
Luke. Of these evangelists, Matthew, Mark, and Luke 
have chiefly related the actions and doctrines of Jesus in 
Galilee, probably on account of the false reports circu- 
lated by the Jews in Jerusalem, who, being unable to 
deny the memorable transactions performed there by 
Jesus Christ, seem to have directed all their efforts to 
invalidate their credibility. On the contrary, John expa- 
tiates more largely on the actions and doctrines of our 
Saviour, both at Jerusalem and in Judea, and adds a 
variety of particulars omitted by the others. 

III. The Gospels which have been transmitted to us 
are four in number; and we learn from undoubted au- 
thority, that four, and four only, were ever received by 
the Christian Church as the genuine and inspired writ- 
ings of the evangelists. 

"Though we have only four original writers of the 
life of Jesus, the evidence of the history does not rest on 
the testimony of four men. Christianity had been propa- 
gated in a great part of the world before any of them 
had written, on the testimony of thousands and tens of 
thousands, who had been witnesses of the great facts 
which they have recorded ; so that the writing of these 
particular books is not to be considered as the cause, but 
rather the effect, of the belief of Christianity; nor could 
these books have been written and received as they were, 
— viz., as autJientic histories of the subject of which all 
persons of that age were judges, — if the facts they have 
recorded had not been known to be true." — Dr. Priest- 
ley's Notes on the Bible. 
2 



18 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

SECTION II. 
ON THE GOSPEL BY ST. MATTHEW. 

The Gospel of St. Matthew, which comprises twenty- 
eight chapters, consists of four parts, viz. : — 

Part I. treats on the genealogy of Jesus Christ (i. 1-17) ; 
the birth of Christ (i. 18-25) ; the adoration of the Magi 
and slaughter of the infants at Bethlehem and in its 
vicinity (ii-)« 

Part II. records the discourses and actions of John the 
Baptist, and the baptism of Jesus Christ by him (iii.) ; 
the temptation of Christ in the wilderness (iv. 1-11). 

Part III. Christ goes into Galilee, calls Peter, An- 
drew, James, and John, and performs various miracu- 
lous cures (iv. 12-25) ; Sermon on the Mount (v., vi., 
vii.) ; a narrative of several miracles performed by 
Christ, and the calling of Matthew (viii., ix.) ; Christ's 
charge to the twelve apostles, whom he sent forth to 
preach to the Jews (x., xi. 1.); the manner in which 
the discourses and actions of Christ were received by the 
various classes of men (xi. 2-xvi. 1-12) ; the discourses 
and actions of Christ immediately concerning his disci- 
ples (xvi. 13-xx. 1-1G). 

Part IV. contains the discourses and miracles of Christ 
on his way to Jerusalem (xx. 17-24) ; the transactions at 
Jerusalem until his passion (xxi.-xxvii. 1-61) ; the trans- 
actions on the Sabbath of Passion-week (that is, from 
sunset on Friday to sunset on Saturday, on Passion- 
week) ; the sepulchre of Christ secured (xxvii. G2-G6) ; 
the transactions after Christ's resurrection, chiefly on 
Easter-day (xxviii.). 

SECTION III. 
ON THE GOSPEL BY ST. MARK. 

The Gospel of St. Mark consists of sixteen chapters, 
which may be divided into three parts, viz. : — 

Part I. The transactions from the baptism of Christ 
to his entering on the more public part of his ministry 
(chap. i. 1— i8). 

Part II. The discourses and actions of Jesus Christ 
between the first and second passover (i. 14-45, ii. 1-22) ; 
the transactions between the second and third passover 
(ii. 23-28, iii.-vi.) ; the transactions of the third pass- 



THE CANONICAL GOSPELS. 19 

over to Christ's going up to Jerusalem to the fourth and 
last passover (vii.-x.). 

Part III. The first day of Passion-week, or Palm 
Sunday. Christ's triumphal entry into Jerusalem (xi. 
1-11) ; the transactions on the second day, or Monday 
(xi. 12-19) ; the transactions on the third, day, or Tues- 
day (xi. 20-23-xiii.) ; the transactions of the fourth day, 
or Wednesday (xiv. 1-9) ; the transactions of the fifth 
day, or Thursday (xiv. 10-16) ; the transactions of the 
Passover-day, that is, from Thursday evening to Friday 
evening of Passion-week, including the institution of the 
Lord's Supper, Christ's agony in the garden, his being 
betrayed by Judas, his trial, crucifixion, and burial (xiv. 
17-72, xv.); the transactions after the resurrection of 
Christ (xvi.). 

From the striking coincidence between the Gospel of 
Mark and that of Matthew, several learned men have 
imagined that Mark compiled his Gospel from him. For 
proof that this hypothesis is not tenable, see Home's In- 
troduction to the Bible, vol. iv. pp. 257-259. 



SECTION IV. 

ON THE GOSPEL BY ST. LUKE. 

The Gospel of St. Luke, which consists of twenty -four 
chapters, is divided by Rosenmuller and others into five 
distinct classes or sections. 

Class I. contains the narrative of the birth of Christ, 
together with all the circumstances that preceded, attend- 
ed, and immediately followed it (i., ii. 1-40). 

Class II. comprises the particulars relative to our Sa- 
viour's infancy and youth (ii. 41-52). 

Class III. includes the preaching of John and the bap- 
tism of Jesus Christ, whose genealogy is annexed (iii.). 

Class IV. comprehends the discourses, miracles, and 
actions of Jesus Christ during the whole three years of 
his ministry (iv.-ix. 50). This appears evident; for, 
after St. Luke had related his temptation in the wilder- 
ness (iv. 1-13), he immediately adds, that Christ returns 
to Galilee (14), and mentions Nazareth (M>), Capernaum 
(31), and lake of Gennesareth (v. 1) ; and then he pro- 
ceeds (ix. 50) to relate our Saviour's transactions in 
Galilee. 

Class V. contains an account of our Saviour's last 



20 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

journey to Jerusalem, including every circumstance reU 
ative to his passion, death, resurrection, and ascension, 
(ix. 51-62, x.-xxiv). 



SECTION V. 

ON THE GOSPEL BY ST. JOHN. 

The Gospel of St. John, which consists of twenty-one 
chapters, is divided into three parts, viz. : — 

Part I. contains doctrines laid down in opposition to 
those of Cerinthus (i. 1-18), who, having studied litera- 
ture and philosophy at Alexandria, attempted to form a 
new system of doctrine and discipline, by a monstrous 
combination of the doctrines of Jesus Christ with the 
opinions and errors of the Jews and Gnostics. 

Part II. The Evangelist, having settled the proposi- 
tion in Part I., proceeds to deliver the proofs of these 
doctrines in an historical manner (i. 19-xx. 2d), as being 
all expressed, or plainly implied, in the discourses and 
transactions of Jesus Christ. 

Part III. contains an account of the person of the 
writer of this Gospel, and his design in writing it (xx. 30, 
31, xxi.). 

St. John evidently had in view to convince his readers 
that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God (xx. 31), and 
consequently that the tenets and notions of Cerinthus 
were altogether false and heretical. 

That the four Gospels were written by the persons 
whose names they severally bear is so generally acknowl- 
edged, we have thought it unnecessary here to intro- 
duce the many proofs usually adduced for this purpose. 
For further particulars in regard to the Gospels and their 
authors, see Biographical Sketches. 



SECTION VI. 

ON THE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES. 

The Acts of the Apostles forms the fifth and last of the 
historical books of the New Testament, and connects the 
Gospels with the Epistles, being a useful postscript to 
the former, and a proper introduction to the latter. For 
this reason it is usually placed between the Gospels and 
Epistlesj although, if placed in the order of the time in 



THE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES. 21 

which they were written, it should be placed before 
John's Gospel. 

This book contains a great part of the lives and trans- 
actions of St. Peter and St. Paul, and of the history of 
the Christian church, commencing at the ascension of 
our Saviour (A. D. 29), and being continued down to 
St. Paul's arrival at Rome, after his appeal to Caesar, 
comprising a period of about thirty years. That St. 
Luke was the author of the Acts of the Apostles, as well 
as of the Gospel that bears his name, is evident, both 
from the introduction and from the unanimous testimony 
of the early Christians. Both are inscribed to Theophi- 
lus ; and in the very first verse of the Acts there is a ref- 
erence made to his Gospel, which he calls the former 
treatise. On this account. Dr. Benson and some others 
have conjectured that St. Luke wrote the Gospels and 
the Acts in one book, and divided it into two parts. 
Prom the frequent use of the first person plural, it is 
clear that he was present at most of the transactions he 
relates. 

The Acts of the Apostles, as they appear in our copies, 
contain twenty-eight chapters, and may be divided into 
three different parts, viz. : — 

Part I. contains the rise and progress of the mother 
church at Jerusalem from the time of our Saviour's as- 
cension to the first Jewish persecution (chap, i.-viii.). 

Part II. comprises the dispersion of the disciples, the 
propagation of Christianity among the Samaritans, the 
conversion of St. Paul, and the foundation of a Christian 
church at Antioch (viii. 5-12). 

Part III. describes the conversion of the more remote 
Gentiles by Barnabas and Paul, and, after their separa- 
tion, by Paul and his associates, among whom was Luke 
himself during the latter part of Paul's labors (xiii.-xxviii.) 
See Synchronology, from A. I). 20 to 63, in another part 
of this Look. 



22 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 



CHAPTER II. 

THE DOCTRINAL BOOKS OF THE NEW 
TESTAMENT. 

SECTION I. 

THE APOSTOLICAL EPISTLES. 

Observations on the Apostolical Epistles in general, and 
those of St. Paul in particular, 

I. The Epistles, or letters addressed to various Chris- 
tian communities, and also to individuals, by the apostles 
Paul, James, Peter, John, and Jude, form the second 
principal division of the New Testament. 

These writings abundantly confirm all the material 
facts related in the Gospels and Acts of the Apostles. 

Though all the essential precepts and doctrines of the 
Christian religion were taught by our Saviour himself, 
and are contained in the Gospels, yet it is evident to every 
one who studies carefully the Epistles, that they are to 
be considered as commentaries on the doctrines of the 
gospel, addressed to particular Christian societies or in- 
dividuals, in order to explain to them and enforce more 
fully those doctrines, to confute some growing errors, to 
compose differences, to reform abuses and corruptions, 
to excite Christians to holiness, and to encourage them 
against persecutions. 

On account of the fuller displays of evangelical truth 
contained in this part of the sacred volume, the Epistles 
have been termed the doctrinal books of the New Testa- 
ment. They announce and explain doctrines of which 
our Saviour had not fully treated in his discourses, and 
which consequently are not clearly declared in the Gos- 
pels. 

Our Saviour often accommodated his expressions to 
those prejudices in which the people had been educated. 
Thus, in his discourses concerning his kingdom, he does 
not attempt at once to eradicate the erroneous notions 
they entertained, that he was to set up a temporal king- 
dom, but chose rather to remove them by gentle and easy 
degrees (Luke xxii. 30; Matt. xix. 28). 

For announcements relative to the real and spiritual 



THE APOSTOLICAL EPISTLES. 23 

nature of Christ's kingdom, see 1 Peter i. 4; 2 Peter iii. 
13; 1 Cor. xv. 28; 2 Cor. iv. 18. It was the same pre- 
judices concerning the temporal glories of Christ's king- 
dom which caused his disciples to misunderstand the 
meaning of his clear and explicit discourses concerning 
his sufferings, death, and resurrection (Mark ix. 10; 
Luke ix. 45, xviii. 34). 

It is in the Epistles principally that we are clearly 
taught the calling of the Gentiles to make one church 
with the Jews. Our Lord had indeed intimated this glo- 
rious event in some general expressions, and also in some 
of his parables (see Matt. vii. 1, xx. 1 ; Lukexv. 11, &c.) ; 
and, notwithstanding the numerous prophecies of the Old 
Testament were sufficient to convince the Jews that God 
would more clearly reveal the knowledge of himself and 
his will to the world in the times of the Messiah, the 
privileges, which they fancied were peculiar to them- 
selves as a nation, made them unwilling to believe that 
the Gentiles should ever be fellow-heirs with the Jews, 
of the same body or church with them, and partakers of 
the same promises in Christ by the gospel (Eph. iii. 5). 
This St. Peter himself could hardly be persuaded to be- 
lieve, till he was convinced by a particular vision vouch- 
safed to him for that purpose (Acts x. 28). And St. 
Paul tells us that this was a mystery which was but newly 
revealed to the apostles by the Spirit (Eph. iii. 5), and 
therefore not fully discovered to them by Christ before. 

It is also in the Epistles chiefly that the ineflicacy of 
the law to procure our justification in the sight of God, 
the cessation of the law, and the eternal and unchangea- 
ble nature of Christ's priesthood, are set forth. Compare 
Rom. iii. 20, 25; Gal. ii. 21, iii. 16, v. 2, o- y Heb. ix. 10, 
vii. 18, v. 5, 6, vii. 24, 25. 

In the Epistles only we have instructions concerning 
many great and necessary duties. 

Such are the following, viz. : That all our thanksgivings 
are to be offered up to God in the name of Christ (com- 
pare Eph. v. 8, 20; 1 Thess. v. 18 ; Heb. xiii. 14, 15). The 
duties we owe our civil governors are only hinted at in 
these words of Christ, " Render unto Cesar the things 
that are Cesar's ," but are enlarged upon in St. Paul's 
Epistles to the Romans (xiii.) and to Titus (iii. 1), and 
also in the First Epistle of St. Peter (ii. 13, 17). In like 
manner the duties we owe to the ministers of the gospel 
(our spiritual governors') are more expressly taught in 
St. Paul's Epistle to the Galatians (vi. 6 ; 1 Thess. v. 12, 



24 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

13), and to the Hebrews (xiii. 17, 18). Lastly, all the 
duties belonging to the relations of husbands and wives, 
parents and children, masters and servants, are particu- 
larly treated in the Epistles to the Ephesians (v. 28-33, 
vi. 1-9) and the Colossians (iii. 11-25), but are scarcely 
ever mentioned in the Gospels. 

II. The Epistles contained in the New Testament are 
twenty-one in number, and are generally divided into 
two classes — the Epistles of St. Paul and the Catholic 
Epistles. Of these, fourteen were written by the great 
Apostle to the Gentiles. They are not placed in our 
Bibles according to the order of time when they were 
composed, but according to the supposed precedence of 
the persons or societies to which tiiey were addressed. 
Thus the Epistles to churches are disposed according to 
the rank of the cities or places whither they were sent. 

Among the Epistles to particular persons, those to 
Timothy have the precedence, as lie was a favorite dis- 
ciple of St. Paul, and also because those Epistles are the 
largest and fullest. 

Last of all St. Paul's Epistles comes that to the He- 
brews, because its authenticity was doubted for a short 
time (though without any foundation, as the testimony 
of all ecclesiastical antiquity decidedly ascribes this 
Epistle to St. Paul). Dr. Lardner also thinks it was last 
written of all St. Paul's Epistles. 

III. The Catholic Epistles are seven in number, and 
contain the letters of the apostles James, Peter, John, 
and Jude. They are termed Catholic — that is, general 
or universal — because they are not addressed to the be- 
lievers of some particular city or country, or to individ- 
uals, — as St. Paul's Epistles were, — but to Christians 
in general, or to Christians of several countries. 

IV. Explicit as the Epistles unquestionably are in all 
fundamental points, it is not to be denied that some 
parts of them are more difficult to be understood than 
the Gospels. The reason of these seeming difficulties is 
evident. In an Epistle many things are omitted, or only 
slightly mentioned, because they are supposed to be 
known by the persons to whom they are addressed ; but 
to a person unacquainted with such particulars, they can- 
not but present considerable difficulty. It is further evi- 
dent from many passages, that St. Paul answers letters 
sent and questions proposed to him by his correspond- 
ents, which, if they had been preserved, would have 
illustrated different passages much better than all the 



EPISTLE TO THE ROMANS. 25 

notes of commentators and critics. To these causes of 
obscurity common to all the writers of the Epistles, there 
are many peculiar to St. Paul, owing to his style and 
temper. . Possessing an ardent, acute, and fertile mind, 
he seems to have written with great rapidity, and without 
close attention to method. Hence arise those frequent 
parentheses which occur in his Epistles. 

The most useful mode of studying the epistolary writ- 
ings of the New Testament is, unquestionably, that pro- 
posed and recommended by Mr. Locke (see Preface). 

SECTION II. 

THE EPISTLE TO THE ROMANS. 

This Epistle is placed first in order of all the apostol- 
ical letters, though fifth in order of time, either from the 
preeminence of Koine, as being the mistress of the world, 
or because the Epistle itself is one of the longest and 
most comprehensive of all that were written by the apos- 
tle. Various years have been assigned for its date. 
While Archbishop Usher and our Bible chronology refer 
it to the year GO, it seems the most probable date is that 
which assigns it to the end of 57, or beginning of 58, at 
which time St. Paul w;is at Corinth, preparing to go to 
Jerusalem with the collections made by the Christians of 
Macedonia and A chain, for their poor brethren in Judea 
(Rom. xv. 25-27). It \wis dictated by Paul to Tertius 
his amanuensis (xvi. 22), and sent to Home by Phebe, a 
deaconess of the church at Cenchrea. It is further evi- 
dent that it was written from that city from Romans xvi. 
23, where he sends salutations from Erastus, the chamber- 
lain of Corinth (which city, we learn from 2 Tim. iv. 20, 
was the place of his residence), and from Gaius, who 
lived at Corinth (1 Cor. i. 14), whom St. Paul terms his 
host, and the host of all the Christian church there. 
This Epistle has always been acknowledged to be a gen- 
uine and authentic production of St. Paul. The Scrip- 
tures do not inform us when or by whom the gospel was 
first preached at Rome. But it is conjectured that it 
was carried thither by some of those Jews who were 
converted at the day of Pentecost (Acts ii. 10). Had 
St. Peter preached the gospel there, as some assert, it is 
not likely sucli an event would have been left unnoticed 
in the Acts of the Apostles, where the labors of Peter 
are particularly related with those of St. Paul. It is 



26 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

further evident, from Romans i. 8, that Paul had never 
been in that city previous to his writing this Epistle ; but 
being made fully acquainted with the circumstances of 
the church there by Aquila and Priscilla (chap. xv. 3), 
he adopted this method of establishing believers in the 
faith, and of giving them such comprehensive views of 
the Christian religion as to guard them against the insin- 
uations of false teachers of various kinds. 

In order fully to understand this Epistle, it is necessary 
that we should be acquainted with the tenets believed by 
those whose errors the apostle here exposes and con- 
futes. 

It is clear that he wrote to persons who had been either 
Gentiles or Jews, and that he designed to remove the 
prejudices entertained by both. The Gentiles, who lived 
in gross ignorance, were not much troubled concerning 
the salvation of their souls, but believed their sins were 
expiated by their virtues, and declared a man to be inno- 
cent who repented of his faults. 

The Jews, on the other hand, believed there was no one 
so righteous as not to stand in need of pardon ; but if 
there remained anything to be pardoned, they said every- 
thing would be expiated by death. The grounds of their 
justification were, — 

1. The extraordinary piety of their ancestors, and the 
covenant God made with them. 

2. Their knowledge of God through his law, and their 
diligence in the study of that law. 

3. The works of the Levitical law, which were to ex- 
piate sin, especially circumcision and sacrifices. 

The Epistle to the Romans consists of four parts, 
viz. : — 

Part I. The Introduction (chap. i. 1-13). 

Part II. contains the doctrinal part of the Epistle con' 
cerning justification (i. 16-32, ii.-xi.), showing how 
justification is to be obtained (i. 17), and particularly 
the equal privileges of the Jews and Gentiles. 

Part III. comprises the hortatory or practical part of 
the Epistle (xii.-xv. 1-14). 

Part IV. The conclusion, in which St. Paul excuses 
himself partly for his boldness in thus writing to the 
Romans (xv. 14-21), and partly for not having hitherto 
come to them (22), but promises to visit them, recom- 
mending himself to their prayers (23-33), sends vari- 
ous salutations to the brethren at Rome (xvi.), and as- 
cribes glory to God our Saviour. 



FIRST EPISTLE TO THE CORINTHIANS. 27 

" St. Paul," says Dr. Taylor, " was a great genius and 
a fine writer; and he seems to have exercised all his 
talents, as well as the most perfect Christian temper, in 
drawing up this Epistle." In perusing which, it will be 
desirable to read the first eleven chapters at once, unin- 
terruptedly, as every sentence seems dependent upon the 
whole discourse, and cannot be fully understood unless 
we comprehend the scope of the whole. 



SECTION III. 

THE FIRST EPISTLE TO THE CORINTHIANS. 

Christianity was undoubtedly first introduced at Corinth 
by St. Paul himself, about the year 53 or 54 (Acts 
xviii. 1-11). On St Paul's departure from Corinth, he 
was succeeded by Apollos (Acts xviii. 24-28). Aquila 
and Sosthenes were also eminent teachers in this church 
(xviii. 2; 1 Cor. i. 1). 

Soon after St. Paul left this church, its peace was dis- 
turbed by the intrusion of false teachers, who made great 
pretensions to wisdom and a knowledge of their Christian 
liberty, and thus undermined his influence, and the credit 
of his ministry. 

It appears, from chapter vii. 1, that St. Paul wrote this 
Epistle in answer to a letter which he had received from 
the church at Corinth. While they had asked his advice 
on certain points, they had said nothing of the enormi- 
ties and disorders that had crept in among them, and in 
the blame of which they all shared. Hence the object 
of the apostle in writing this Epistle seems to have been 
twofold, viz. : — 

First, the information he had received while at Ephe- 
sus of the disorders that prevailed in the church at Cor- 
inth, such as schisms and divisions (1 Cor. i. 11); 
many notorious scandals (v., vi.) ; idolatrous commun- 
ion with the heathens at their idol feasts (viii. 10) ; want 
of decorum and order in their public worship (xi. 2-16, 
xiv.) ; gross profanation of the Lord's Supper (xi. 
17-34) ; and the denial of the resurrection and eternal 
life (xv. 12). 

The second cause of the apostle's writing this Epistle 
was his receiving a letter from the church at Corinth, by 
the hands of Stephanas, Fortunatus, and Achaicus 
(xvi. 12-17, vii. 1), in which the Corinthian Christians 
requested his advice concerning marriage (vii. 1), things 



28 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

sacrificed to idols (viii.), spiritual gifts (xii.), prophesy' 
ing, or teaching others (xiv.), and concerning their 
making charitable collections to their poor brethren in 
Juclea (xvi. 1), &c, &c. 

The apostle seems to have endeavored to apply suita- 
ble remedies to the disorders and abuses which had 
crept into the church at Corinth, by giving to the Corin- 
thians satisfactory answers on all those points on which 
they had requested his advice and information. The 
Epistle divides itself into three parts, viz. : — 

Part I. The introduction, in which St. Paid expresses 
his satisfaction at their having received the gifts of the 
Holy Spirit for the confirmation of the gospel (i. 1-9). 

Part II. Contains a reproof of the coi'ruptions and 
abuses which had crept into the church (i. 10, vi. 1-20), 
and an answer to the questions which the Corinthian 
church had proposed to the apostle (vii.-xv). 

Part III. Comprises directions relative to the collec- 
tions for the saints at Jerusalem ; the apostle's promise 
soon to visit them, and salutations to various members 
of the church at Corinth. 

The genuineness of this Epistle was never seriously 
doubted. The opinion expressed by many, that it was 
written at Philippi, seems to be contradicted by St. 
Paul himself in xvi. 8. In Acts xvii. 18-23, xix. 1, 
xx. 31, we learn that after St. Paul had left Corinth, he 
went into Asia, and returned to Ephesus, where he re- 
mained three years ; and it was doubtless at the close of 
his residence in Ephesus that he wrote this Epistle, as 
appears from 1 Cor. xvi. 8. 

SECTION IV. 

THE SECOND EPISTLE TO THE CORINTHIANS. 

On quitting Ephesus, where the preceding Epistle 
was written, Paul went to Troas, in expectation of meet- 
ing Titus, to learn the success (he hoped) of his former 
Epistle, and the present condition of the Corinthian 
church (2 Cor. ii. 12). But not meeting Titus there, 
he proceeded to Macedonia (ver. 13), where he obtained 
the desired interview, and received satisfactory informa- 
tion concerning the promising state of affairs at Corinth 
(vii. 5). From this country, and probably from Philippi 
(as the subscription imports), he wrote the second letter 
(2 Cor. viii. 1-14, ix. 1-5), which he sent by Titus and 



SECOND EPISTLE TO THE CORINTHIANS. 29 

his associates, who were commissioned to hasten and 
finish the contribution among the Christians at Corinth 
for the use of their poor brethren in Judea (ix. 2-4). 

From these historical circumstances it is generally 
agreed that this Epistle was written within a year after 
the former. As the result of the First Epistle to the Co- 
rinthians, many amended their conduct, and showed 
strong marks of repentance, and such respect for the 
apostle, that they excommunicated the incestuous person 
(2 Cor. ii. 5-11, vii. 11), requested the apostle's return 
with tears (vii. 7), and vindicated the apostle and his of- 
fice against the false teacher and his adherents (vii. 7-11). 

Others, however, of the Corinthians adhered to the 
false teacher, denied Paul's apostolical ministry by argu- 
ments which they pretended to draw from his First 
Epistle. Paul, having intimated his intention to visit 
Corinth from Ephesus (2 Cor. i. \5, 1G), was led to 
alter his intentions after he learned the true state of 
the church there, as he must have treated them with 
severity, had lie visited them (23). 

The scope of this Epistle is a vindication of himself of 
the various accusations his enemies had brought against 
him, and to stir them up to lead a holy life, and particu- 
larly to avoid communion with idolaters. 

This Epistle, like the first, is divided into three parts, 
viz. : — 

Part I. The introduction (i. 1-2). 

Part II. Paul justifies himself from the charges pre- 
ferred against him by the false teacher and his adherents, 
by showing his sincerity and integrity in the discharge 
of his ministry, and that he acted from a tender regard 
for their spiritual welfare (i. 3-2-1, ii.-vii.); he exhorts 
them to a liberal contribution for their brethren in Judea, 
and endeavors to detach the Corinthians from the false 
teacher and his adherents, and reestablish his authority 
(x.-xiii. 10). 

Part III. Conclusion; with various admonitions and 
affectionate good wishes and prayers (xiii. 1 J —14). 

It has been truly said, "The most remarkable circum- 
stance in this Epistle is, the confidence of the apostle in 
the goodness of his cause, and in the power of God to 
bear him out in it." 

St. Luke briefly notices (in Acts xx. 2, 3) Paul's 
second journey to Corinth, after writing this Epistle; and 
it is worthy of note, that from this time we hear no more 
of the false teacher. 



30 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

The apostle mentions (2 Cor. xii. 14, and xiii. 1, 2) 
his intention to visit Corinth a third time ; and as only 
one visit before the date of this Epistle is mentioned in 
the Acts (xviii. 1), a considerable chronological difficulty 
had occurred. But this third visit was actually paid on 
the apostle's second return to Rome, when he took 
Corinth in his way (2 Tim. iv. 20). 

SECTION V. 

THE EPISTLE TO THE GALATIANS. 

The Galatians, or Gallo-Grecians, were the descendants 
of those Gauls, who, finding their country too small to 
support its redundant population, migrated from their 
own country, after the death of Alexander the Great, 
about 278 B. C, to seek for new settlements, and, after 
a variety of disasters, got possession of a large district 
in Asia Minor, near to Lycaonia, Lystra, and Iconium, 
from them called Galatia. 

Historians represent them as a tall and valiant people, 
who went nearly naked, armed only with a buckler and 
sword; and the impetuosity of their attacks is said to 
have been irresistible. Their religion before their con- 
version was exceedingly corrupt and superstitious. It is 
supposed they retained their native language and customs 
at the time the gospel was first preached among them. 
Christianity was very early planted in Galatia by St. 
Paul himself; as it appears from the Acts of the Apostles, 
he made two distinct visits to that place. The first is 
mentioned in Acts xvi. 6, the second, Acts xviii. 23. 

There is a diversity of opinion, among learned men, as 
to the time when St. Paul wrote tins Epistle to the Gala- 
tians, but the genuineness of the Epistle was never doubt- 
ed. It is evident that this Epistle was written early, be- 
cause the apostle complains in it of their speedy apostasy 
from his doctrine (Gal. i, 6), and warns them, in the 
strongest terms, against the Judaizing teachers who dis- 
turbed the peace of the churches in Syria and Asia 
Minor (i. 7-9, hi. 1). 

As there is no intimation in this Epistle that St. Paul 
had visited Galatia more than once, there can be no 
doubt that he wrote this letter from Corinth, and the sub- 
scription which states it to have been from Rome is" 
doubtless spurious, as Paul's first journey to Rome did 
not take place until at least ten years after the conversion 
of the Galatians. 



EPISTLE TO THE EPHESIANS. 31 

The churches in Galatia were made up, like those of 
most other countries, partly of converted Jews, and part- 
ly of Gentile converts — the latter probably the more nu- 
merous. 

The circumstances which constrained St. Paul to write 
this Epistle with his own hand (Gal. vi. 11) were, in 
many respects, similar to those before mentioned in rela- 
tion to the church at Corinth. 

From the expression of St. Paul (in Gal. v. 9, 10) it 
is probable this disturbance in the Galatian church was 
made by one Judaizing teacher only, and he of an im- 
moral character (vi. 12, 13), and not by several zealots, 
as some have supposed (see Gal. v. 2-12). 

The Epistle to the Galatians consists of three parts, 
viz. : — 

Part I. The Introduction (i. 1-5). 

Part II. Is a vindication of the apostle's authority and 
doctrine, and shows that he was an immediate apostle of 
Christ himself, by divine revelation, and consequently 
not inferior to St. Peter himself (i. 6-24, ii.) ; also that 
justification is by faith in Christ, and not, as false teach- 
ers had taught them, by the works of the Mosaic law 
(iii. 1-18; also iii. 19-29, and iv. 1-7); and it further 
shows that by submitting to circumcision they became 
subject to the whole law, and would forfeit the bene- 
fits of the covenant of grace (iv. 8-31, v. 1-9). It 
also contains various instructions and exhortations for 
Christian, behavior (v. 10-26, vi. 1-10). 

Part III. Is a summary of the topics discussed, and 
closes with an apostolic benediction (vi. 11-18). 

" The Epistle to the Galatians, with that to the Romans, 
forms a complete proof that justification is not to be 
obtained meritoriously, either by works of morality, or 
rites and ceremonies, though of divine appointment, 
but that it is a free gift, proceeding entirely from the 
mercy of God, to those who are qualified by faith to 
receive it." (Dr. Macknight's Preface to the Gala- 
tians.) 

SECTION VI. 

THE EPISTLE TO THE EPHESIANS. 

" Although," says Dr. Paley, " it does not appear 
to have been ever disputed that the Epistle before us 
was written by St. Paul, yet it is well known that a 



32 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL, 

doubt has l:)ng been entertained concerning the per- 
sons to whom it was addressed. ' 

It is contended that the name at Epliesus, in the first 
verse, is the only proof that tins Epistle was addressed 
to the Ephesians, and that this is not found in all the 
manuscripts extant. 

It is further contended that there are no allusions in 
this Epistle to St. Paul's having resided among the 
people to whom it is addressed, and the expressions in 
Eph. i. 15, iii. 2, and it. 1, 2, appear to be more 
suitable to persons whom he had never seen than to 
the Ephesians, with whom he had resided about three 
years (Acts xx. 31). 

But the first of these objections seems to be satis- 
factorily met by Bishop Middleton, who has shown that 
Dr. Paley was mistaken in supposing the name Ephe- 
sus was wanting in any manuscript extant. Again, it 
will be recollected that four or five years had elapsed 
since St. Paul had quitted Ephesus, and he could with 
propriety address them as he did in chap. i. 15, and 
iii. 2. 

It has been contended that this Epistle was addressed 
to the Laodiceans, and not to the Ephesians, from the 
direction given by St. Paul in Col. iv. 1G. But (as 
Rosenmuller has remarked) it is highly probable that 
by '* the Epistle from Laodicea" St. Paul meant a let- 
ter addressed to him by the church at Laodicea, in an- 
swer to which he wrote the letter addressed to the Co- 
lossians, — that being the larger church, — and the letter 
referred to in Col. iv. 10 cannot mean the Epistle to the 
Ephesians. 

The objection often made that his salutations in this 
Epistle are general, and that none of his particular 
friends and acquaintances are mentioned, seems hardly 
worthy of notice. It would rather prove that he was 
so generally acquainted with the leading members of 
the church, that had he addressed or sent salutations to 
particular individuals, he would have given offence to 
those neglected. 

Christianity was first planted in the celebrated and 
licentious city of Ephesus by St. Paul himself, with great 
success (Acts xviii. 19-21, and xix. 1. See also Acts 
xix. 19, and xx. 17-38). 

It is universally admitted that St. Paul is the author 
of this Epistle, and the subscription states that it was 



EPISTLE TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 33 

written from Rome and sent to the Ephesians by 
Tychicus. 

That this Epistle was written during Paul's first impris- 
onment at Rome is evident from the frequent allusions 
to his confinement (iii. 1, iv. 1, vi. 20); and as he ex- 
presses no hope of his speedy release, as in his other 
Epistles from Rome, it was probably written soon after 
his arrival and imprisonment in that city, A. I). 63. 

As the Ephesian converts were almost entirely Gen- 
tiles. Paul seemed to be apprehensive that the Jews, 
whom he had provoked, would take advantage of his ab- 
sence and imprisonment to unsettle their minds. Hear- 
ing, however, that they stood fast in the faith (i. 15), he 
wrote this Epistle in order to establish them in this faith, 
and show them they were saved by grace, and that, how- 
ever wretched they once were, they now had equal priv- 
ileges with the Jews. 

In this Epistle, after the inscription (i. 1, 2), we may 
observe three particulars, viz. : — 

Part I. The doctrine explained, containing, — 

Praise to God for the whole gospel blessing (i. 3-14), 
with thanksgiving and prayer for the saints (i. 15-23, 
ii. 1-10) ; a more particular admonition concerning their 
once wretched but now happy condition (ii. 11-22) ; and 
a prayer for their establishment (iii.)* 

Part II. The exhortation. General (iv. 1-24), Partic- 
ular (iv. 25-32, v., vi. 1-9), Final, to war the spiritual 
warfare (vi. 10-20). 

Part III. The conclusion (vi. 21-24). 

The style of this Epistle seems to indicate the joyful 
feeling of the apostle on receiving from the Ephesian 
church such encouraging accounts as had been brought 
by their messenger (i. 15) ; and Grotius has remarked of 
this Epistle that it expresses the grand matters of which 
it treats in words more sublime than are to be found in 
any human tongue. 

SECTION VII. 

THE EPISTLE TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 

The manner in which St. Paul and his associates were 
led to pass over from Asia into Europe (about A. D. 
53 J, and the success of their labors at Philippi, in 
Macedonia, are fully related in Acts xvi. ; and it ap- 
pears from Acts xx. 6, that the apostle visited there 
again about seven years after, though no particulars are 



34 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

recorded concerning that visit. Of all the churches 
planted by St. Paul, that at Philippi seems to have been 
most strongly attached to him; for although a small 
community, they testified their affection by sending him 
supplies, even while laboring for other churches, and 
while he was preaching at Thessalonica, sent him money 
twice, that the success of the gospel might not be hin- 
dered by the preacher's becoming burdensome to the 
Thessalonians (Phil. iv. 15, 16). They showed the 
apostle the same attention, and for the same reason, 
when preaching at Corinth (2 Cor. xi. 9). And when 
they learned of his imprisonment at Rome, they sent a 
present to him by Epaphroditus, lest he should suffer 
(2 Cor. ii. 25, iv. 10, H-18). It appears from St. Paul's 
own words (i. 7, 13, iv. 22), that this Epistle was written 
while he was a prisoner at Rome, and, as he intimates 
an expectation of being soon released, and that he had 
been a considerable time at Rome (i. 12, ii. 26), it is 
probable he wrote this Epistle near the close of his im- 
prisonment. The genuineness of the letter was never 
questioned. The more immcdiare occasion of the Epistle 
was the return of Epaphroditus, one of their pastors, 
by whom St. Paul sent it, as a grateful acknowledgment 
of their kindness. As it was the apostle's rule to re- 
ceive nothing from churches where factions had been 
raised against him, it appears he was in great want of 
necessaries before their contributions arrived. The 
Philippians were the only church from whom he received 
any assistance. 

After a short introduction (i. 1, 2), the apostle pro- 
ceeds to express his gratitude to God for their continu- 
ing steadfast in the faith, and prays that they may so 
continue (i. 3-11), and assures them of his readiness to 
live or die, as should be most for their welfare and the 
glory of God (12-26) ; he exhorts them to walk in a man- 
ner becoming the gospel of Christ (i. 21-30, ii. 1-17), 
and promises to send them Timothy and Epaphroditus 
(19-30) ; he cautions them against the intrusion of Ju- 
daizing teachers (iii., iv. 1) ; he testifies his gratitude for 
their timely and Christian bounty, expresses his ability 
to always accommodate his temper to his circumstances, 
and in whatsoever circumstances Providence might place 
him, therewith to be content (iv 10-18) ; and concludes 
with salutations from himself and his friends at Rome, 
and a solemn benediction (21-23). 

It is worthy of note that the Epistle to the Philippi- 



EPISTLE TO THE COLOSSIANS. 35 

ans is the only one of all St. Paul's letters to the 
churches in which no censure is expressed or implied 
against one of its members. 



SECTION VIII. 

THE EPISTLE TO THE COLOSSIANS. 

It is not recorded that St. Paul had ever visited Co- 
losse, and it is wholly uncertain by whom and at what 
time Christianity was first founded there. Dr. Lardner 
and some others contend, that as St. Paul had twice 
visited Phrygia, in which country were Colosse, Laodi- 
cea, and Hierapolis, it is reasonable to infer that he 
visited those cities. But it will be seen by a careful ex- 
amination that these routes lay considerably to the north- 
ward of the three cities before named (Acts xvi. 1-8). 
In his second tour he passed through Galatia and 
Phrygia to Ephesus andTroas (Acts xviii. 21-23), and so 
through the northern districts of Asia Minor (xix. 1). 

In chap. ii. 1, of this Epistle, we have St. Paul's 
own declaration, that neither the Colossians nor Laodi- 
ceans had then " seen his face in the flesh.*' 

Rosenm Oiler is of opinion that the gospel was first 
introduced into that city by Epaphras, who is mentioned 
in i. 7, iv. 12, 13. As it appears from Acts xix. 10, 
that many Greeks came from different parts of Asia to 
hear St. Paul during his residence in Ephesus, Michaelis 
supposes that many Colossians, particularly Philemon, 
were of that number. In Colossians iv. 3, the apostle 
alludes to his imprisonment, from which, with its close 
affinity to the Epistle to the Ephesians, it is evident it 
was written nearly at the same time, or in the early part 
of his imprisonment. Its authenticity was never ques- 
tioned. 

Some difficulties having arisen among them, they send 
Epaphras to Rome to consult Paul. The Laodiceans 
also seem to have written him (Col. iv. 16) concern- 
ing the errors of the false teachers, and to ask his ad- 
vice. St. Paul therefore replies in this Epistle, which he 
sends to the Colossians, they being the larger church, 
and had probably suffered most by the false teachers, 
but desired them to send the same Epistle to the Laodi- 
ceans, and ask them for a copy of their letter to St. 
Paul, which would enable them better to understand 
his answer. Michaelis wisely remarks, that " whoever 



36 NETY TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

would understand the Epistle to the Ephesians and Co- 
lossians must read them together, as in many places 
one is a commentary on the other. 

Who these false teachers were, or the nature of their 
doctrines, is not satisfactorily known, although we may 
learn something of their doctrines from Col. ii. 16-23. 
In this Epistle St. Paul expresses great joy at the news 
of their continuing steadfast in the faith of the gospel, 
and describes to them the dignity of Jesus Christ — that 
he alone was the head of the church (i. 3-20) ; he en- 
courages them to receive Jesus Christ, and commends 
his own ministry. 

He shows them how earnestly he prayed for the Co- 
lossians, that they might continue constant in Christ 
(ii. 1-8) ; lie cautions them against the deceit of the 
false teachers, against the worship of angels, and cen- 
sures the observation of Jewish Sabbaths and festivals 
(ii. 8-23). He then adds precepts concerning the prac- 
tical duties of life (hi., iv. )-(>), and concludes with mat- 
ters chiefly of a private nature (iv. 7-18). 



SECTION IX. 

THE FIRST EPISTLE TO THE THESSALONIANS. 

The gospel was first preached at Thessalonica by St. 
Paul himself, accompanied by Silas and Timothy, who 
formed a church, composed botli of Jews and Gentiles, 
the latter being most numerous (Acts xvii. 2-4). The 
unbelieving Jews, however, stirred up a persecution 
against Paul and his associates, and they were forced to 
flee to Berea, and thence to Athens (xvii. 5-15), from 
whence he proceeded to Corinth. 

Being thus prevented from visiting Thessalonica again, 
as he intended (1 Thess. ii. 17, 18), he sent Silas and 
Timothy to visit them in his stead (iii. 1-6), and on their 
return to him at Corinth (Acts xvii. 14, 15, xviii. 5) lie 
wrote the First Epistle to the Thessalomans from Corinth, 
and not from Athens, as the subscription to this Epistle 
imports. 

The First Epistle to the Thessaloniansis generally ad- 
mitted to have been the first of all St. Paul's letters, and 
we find him anxious to have it read in all the Christian 
churches in Macedonia (v. 27). This injunction is very 
properly inserted in his Eirst Epistle. Its genuineness 
has never been disputed. 



EPISTLES TO THE THE S SALOPIANS. 37 

Timothy having brought to St. Paul a favorable report 
of the steadfastness of the Thessalonians in the faith of 
the gospel, he wrote to convince them of its truth, and 
confirm them in that faith, lest they should be turned 
from it by the persecutions of the unbelieving Jews. 

After the introduction, the apostle proceeds to show 
the divine origin of the Christian revelation by the four 
following arguments, viz. : — 

The first argument is founded upon the miracles by 
which it is confirmed. 

The second argument is founded upon the behavior, 
character, and views of its first preachers (ii., iii. 1-13). 

The third argument in favor of the divine original of 
the gospel is taken from the holy nature of its precepts 
(iv.1-12). 

The fourth argument is taken from the resurrection of 
Jesus Christ, the Author of the gospel (iv. 13-18, 
v. 1-11). 

The apostle concludes with various practical admoni- 
tions and instructions (v. 12-28). 

" The last two chapters of this Epistle," says Dr. A. 
Clarke, " are certainly among the most important and 
most sublime in the New Testament." 

SECTION X. 

THE SECOND EPISTLE TO THE THESSALONIANS. 

The Second Epistle to the Thessalonians seems, from 
Sylvanus and Timothy being still with St. Paul, to have 
been written soon after the Eirst, and from the same place 

(i. i). 

It appears that the person who conveyed the Eirst 
Epistle to the Thessalonians speedily returned to Corinth, 
and reported to St. Paul the state of their church. 
Among other things, he was informed that from some ex- 
pressions in the First Epistle (iv. 15, 17, v. 4, 6), many 
of them expected that the day of judgment would happen 
in that age, and that such as held to these views were 
neglecting their secular afiairs, as being inconsistent with 
a due preparation for that important and awful event. 

It was to correct this misapprehension, and rescue 
them from an error that appeared to them to rest on 
apostolical authority, and must ultimately injure the 
spread of the Gospel, and to recommend several Chris- 
tian duties, that this Epistle was written. 



38 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

This Epistle may be divided into five parts, viz. : — 

Part I. The inscription (i. 1, 2). 

Part II. St. Paul's thanksgiving, and prayer that they 
may attain the felicity promised (i. 3-12). 

Part III. The rectification of their mistake concern- 
ing the day of judgment, and the doctrine concerning 
the man of sin (ii.). 

Part IV. Various advices relative to Christian virtues, 
particularly to prayer, with a prayer for the Thessalo- 
nians (iii. 1-5) ; to reprove those who led idle and disor- 
derly lives, and command the faithful to shun their com- 
pany if they remained incorrigible (iii. 6-10). 

Part V. St. Paul concludes with his apostolical bene- 
diction (iii. 17, 18). 

Although this is the shortest of all St. Paul's letters to 
the churches, it is not inferior to any of them in the sub- 
limity of the sentiments, and in that excellent spirit by 
which all the writings of the apostle are so eminently 
distinguished. 

Besides those marks of genuineness it contains, com- 
mon to all the apostle's letters, it has one peculiar to 
itself, in the exact representation it contains of the 
papal power, under the characters of the " Man of Sin,' 1 
and the " Mystery of Iniquity." 

The foundation of popery was laid in the apostle's days, 
but several ages passed before the building was com- 
pleted, and the " man of sin " revealed in full perfection. 

It matters not how much the " man of sin" may be ex- 
alted, nor how long he may reign ; at last " the Lord will 
consume him with the spirit of his mouth, and shall de- 
stroy him with the brightness of his coming." 

SECTION XL 

THE FIRST EPISTLE TO TIMOTHY. 

This Epistle has always been acknowledged to be the 
undisputed production of the apostle Paul. The time 
when it was written constitutes the principal difficulty 
concerning it. 

It is contended by many — among them Dr. Lardner 
— that it was written soon after St. Paul was driven 
from Ephesus on account of the tumult excited by Deme- 
trius and his craftsmen (Acts xix. 21-40, xx. 1). 

In favor of the early date, it is argued that it appears 
from the third chapter of the Epistle that no bishops had 



FIRST EPISTLE TO TIMOTHY. 39 

then been appointed at Ephesus, as Paul gave Timothy 
instruction regarding their appointment, "and hopes to 
return to him shortly." 

Now lie departed from Ephesus when he travelled into 
Macedonia (Acts xx. 1), and we see from ver. 17, 28, 
that on his return hishops had heen appointed. Conse- 
quently this Epistle must have been written at the be- 
ginning of Ins journey; for Timothy soon left Ephesus, 
and was with Paul at Corinth (Acts xx. 4). It is further 
contended that Timothy, at the time when this Epistle 
was written, was in danger of being " despised for his 
youth" (1 Tim. iv. 12). As he became an associate of 
Paul at Lystra (Acts xvi. 1) he must then have been, as 
an assistant in the gospel, at least twenty years old. If 
this Epistle was written as late as is claimed by many, 
Timothy must have been fifteen years a preacher of the 
gospel, and at least thirty-five years of age, and could 
not in that case be despised for his youth. In reply to 
this, it is said that Servius Tullius, in classifying the 
Roman people, divided their ages into three periods. 
Childhood he limited to seventeen; youth, from seven- 
teen to forty-six ; and old age, from forty -six to the end 
of life. 

On the contrary, in behalf of the later date, which 
supposes this Epistle to have been written after St. Paul's 
imprisonment at Rome, it is insisted, — 

That, from the First Epistle to Timothy, he was left at 
Ephesus to oppose certain errors, which had not taken 
place in the Ephesian church before the apostle's depart- 
ure, for, in his charge to the Ephesian elders at Miletus, 
he foretold that false teachers would enter among them 
after his departure (Acts xx. 29, 30). 

As the apostle makes mention of these errors existing 
at Ephesus in his Epistle to the Ephesians themselves, 
which was written from Rome during his imprisonment, 
it is not probable they were prevalent there when the 
apostle left, after the riot of Demetrius, and went into 
Macedonia, from whence, it is claimed, this Epistle was 
written. In the First Epistle to Timothy, the same per- 
sons, doctrines, and practices are reprobated as are con- 
demned in the Second. (Compare 1 Tim. iv. 1-6, with 
2 Tim. iii. 1-5, and 1 Tim. vi. 20, with 2 Tim. ii. 14, 
and 1 Tim. vi. 4, with 2 Tim. ii. 16). The commands, 
instructions, and encouragements are given to Timothy 
in both Epistles. (Compare 1 Tim. vi. 13, 14, with 
2 Tim. iv. 1 --5.) All which Dr. Macknight justly thinks 



40 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

implies that the same state of things existed among the 
Ephesians when both Epistles were written. Conse- 
quently, the Eirst Epistle was written only a few months 
before the Second, and not long before the apostle's 
death. We are aware there are seemingly plausible 
objections to this latter date ; but we think they admit 
of an easier solution than the objections to the earlier 
date. Eor full discussion of the claims and objections 
to each date, see Home's Introduction to the Bible, 
Vol. IV., pp. 370-377. 

Timothy having been left at Ephesus to regulate the 
affairs of the Ephesian church, St. Paul wrote this Epis- 
tle chiefly to instruct him in the choice of proper officers 
in the church, as well as in the exercise of a regular 
ministry. This Epistle is, therefore, usually divided into 
three parts, viz. : — 

Part I. Introduction (i. 1, 2). 

Part II. Instructions to Timothy how to conduct- the 
administration of the church at Ephesus. 

St. Paul, after reminding Timothy of the charge com- 
mitted to him, — to preserve the purity of the church 
against the pernicious doctrines of the false teachers, — 
shows the use of the Mosaic law, of which these teach- 
ers are ignorant. He assures Timothy that this account 
of the law was in accordance with the gospel, with the 
preaching of which he was intrusted (i. 3-11); he ex- 
presses his gratitude to God for calling him, " who was 
before a blasphemer," to the Christian faith and ministe- 
rial office, and observes, that this favor was extended to 
him as an encouragement to all who should believe, in 
every future age (12-20). He then proceeds to give 
Timothy particular instructions concerning the manner 
in which divine worship was to be performed in the 
church at Ephesus (ii.)> also concerning the qualifica- 
tion of persons whom he should ordain as bishops and 
deacons of that church (iii). 

After foretelling the great corruptions that were to 
prevail in the church in future times (iv. 1-5), the apos- 
tle instructs Timothy how to support the sacred charac- 
ter (6-16), how to admonish aged men and women 
(v. 1, 2), how he should treat widows (3-16), elders 
(17-19), and offenders (20-21), to which are added some 
instructions to Timothy himself (22-24), and concerning 
the duty of slaves (vi. 1,2); he condemns trifling con- 
troversies and pernicious disputes, censures the exces- 



SECOND EPISTLE TO TIMOTHY. 41 

sive love of money, and charges the rich to be rich in 
good works (vi. 3-19). 

Part III. The conclusion. " The Epistles to Tim- 
othy and Titus" (written about the same time), '"taken 
together, containing a full account of the qualifications 
and duties of the ministers of the gospel, may be con- 
sidered as a complete body of divinely inspired ecclesias- 
tical canons, to be observed by the Christian clergy of all 
communions to the end of the world." (Dr. Macknight's 
Pref. to 1 Tim.) 

SECTION XII. 

THE SECOND EPISTLE TO TIMOTHY. 

That St. Paul wrote his Second Epistle to Timothy 
while in prison, is evident (i. 8, 12, 16, and ii. 9) ; and 
that his imprisonment was in Rome (i. 17), is universally 
admitted. That it was not written during his first im- 
prisonment, as recorded in Acts xxviii., as Drs. Ham- 
mond, Lightfoot, and Lardner suppose, but during a 
second imprisonment there, and not long before he suf- 
fered martyrdom, as Drs. Benson, Macknight. and Paley, 
Bishop Tomline, Michaelis, Rosenmuller, Home, and 
others contend, is amply proved by the following consid- 
erations. By comparing the Epistles to the Ephesians, 
Colossians, Philippians, and Philemon (which are known 
to have been written by St. Paul during his first im- 
prisonment), with the Second to Timothy, we see that 
this Epistle was not written at the same time those were. 

In the former Epistle the apostle confidently ex- 
pected soon to be released from confinement, and to 
depart from Rome (Phil. ii. 24, and Philemon 22). 
In the Second to Timothy, his language is extremely 
different. (See 2 Tim. iv. 6-8.) When the former Epis- 
tles were written from Rome, Timothy was with St. 
Paul, and is joined with him in writing to the Colos- 
sians, Philippians, and to Philemon. The present Epistle 
implies that he was absent, probably at Ephesus. In 
the first imprisonment, Demas was with him ; but now 
he has left him, having loved this present world, and 
returned to Thessalonica. Mark was also with St. 
Paul during his first imprisonment, and joins in salut- 
ing the Colossians. In the present Epistle, Timothy is" 
ordered to bring Mark with him (iv. 11). At the time of 
the apostle's first imprisonment, he dwelt two whole 



42 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

years in his own hired house, being only guarded by a 
single soldier (Acts xxviii. 30, 31). But it appears from 
2 Tim. i. 16-18, that Paul was closely imprisoned, as 
one guilty of capital crime, so that Onesiphorus, on his 
coming to Rome, had considerable difficulty in finding 
him out. It appears that at the time of writing this Epis- 
tle, the situation of the apostle was exceedingly danger- 
ous (2 Tim. iv. 6-8, 16-18). 

St. Paul says (2 Tim. iv. 20) that Erastus staid be- 
hind at Corinth. The apostle must therefore have 
passed through Corinth on that journey to Rome, after 
which he wrote this Epistle. But from Cesarea to Italy, 
in Acts xxvii. he did not pass through Corinth. These 
proofs, as well as many others that might be adduced, 
furnish abundant evidence that this Epistle was written 
during an imprisonment different from that mentioned 
in Acts xxviii. The design of St. Paul in writing this 
Epistle seems to be, to advise Timothy of what had 
befallen him during his second imprisonment at Rome, 
and to request him to come to him before winter. But 
lest he should be put to death before Timothy's arrival, 
he gave him, in this letter, all necessary counsel and ad- 
vice for the discharge of his ministerial functions, with 
the affection of a dying parent. 

This Epistle may also be said to consist of three parts, 
viz. : — 

Part I. The inscription (i. 1-5). 

Part II. An exhortation to Timothy, to diligence, 
patience, and firmness, in keeping the form of sound 
doctrine, with an affecting prayer for Onesiphorus 
(i. 2-18) ; to fortitude under afflictions, and to purity 
of life (ii.) ; to beware of false teachers in the last times, 
and to be faithful in his ministerial labors (iii., iv. 1-8). 

Part III. The conclusion, including the apostle's re- 
quest to Timothy to come to him as soon as possible, 
together with various salutations to his brethren in 
Asia Minor. 

The circumstances under which this Epistle was writ- 
ten, the miseries of imprisonment, and the near approach 
of death, and being addressed to the apostle's most in- 
timate friend, exhibit the temper and character of St. 
Paul, and prove that he was no deceiver, but sincerely 
believed the doctrines he preached. 



THE EPISTLE TO TITUS. 43 

SECTION XIII. 

THE EPISTLE TO TITUS. 

Titus having been left at Crete to settle the churches 
in the several cities in that island according to the apos- 
tolical plan, St. Paul addressed this Epistle to him at 
that place. We have no certain information when or 
by whom Christianity was first planted in Crete. As 
some Cretans were present at Jerusalem on the day of 
Pentecost, Bishop Tomline thinks it probable that on 
their return they preached the gospel to their country- 
men (Acts ii. 11). It appears from 2 Cor. xii. 14, and 
xiii. 1, that during St. Paul's stay at Corinth, he made 
an excursion, and returned to Corinth. In this excur- 
sion it is supposed he made a voyage to Crete, to preach 
the gospel there, and took Titus with him, as an assist- 
ant, whom he left behind to regulate the affairs of the 
church. The Cretans were formerly notorious for pira- 
cy, luxury, debauchery, and especially for lying. To 
act like a Cretan was a proverbial term for telling a lie. 
St. Paul has quoted Epimenides, one of their own poets, 
as expressing their true character (Titus i. 12). There 
has been much controversy concerning the date of this 
Epistle. The subscription states it to have been writ- 
ten from Nicopolis, in Macedonia; but of this we have 
no reliable evidence. 

As Luke makes no mention of St. Paul's preaching at 
Crete, although he notices that he touched the Fair 
Havens in his first voyage to Rome (Acts xxvii. 8), it is 
most probable he wrote this Epistle after his first impris- 
onment. 

In this Epistle St. Paul has clearly defined the course 
for Titus to pursue in the discharge of his ministry 
among the Cretans, with instructions concerning his 
behavior towards those Judaizing teachers who endeav- 
ored to pervert the faith and disturb the peace of the 
Christian church. 

The Epistle consists of three parts, viz. : — 

Part I. The inscription (i. 1-4). 

Part II. Instructions to Titus, concerning the qualifi- 
cation and ordination of bishops and elders ; enjoins Titus 
to be cautious in his selection of men for this sacred 
office, and reminds him of the acts of the Judaizing 
teachers (10-16) ; he urges Titus to accommodate his 
exhortations to the respective ages, sexes, and circum- 



44 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

stances of his people, and admonishes him to be an 
example of what he taught (ii.), to inculcate obedience to 
civil magistrates, in opposition to the teachings of those 
Judaizing teachers who thought it an indignity for the 
people of God to obey an idolatrous magistrate ; also that 
he should enforce gentleness to all men (iii. 1-7) ; that 
he should enforce good works, avoid foolish questions, 
and shun heretics (iii. 8-11). 

Part III. An invitation to Titus to come to the apostle 
at Nicopolis, together with various directions (iii. 12-15). 
By comparing this Epistle with the two to Timothy, Dr. 
Macknight remarks, we may learn these Judaizing teach- 
ers were indefatigable in propagating their erroneous 
doctrines, and that they were more numerous in Ephesus 
and Crete, and probably more successful, than in other 
places. 

SECTION XIV. 

THE EPISTLE TO PHILEMON. 

Philemon seems to have been a Christian of some 
consideration, residing at Colosse (Col. iv. 9, 17), who 
had been converted under St. Paul's ministry (19), 
perhaps during his abode at Ephesus (Acts xix. 10). 
When the apostle was imprisoned at Rome, Onesimus, 
a slave of Philemon, having, as is generally supposed, 
been guilty of some dishonesty, left his master, and 
fled to that city, a distance of several hundred miles. 
Whether Onesimus really repented of what he had done, 
and went to St. Paul, or in what manner they came to 
meet here, we have no information. But we are assured, 
that during the apostle's confinement " in his own hired 
house," he opened a way by which the rude slave was 
converted to the Christian faith, and baptized him. 
During his abode with the apostle, he served him faith- 
fully ; but sensible, no doubt, that he had done wrong in 
leaving his master, he wished to repair that injury by re- 
turning to him. At the same time, fearing his master 
might inflict upon him the punishment which, by the 
law or custom of Phrygia, was due to a fugitive slave, 
he persuaded St. Paul to write to Philemon, and request 
him to forgive and receive him again into his family. 
Grotius informs us that masters had power to torture, 
and even to put to death, their slaves who behaved ill, 
without applying to a magistrate. This was conformable 
both to the Koinan and Grecian law. Accordingly, St. 



EPISTLE TO THE HEBREWS. 45 

Paul wrote this Epistle to Philemon, and not only inter- 
ceded for the pardon of Onesimus, but urged his master 
to esteem him and put confidence in him as a sincere 
Christian. 

From the confidence which Paul expresses in the 
Christian character of Philemon, he seemed to have 
no doubt his request would be granted. But we have 
no information whether Onesimus was pardoned or 
not. 

''Whoever," says Dr. Benson, " will carefully ex- 
amine this Epistle will discern many doctrines and 
precepts of Christianity, expressed or insinuated ; for 
instance, in a religious view all Christians are on a 
level. Onesimus was St. Paul's son, and Philemon's 
brother, upon a religious account; y^t he was obliged 
to be Piiiiemon's slave for life, unless his master volun- 
tarily gave him his freedom (ver. 13, 14). Christianity 
makes no difference in a man's civil affairs. By Chris- 
tian baptism, a slave does not become a freed-man; his 
temporal condition is still the same. 

We are taught, in this Epistle, we should love and do 
good to all men, and not disdain to do good to the mean- 
est slave when it is in our power; to make restitution 
where an injury has been done; to be grateful to our 
benefactors (ver. 19) ; tc do all we can to reconcile those 
who are at variance : in fact, a much larger number of 
Christian precepts are here inculcated than we have 
space to consider. We can only say, that an Epistle so 
full of excellent instruction should not be rejected for 
its brevity ; but men would do well to examine it care- 
fully before they reject it, or speak of it lightly. From 
verses 1, 10, 13, 22, and 23, there can be no doubt that 
St. Paul wrote this Epistle during his first imprisonment 
at Rome, as it seems (ver. 22; he expects soon to be 
released. 

SECTION XV. 

THE EPISTLE TO THE HEBREWS. 

The nature and authenticity of the Epistle to the 
Hebrews have been more controverted, perhaps, than any 
other book of the New Testament. As the initiatory 
formula usual in the other thirteen Epistles known 
to have been written by St. Paul, is omitted in this, 
it has been questioned whether it was really an Epistle 
sent to a particular community, or only a discourse or 



46 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

dissertation intended for general readers. Michaelis de- 
termines that it is an Epistle, from the fact that the au- 
thpr alludes to special circumstances in this writing, in 
chap. v. 11, 12, vi. 9, x. 32-34, and above all in chap, 
xiii. 23, 24, which contains the promise of a visit, and 
various salutations, which show that it really is an 
apostolical Epistle. 

Who the Hebrews were, to whom this letter was ad- 
dressed, learned men are by no means agreed. Without 
stating the various opinions of the learned fathers, who 
differ so essentially on this point, we give the conclusion 
of Michaelis, which seems to us the most reasonable, 
which is, that it was written for the use of the Jewish 
Christians at Jerusalem and in Palestine. 

This opinion seems corroborated by the contents of 
the Epistle itself. 

It is evident from the whole tenor of this letter, that it 
was addressed to persons in imminent danger of falling 
back from Christianity to Judaism, induced partly by 
persecution, and partly by the false arguments of the 
rabbins. As Christianity at this time enjoyed so much 
religious liberty through the tolerating spirit of the 
Roman laws and Roman magistrates, throughout the 
empire in general, it would have been difficult to have 
effected a general persecution. But, through the in- 
fluence of the Jewish Sanhedrim in Jerusalem, the 
Christians in that country underwent several severe 
persecutions, especially during the high priesthood of 
the younger Ananus, when St. James and other Chris- 
tians suffered martyrdom. 

The circumstance referred to in chap. x. 25, of this 
Epistle, that many who continued Christians forsook the 
places of public worship, does not occur in any other 
Epistle, and implies that by continued persecutions, the 
Christians were deterred from an open profession of 
their faith. In this melancholy situation, the Hebrews, 
almost reduced to despair, are referred (x. 25, 35-38) 
to the promised coming of Christ. 

This can be no other than the promised destruction of 
Jerusalem (Matt, xxiv.), and referred to by Christ him- 
self (Luke xxi. 28). This coming of Christ was to the 
Christians in Palestine, but in no other country, a deliver- 
ance from the yoke with which they were oppressed. 

The exhortation in Heb. xiii. 12-14, is difficult to be 
explained on the supposition that the Epistle was writ- 
ten to Hebrews who lived out of Palestine. But if we 



EPISTLE TO THE HEBREWS. 47 

suppose it was written to Jewish converts in Jerusa- 
lem, the passage becomes perfectly clear. 

As to the language in which this Epistle was originally 
written, Home affirms that the Ejnstle itself furnishes 
positive proof that it was written in Greek, and not in 
the Hebrew or Syro-Chaldaic dialect, as many have 
endeavored to prove. It is contended that, as this 
Epistle was written for the Hebrews, it is proper that 
it should be in their own language. To this argument 
it has been replied, that, for the same reason, the apostle 
should have written his Epistle to the Romans in their 
language ; yet we know that the Epistle to the Romans 
was not written in Latin, the language of Rome, but in 
Greek. In fact, all the Epistles were written in Greek, 
and not in the language of the churches or persons to 
whom they were addressed. The Apostolical Epistles 
were intended for the use of the whole Christian world, 
in every age, and it was more proper they should be 
written in Greek, which was then universally understood, 
than in any provincial dialect. 

The style of this Epistle, throughout, has all the air of 
an original, and manifests that it is no translation. 

St. Paul's name not being affixed to this Epistle, some 
have ascribed it to Barnabas, the companion of Paul; 
others to Clement of Rome; and others to the evangelist 
Luke ; while Luther, the reformer, has ascribed it to 
Apollos. It is true that St. Paul's name is prefixed to his 
other Epistles; but if this is not to be considered as St. 
Paul's because it does not bear his name, the same 
objection would apply to its being ascribed to any one, 
because it is anonymous. 

It appears from Heb. xiii. 24, that this Epistle was 
written from Italy, where there is no evidence that Bar- 
nabas ever went; and we have no evidence that the 
church has ever acknowledged or considered Barnabas 
as the author of this letter. The author of this Epistle 
addresses the Hebrews (xiii. 18, 19) as persons among 
whom he had preached the gospel; and as it nowhere 
appears that Luke had preached to the converted Jews, 
it follows that he could not have been the author of the 
Epistle. 

The fact that this Epistle does not bear the name of 
St. Paul we consider, under all the circumstances, one 
of the strongest proofs that it belongs to that apostle 
rather than any other person. 

As Paul was the apostle to the Gentiles, in writing to 



48 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

the Hebrews he did not assume his apostolical character, 
because it was little respected by the unbelieving Jews 
and Judaizing Christians. He did not mention his name, 
messenger, or the particular persons to whom it was 
sent, because (as Dr. Lardner judiciously remarks) such 
a letter might give umbrage to tbe ruling powers, at 
that particular crisis, when the Jews were most turbu- 
lent, and might endanger himself, the messenger, and 
the people to whom it was directed. 

The same objections referred to in regard to this Epis- 
tle will apply with equal force to the three Epistles of 
St. John, in all of which that apostle has omitted his 
name, for some reasons not now known. That St. Paul, 
however, did not mean to conceal himself, we learn from 
the Epistle itself (xiii. 23). 

If, as we believe, St. Paul was its author, the time 
when this Epistle was written may be easily determined. 
Lardner and Macknight have observed that it was writ- 
ten before the destruction of Jerusalem ; for in Heb. viii. 
4, ix. 25, x. 11, and xiii. 10, the temple is mentioned as 
then standing, and the Levitical sacrifices are noticed as 
being then offered. From Heb. xiii. 23, 24, we infer that 
it was written from Italy, perhaps from Rome, about the 
time the apostle left Italy, at the close of his first impris- 
onment, and soon after the apostle wrote his Epistles to 
the Colossians, Ephesians, and Philemon. The occasion 
of writing this Epistle will be sufficiently apparent from 
an attentive perusal of its contents. The Jews did 
everything which threats, persecutions, and arguments 
could effect, to withdraw their brethren, who had been 
converted, from the Christian faith. They attempted to 
show that Moses was superior to Jesus of Nazareth, who 
suffered an ignominious death ; that the public worship 
of God, as established by their great lawgiver and proph- 
et, was truly splendid, and worthy of Jehovah; while the 
Christians, on the contrary, had no established priest- 
hood, no temple, no altars, no victims, &c. 

The object of the apostle, therefore, is to show the 
Deity of Christ, and the excellency of his gospel, com- 
pared with the institutions of Moses ; to prevent the apos- 
tasy of Jewish converts, and to show the insufficiency of 
those rites and ceremonies, which had been already abol- 
ished, as means of reconciliation and atonement. 

The Epistle to the Hebrews may be di\ ided into three 
parts, viz. : — 

Part I. Demonstrates the Deity of Christ by the explicit 



THE CATHOLIC OR GENERAL EPISTLES. 49 

declarations of Scripture, which show his superiority to 
angels, by whom he is worshipped as their Creator and 
Lord (i. 1-14), his superiority to Moses, who was only a 
servant, his superiority to Aaron and all the other high 
priests, — Christ being the true high priest, adumbrated 
by Melchizedek and Aaron (ii.-v. 1-8), and the only 
sacrifice bv which all Levitical sacrifices are abolished 
(ix., x. 1-18). 

Part II. The application of the preceding arguments 
and proofs, with numerous solemn and affectionate 
warnings and exhortations, adapted to the various de- 
scriptions of persons whom he addresses (x. 19-39-xiii. 
1-19). 

Part III. The conclusion, containing a prayer for the 
Hebrews and apostolical salutations (xiii. 20-25). 

The internal excellence of this Epistle, as connecting 
the Old Testament with the Xew in the most instructive 
and convincing manner, and elucidating both more fully 
than any other Epistle, or perhaps than all of them com- 
bined, places its divine inspiration beyond all doubt, and 
renders it the most important of all the apostolical 
writings. 



CHAPTER III. 

THE CATHOLIC OR GENERAL EPISTLES. 

SECTION I. 

THE GENUINENESS AND AUTHENTICITY OF THE 
CATHOLIC EPISTLES. 

The Epistles of St. Paul are followed in the canon of 
the New Testament by seven Epistles, bearing the names 
of the apostles James, Peter, Jude, and John. Eor 
many centuries they have generally been termed Catho- 
lic Epistles — an appellation for which several reasons 
have been assigned. 

Some have imagined they were denominated Catholic 
or General Epistles because they were designed to be 
transcribed and circulated among the Christian churches, 
that they might be perused by all; for they contain that 
one catholic or general doctrine, which was delivered to 
4 



50 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

the churches by the apostles of our Saviour, and which 
might be read with advantage by the universal church of 
Christ. 

Others are of the opinion that they received this appel- 
lation because they were not written to one particular 
person, church, or city, like the Epistles of St. Paul, but 
to the catholic church, Christians in general, or to the 
Jewish Christians wherever dispersed over the face of 
the earth. 

A third opinion is that of Dr. Hammond, and adopted 
by Dr. Macknight and others, and which Home thinks is 
most probable. It is this : " The First Epistle of Peter 
and the First Epistle of John, having from the beginning 
been received as authentic, obtained the name of catholic 
or universally acknowledged (and therefore canonical) 
Epistles, to distinguish them from the Epistle of James, 
the Second of Peter, the Second and Third of John, and 
the Epistle of Jude, concerning which doubts were at 
first entertained ; and they were considered by many as 
not being a rule of faith, hut their authenticity being 
at length acknowledged by the generality of the churehes, 
they also obtained the name of catholic or universally 
received Epistles, and were esteemed with equal author- 
ity with the rest." The propriety of the appellation 
canonical is not satisfactorily ascertained. The claims 
to authenticity of these disputed Epistles are discussed 
in the following sections. 

The order in which these Epistles are placed varies 
in ancient authors. But as we cannot fix with certainty 
the date of each, it is not very material in what manner 
they are arranged. 



SECTION II. 

THE GENERAL EPISTLE OF JAMES. 

Two apostles of the name of James being mentioned in 
the New Testament, considerable doubt has existed as to 
which is the author of this Epistle. 

The first was the son of Zebedee and brother of John 
the evangelist. But as he suffered martyrdom about 
A. D. 43 or 44, it is evident he is not the author of this 
Epistle, because it contains passages which refer to a 
later period, viz. : v. 1-8, which intimates the then im- 
mediate destruction of Jerusalem and the subversion of 
the Jewish polity. 



THE GENERAL EPISTLE OF JAMES. 51 

The other, James the son of Alpheus or Cleopas; he 
is called the brother or near relation of our Lord (Gal. 
i. 18, 19), called also James the Less, probably because 
he was of lower stature, or younger, than James the son 
of Zebedee. This Epistle appears to have been written 
but a short time before the apostle's death ; and it is 
probable that the sharp rebukes and awful warnings it 
contains excited that persecuting rage which terminated 
the apostle's life. (See Biographical Sketches.) 

A considerable diversity of opinion has prevailed re- 
specting the canonical authority of this Epistle ; yet it is 
inserted in the ancient Syriac version, which was exe- 
cuted at the close of the first or beginning of the second 
century, in which the Second Epistle of Peter, the Second 
and Third of John, the Epistle of Jude, and the Book of 
Revelation are omitted. 

Commentators are equally divided concerning the 
persons to whom this Epistle was addressed. Whitby, 
Lardner, and Macknight were of opinion that this Epistle 
was written to the whole Jewish nation, both within and 
without Judea, whether believers or not. 

This opinion is founded on the first ten verses of the 
fourth chapter, and the first five of the fifth, which are 
supposed to contain expressions applicable to unbeliev- 
ers only. Bishop Tomline is of the opinion that in these 
passages the apostle alludes merely to the great corrup- 
tion into which the Hebrew Christians had fallen at that 
time. It does not appear probable that St. James would 
write part of his Epistle to believers and part to unbe- 
lievers, without any notice or mention of that distinction. 

It is admitted that the inscription " to the twelve tribes 
that are scattered abroad " might comprehend both believ- 
ing and unbelieving Jews : but we have no reason to sup- 
pose that either James or any other apostle ever thought 
of writing to any but Christian converts. The sense of 
the above inscription seems to be limited to the believ- 
ing Jews, by what follows almost immediately (i. 3, ii. 1). 

The object of this Epistle seems to be the same as all 
the other apostolical Epistles, ki to confirm rather than 
convert, to correct what was wrong in them that did be- 
lieve, and not in those who did not believe." 

The Epistle divides itself into three parts, exclusive of 
the introduction. 

Parti. Contains numerous exhortations (i. 1-27). 

Part II. Censures and condemns their unbelief and the 



52 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

evil practices prevalent among them, especially undue 
reliance upon their riches (ii.-v. 1-G.) 

Part III. Contains exhortations and cautions (v. 7-20). 

" Having been written with the design of refuting par- 
ticular errors, which had been introduced among the 
Jewish Christians, this Epistle is not so replete with the 
peculiar doctrines of Christianity as the Epistles of St. 
Paul, or, indeed, as the other apostolical Epistles; but it 
contains an admirable summary of those practical duties 
which are incumbent on all believers, and which it en- 
forces in a manner equally elegant and affectionate." 

SECTION III. 

THE FIRST GENERAL EPISTLE OF PETER. 

The genuineness and canonical authority of the First 
Epistle of Peter have never been disputed. But con- 
cerning the persons to whom it was sent, different opin- 
ions have prevailed' In this diversity of opinion, the 
only safe rule of determination must be the inscription, 
together with such other circumstances as may be gath- 
ered from the apostolical history, or the Epistle itself. 

The inscription runs thus : Peter, an apostle of Jesus 
Christ, to the strangers scattered throughout Pontus, 
Galatia. Cappadocia, Asia, and Bithynia (1 Pet. i. 1). 
That these persons addressed were believing Jews, and 
not believing Gentiles, says Home, we apprehend, will 
appear from the following considerations : — 

We learn from Acts ii. 5, 9, there were present at the 
feast of Pentecost, w r aiting at Jerusalem, Jews, devout 
men, out of every nation under heaven, dwellers in 
Judea, Cappadocia, in Pontus, and Asia. Whence it is 
evident there were Jews dispersed in those countries. 

St. Peter, by agreement among the apostles, had the 
ministry of the circumcision peculiarly committed to 
him (Gal. ii. 8). It is, therefore, more probable that he 
wrote to Jews than to Gentiles. 

The persons to whom the apostle writes were termed 
strangers, scattered, ; which properly denotes strangers 
from another country. Such were the Jews (Acts ii. 10). 
They are said to be redeemed from their vain conversa- 
tion, received by tradition from their fathers (1 Pet. i. 
18) ; in which the apostle plainly refers to the traditions 
of the Jewish rabbins and elders. 



FIRST EPISTLE OF PETER. 53 

The persons named in 1 Pet. ii. 9, must be Jews, and 
not Gentiles. 

On these grounds it is evident this Epistle was ad- 
dressed to those dispersed Hebrew Christians, afflicted 
in their dispersion, to whom the apostles James and Paul 
had respectively addressed their Epistles. 

It appears, from 1 Pet v. 12, 13, that this Epistle was 
written from Babylon, and sent to the Jews by " Silva- 
nus, a faithful brother;" but whether Babylon here is 
to be understood literally or mystically, as the city of 
that name in Mesopotamia or Egypt, or rather Koine, or 
Jerusalem, has been long and warmly contested by 
learned men. 

Bishop Pearson, Mill, and Le Clerc, are of opinion 
that the apostle speaks of Babylon in Egypt. Erasmus, 
Beza, Dr. Eightfoot, Drs. Benson. A. Clarke, and many 
others, think that Peter intended Babylon in Assyria; 
Michaelis, that it was Babylon in Mesopotamia, or rather 
Seleucia, on the Tigris. And Grotins, Drs. Whitby, 
Lardner, Macknight, and Hales, Bishop Tomline, and 
all the learned of the Romish communion, are of opin- 
ion that by Babylon Peter meant, figuratively. Route, 
which city is called Babylon by the apostle John (Ho v. 
xvii., xviii.;. 

This latter opinion is confirmed by the general testi- 
mony of antiquity, which, Dr. Lardner remarks, is of no 
small weight. This opinion is also adopted by Home, 
who says it is not probahle that Peter ever visited Baby- 
lon in Chaldea; and Babylon in Egypt was too small and 
insignificant to be the subject of consideration. 

It appears from the Epistle itself, that it was written 
when the Hebrew Christians were exposed to severe per- 
secutions. The design of the Epistle, therefore, was to 
encourage and support them under their afflictions, and 
teach them how to behave under persecutions. 

It contains numerous exhortations to Jewish Chris- 
tians to persevere steadfastly in the faith under aii their 
persecutions (i., ii. 1-10) ; to a particular discharge of 
their several duties (ii. 11-25, iii. 1-13), by reminding 
them of the example of Christ, and the lessons they 
should draw from it (iii. 1-1-22, iv. 1-19) ; and finally, 
directions to the ministers of the churches and the peo- 
ple how to behave towards each other (v.). 

Erasmus pronounces this Epistle worthy of the prince 
of the apostles, and that it is sparing in words, but full of 



54 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

sense. The author writes with the authority of the first 
man in the college of the apostles. 

SECTION IV. 

THE SECOND GENERAL EPISTLE OF PETER. . 

Some doubts were entertained by the primitive churches 
respecting the authenticity of this Epistle, which has 
been received as the genuine production of St. Peter 
since the fourth century, except by the Syrian church, 
in which it is read as an excellent book, though not of 
canonical authority. We have, however, the most satis- 
factory evidence of its genuineness and authenticity. 
We will cite a few of the internal evidences that St. 
Peter was its author. 

The writer of this Epistle testifies that he " must soon 
put off this tabernacle, even as our Lord Jesus had shown 
him " (2 Pet. i. 14). Now, this was shown by Christ 
to none of his apostles, except Peter (John xxi. li)). 

Again : the writer was with Christ on the Mount of 
Transfiguration, and beheld his majesty (2 Pet. i. 1G- 
18). As there were only three of the apostles, viz., 
Peter, James, and John, permitted to witness the trans- 
figuration (Matt, xv ii. 1,2), this Epistle must have been 
written by one of them ; and, as it never was ascribed 
to James or John, it follows that it is the production of 
Peter. 

Once more : the author of it calls this his Second Epis- 
tle (iiL 1), and intimates that he wrote both his letters to 
the same persons, viz., the believing Hebrews. Compare 
1 Pet. i. 1, 2 Pet. i. 1, with 2 Pet. hi. 1, 2. Consequently 
we infer that both Epistles were written by the same per- 
son. It is evident from chap. i. 14, that Peter was near 
his death when he wrote this Epistle ; and that it was 
written soon after the First, appears from the apology he 
makes (i. 13, 15) for writing this Second Epistle to the 
Hebrew Christians. 

Dr. Lardner thinks it probable, that soon after the 
apostle had sent away Silvanus with his first letter to 
the Christians in Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia 
Minor, and Bithynia, some person from those countries 
brought information to Pome concerning the state of re- 
ligion there. These accounts induced Peter to write a 
second time, in order to establish in the faith the Chris- 
tians among whom he had labored. 



FIRST EPISTLE OF JOHX. 55 

This Epistle may therefore be divided into three parts, 
viz. : — 

Part I. The Introduction (i. 1,2). 

Part II. J laving stated the precious blessings to which 
God had called them, the apostle exhorts them to im- 
prove in the most substantial graces and virtues (i. 3-11). 
cautions them against false teachers, whose tenets and 
practices he largely describes, and warns them to disre- 
gard those profane scoffers who made or should make a 
mock of Christ's coming to judgment (ii., iii. 1-1-1). 

Part III. The conclusion. The apostle declares the 
agreement of his doctrine with that of St. Paul (iii. 
15, 1G), and repeats the sum of the Epistle (iii. 17, 18). 
On account of the similarity of style and subject be- 
tween the second chapter of this Epistle and that of 
Jude, Dr. Benson and Michaelis place the latter imme- 
diately after the Second Epistle of Peter. 

Dr. Blackwell says of the two Epistles of Peter, <k Take 
them together, and they are admirable for significant 
epithets and strong compound words; for beautiful and 
sprightly figures, adorable and sublime doctrines, pure 
and heavenly morals, expressed in a chaste, lively, and 
graceful style." 



SECTION V. 

THE FIRST GENERAL EPISTLE OF JOHN. 

Though the name of St. John is not affixed to this 
Epistle, it has been received as the genuine production 
of that apostle, without hesitation, from the earliest 
period of the Christian church ; and the similarity of 
sentiment and expression between it and his Gospel is a 
full confirmation of the truth of this opinion. 

With regard to the date of this Epistle biblical au- 
thorities are by no means agreed. Drs. Benson. Hales, 
and others place it in the year 68 ; Bishop Tomline, in 
C9 ; Lampe, after the first Jewish war, and before the 
apostle's exile in Patmos. Dr. Lardner places it as late 
as 80, or even later: Mill and Le Clerc, in 91 or 92; 
Grotius, Hammond, Macknight, and others place it 
before the destruction of Jerusalem, but specify no date. 
Home thinks the most probable of these opinions is the 
one which assigns the date before the destruction of Je- 
rusalem and the subversion of the Jewish polity. 

The expression in chap. ii. 13. 14, and 18, would apply 



56 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

better to the time immediately before the destruction of 
Jerusalem than to any later period. 

It is impossible to ascertain, with reasonable certainty, 
the place from whence the apostle sent it; whether from 
Patmos, as Grotius supposes, or from some city in Judea, 
as Dr. Macknight supposes, or from Ephesus, as Ireme- 
us and Eusehius relate from ancient tradition, which has 
been generally received. 

It is still more difficult to decide concerning the per- 
sons to whom this Epistle was written. Augustine and 
some others called it the Epistle of St. John to the Partis- 
ans, as the apostle is reported to have preached the gos- 
pel to that people; but this opinion is entirely unsup- 
ported by the evidence of antiquity. Dr. Benson thinks 
the Epistle was addressed to the Jewish Christians in 
Judea and Galilee. But the most generally approved 
opinion is that of Lardner, Macknight, Bishop Tomline, 
and others, who think it was written for the use of all 
Christians, of every denomination and in every coun- 
try, as it does not contain any words of limitation that 
can restrict it to a particular people. Hence it has al- 
ways been called a catholic or general Epistle. 

The concluding exhortation to believers to "keep 
themselves from idols " is in no respect suitable to be- 
lievers in Judea, but would be much more appropriately 
addressed to Christians living in those parts of the 
world where idolatry prevailed. 

This book is usually entitled The General Epistle of 
St. John. But by the inspection of it nothing is found 
in the epistolary form. It is not inscribed either to any 
individual or church, but the apostle began it in the 
same abrupt manner as he did his Gospel, without any 
particular address or salutation, and wrote as a witness 
or messenger, in a sententious, declaratory style, and 
not in an argumentative manner. 

Many different tabular synopses of this Epistle have 
been given by analysis of Scripture, from which we have 
selected the following, which it is hoped will be found to 
show the leading divisions of the Epistle or treatise with 
sufficient perspicuity and conciseness. It consists of 
six sections, besides the conclusion, which is a recapitu- 
lation of the whole. 

Sect. I. asserts the true divinity and humanity of Christ, 
in opposition to the false teachers, and urges the union 
of faith and holiness of life as absolutely necessary to 
enable Christians to enjoy communion with God (i. 1-7). 



FIRST EPISTLE OF JOHN. 57 

Sect. II. shows that all have sinned, and explains the 
doctrine of Christ's propitiation (i. 8-10, ii. 1, 2) ; 
whence the apostle takes occasion to illustrate the marks 
of true faith, viz., obeying his commandments, and sin- 
cere love of the brethren, and shows that the love of the 
world is inconsistent with the love of God (ii. 3-17). 

Sect. III. asserts Jesus to be the same person with 
Christ, in opposition to the false teachers who denied it 
(ii. 18-29). 

Sect. IV. On the privileges of true believers, and 
their consequent happiness and duties, and the marks by 
which they are known to be " the sons of God " (iii.). 

Sect. V. contains criteria by which to distinguish Anti- 
Christ and false Christians, with an exhortation to broth- 
erly love (iv.). 

Sect. VI. shows the connection between faith in Christ, 
regeneration, love to God and his children, obedience to 
his commandments, and victory over the world; and that 
Jesus Christ is truly the Son of God, able to save us, 
and to hear the prayers we make for ourselves and oth- 
ers (v. 1-1G). 

The conclusion, which is a summary of the preceding 
treatise, shows that a sinful life is inconsistent with true 
Christianity, asserts the divinity of Christ, and cautions 
believers against idolatry (v. 17-21). 

The preceding is an outline of this admirable Epistle, 
which, being designed to promote right principles of doc- 
trine and practical piety in conduct, abounds more than 
any book in the New Testament with criteria by which 
Christians may soberly examine themselves whether they 
be in the faith (2 Cor. xiii. 5). 

If the limits of this work would allow, it might be 
proper, and of interest to the reader, to notice the con- 
troversy respecting the clause in 1 John v. 7, 8, con- 
cerning the Heavenly Witness, which has for nearly four 
centuries divided the opinions of learned men. and which 
is even yet undecided, though the majority of biblical 
critics now abandon it as spurious. 

The whole passage reads, " For there are three that 
bear record in heaven, the Father, the Word, and the 
Holy Ghost, and these three are one ; and there are three 
that bear witness in earth, the spirit, and the water, and 
the blood, and these three agree in one." 

The disputed passage includes the words printed in 
italics. 

Should it ultimately appear that the disputed clause is 



58 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

spurious, its absence will not diminish the weight of 
irresistible evidexce which other u ndisputed pas- 
sages of Holy Writ afford to the doctrine of the Trinity. 

•' There are," to use the words of Griesbach, " so many 
arguments for the true Deity of Christ, that I see not how 
it can he called in question, the divine authority of Scrip- 
ture being granted, and just rules of interpretation 
acknowledged. The exordium of St. John's Gospel, in 
particular, is so perspicuous, and above all exception, that 
it NEVER can be overturned by the daring attacks of 
interpreters and critics." 

The reader, who may he desirous of entering fully into 
this controversy, is referred to Home's Introduction to 
the Bible, vol. iv., pp. 435-465, or to a smaller work 
by the same author, entitled " The Scriirture Doctrine 
of the Trinity," &c. (12mo., London, 1820). 

SECTION VI. 

THE SECOND AND THIED EPISTLES OF JOHN. 

I. When Eusebius wrote his ecclesiastical history, in 
the fourth century, these two Epistles were classed 
among the books wliich were received among the major- 
ity of Christians (though some doubts were entertained 
by others respecting their authenticity), and other testi- 
monies are not wanting to prove that they were the gen- 
uine productions of the apostle wSt. John. 

They are not, indeed, received in the Syrian churches, 
and various reasons have been assigned why they were 
not earlier received into the canon. 

It is most probable that, being addressed to private 
individuals, they were kept in possession of the families 
of those persons for a considerable time, and not discov- 
ered until long after the apostle's decease, and all the 
immediate vouchers for their genuineness were neces- 
sarily gone. The church of Christ, ever on its guard 
against imposture, particularly in relation to writings 
professing to be those of the apostles, hesitated to re- 
ceive them into the number of canonical Scriptures, 
until it was fully ascertained that they were divinely in- 
spired. 

Considerable uncertainty prevails respecting the per- 
son to whom the Second Epistle was addressed, whether 
a particular person is intended, or the language is figura- 
tive, and addressed to the church. 



SECOND AND THIRD EPISTLES OF JOHN. 59 

Most of the ancient commentators regarded it as 
figurative, while modern commentators and critics gen- 
erally understand it literally, but do not agree in their 
literal interpretation. Of these various hypotheses, the 
most probable opinion is that which considers the Epis- 
tle as addressed to the " Lady Electa" who is supposed 
to be an eminent Christian matron. 

The Second Epistle of St. John is an epitome of the 
First, and touches, in few words, on the same points. 

After commending the " Lady Electa " for her religious 
education of her children, and exhorting her to abide in 
the Christian faith, the apostle especially beseeches this 
Christian matron to practise the great and indispensable 
commandment of Christian love and charity. 

II. The Third Epistle of St. John is addressed to a 
converted Gentile, — a respectable member of some 
Christian church, — called Gaius or Caius ; but it is ex- 
tremely difficult to ascertain who is meant, as there are 
three persons of this name mentioned in the New Testa- 
ment, viz. : 1. Gaius of Corinth (1 Cor. i. 14), whom St. 
Paul calls his ' ; host, and the host of the whole church" 
(Rom. xvi. 23). 2. Gaius, a native of Macedonia, who 
was with St. Paul at Ephesus (Acts xix. 20). 3. Gaius 
of Derbe (Acts xx. 4), who was also a fellow-traveller 
of St. Paul. 

Michaelis and most modern critics suppose it to be 
Gaius of Corinth, as hospitality was a leading feature in 
his character, and is strongly marked in verses 5-8 of 
this Epistle. 

In this letter the apostle commends the steadfastness 
of Gaius in the faith, and his general hospitality, espe- 
cially to ministers of Christ ; cautions him against the 
ambitious and turbulent Diotrephes ; and recommends 
Demetrius to his friendship, referring what he further 
had to say to a personal interview. 

Who this Diotrephes was commentators are by no 
means agreed, but most probably an ambitious elder in 
the church of which Gaius was a member, who, having 
been converted from Judaism, would naturally oppose 
the admission of Gentiles into the fellowship of the 
church, and set himself up as the head of a party in op- 
position to the apostles. 

Demetrius has been thought by many to have held 
some sacred office in the church of which Gaius was a 
member. Dr. Benson and Rosenmuller object to this 
opinion, for, if known to Gaius, no such information 



60 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

concerning his character would have been needed from 
the apostle. They therefore believed him to have been 
the bearer of this letter, and one of the brethren who 
went forth to preach to the Gentiles. 

But whoever Demetrius was, the apostle speaks of 
him as having a good testimony from all men, and whose 
temper and behavior were, in every respect, conforma- 
ble to the precepts of the gospel of Christ. 

SECTION VII. 

THE GENERAL EPISTLE OF JUDE. 

Jude, or Judas, the writer of this Epistle, is generally 
and justly considered to have been Jude the apostle; he 
is called also the brother of our Lord (Matt. xiii. 55) ; 
was the son of Alpheus, and brother of James the 
Less. 

In the early ages of Christianity, the Epistle of Jude 
was rejected by several persons because the apocryphal 
books of Enoch, and of the Ascension of Moses, were 
supposed to be quoted in it; and Michaelis has rejected 
it as spurious. We have, however, the most satisfactory 
evidence of the authenticity of this Epistle. 

All the objections which have been made to the re- 
ception of this letter as an authentic production may, 
with equal force, be brought against other Epistles in 
the New Testament. 

Dr. Macknight most truly observes, " There is no 
error taught, no evil practice enjoined, for the sake of 
which any impostor could be induced to impose a for- 
gery of this kind upon the world." 

The time and place when and where this Epistle was 
written are extremely uncertain. 

The coincidence in sentiment and style between this 
Epistle and the Second Epistle of Peter renders it quite 
probable that they were written about the same time; 
hence Lardner, Home, and some others date it in 66, or 
perhaps GG, at the latest. Dr. Mill, however, thinks it 
was written much later, fixing its date in the year 90, 
because the false teachers, whom St. Peter describes as 
yet to come, are mentioned by Jude as already come. 

By a comparison of the two Epistles, it is evident thnt 
St. Jude wrote his Epistle after St. Peter wrote his 
Second Epistle, but we think not so late as Dr. Mill has 
supposed. 



THE REVELATION OF ST. JOHN. 61 

Commentators are by no means agreed concerning the 
persons to whom this Epistle was addressed. 

From the inscription (1-3), Drs. Lardner and Mack- 
night, Bishop Tomline and Dr A. Clarke, concur in 
thinking it was written to all, without distinction, who 
had embraced the gospel. " The only reason," says Dr. 
Macknight, "which has induced commentators to sup- 
pose that Jude wrote to the Jewish believers alone, is, 
that he makes use of arguments taken from the sacred 
books of the Jews. But St. Paul followed the same 
course when writing to the Gentiles, and both apostles did 
so with propriety, not only because all who embraced the 
gospel acknowledged the authority of the Jewish Scrip- 
tures, but also because it was of the greatest importance 
to make the Gentiles sensible that the gospel was in per- 
fect unison with the ancient revelation. 

False teachers having begun to insinuate themselves 
into the Christian church, St. Jude seems to have writ- 
ten this Epistle to guard believers against the dangerous 
tenets, which they disseminated, resolving the whole of 
Christianity into a speculative belief and outward profes- 
sion. 

The vile characters of these seducers are further shown, 
and their sentence is denounced ; and the Epistle con- 
cludes with warnings, admonitions, and counsels to be- 
lievers, how to persevere in faith and godliness them- 
selves, and to rescue others from the snares of false 
teachers. 



CHAPTER V. 

THE REVELATION OF ST. JOHN THE DIVINE. 

" It is a remarkable circumstance," says Home, " that 
this book was very generally, if not universally, received 
and acknowledged during the first two centuries ; and 
yet in the third century it began to be questioned." 

This seems to have been occasioned by some absurd 
notions concerning the millennium, which a few well- 
meaning yet fanciful expositors grounded on this book, 
which notions their opponents injudiciously and pre- 
sumptuously endeavored to discredit by denying the au- 
thority of the book itself. So little, however, has this 



62 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

portion of Holy Writ suffered from the ordeal of criti- 
cism to which it has in consequence been subjected, 
that, as Sir Isaac Newton has long since remarked, 
"there is no other book of the New Testament so 
strongly attested, or commented upon so early, as the 
Apocalypse." 

And Dr. Priestley (no mean judge of biblical questions 
where his peculiar creed was not concerned) has declared 
that he thinks it impossible for any intelligent and candid 
person to peruse it without being struck, in the most for- 
cible manner, with the peculiar dignity and sublimity of 
its composition, — superior to that of any other writings 
whatever, — so as to be convinced that, considering the 
age in which it appeared, it could only have been written 
by a person divinely inspired. 

The numerous marks of genuine piety that occur 
through the whole book will preclude the idea of impo- 
sition in any person acquainted with human nature. 

It is likewise so suitable a continuation of the prophe- 
cies of Daniel, that the New Testament dispensation 
would have been incomplete without this prophetic book; 
for it has been the uniform plan of the divine proceed- 
ings to give a more distinct view of interesting future 
events as the time of their accomplishment approached. 
(Dr. Priestley's Notes on Scripture, vol. iv. p. 574.) 

The external evidence of the authenticity of the 
Apocalypse is so abundant and explicit, that the only 
difficulty is to comprise it within the limits that can be 
afforded in the present work. 

Among the testimonies of writers of the apostolic age, 
who were contemporaries, for a part of their lives, of St. 
John, we refer to the " Shepherd" or " Pastor" of Her- 
mas (A. D. 100). 

Ignatius (A. D. 107) was supposed, by Michaelis, to 
have passed over the Apocalypse in silence; but Dr. 
TVoodhouse has produced at least three passages from 
the writings of that father, which seem to prove, beyond 
a doubt, that the Revelation was known to, and read by, 
Ignatius. 

Polycarp (A. D. 108) has cited the Apocalypse once 
in the only epistle of his that has come down to our 
times ; and the pious and sublime prayer which this holy 
man uttered at the awful moment when the flames were 
about to be kindled about him, begins with the identical 
words of the elders in Rev. xi. 17. There is strong rea- 



REVELATION. 63 

eon to believe also that it was received by Papias, 
A. D. 116. 

Among the writers in the third century who received 
the Apocalypse, as written by St. John, may be found 
Justin Martyr, a Christian philosopher (A. D. 140) ; 
Melito, Bishop of Sardis, one of the churches to which 
the book of Revelation was directed; Theophilus, bishop 
of Antioch, who nourished about A. D. 169-180 ; Apol- 
lonius (A. D. 192), of whom Eusebius says, "He makes 
use of testimonies out of the Revelation of John;" also 
Clement of Alexandria, and many others. 

Such are some of the external evidences of the genu- 
ineness of the book of Revelation, and which show it to 
have been written by St. John. If our space would 
allow, we might add to these many internal evidences, 
or certain facts in the life of John, which seem to confirm 
this supposition. For a full consideration and refutation 
of the objections urged against the authenticity of this 
Revelation, the reader is referred to the introduction to 
" Barnes's Notes on the Book of Revelation," or "Home's 
Introduction to the Bible/' vol. iv., pp. 474-484. 

The time when this book was written is a subject 
which has caused many opinions to be advanced ; but we 
can here notice only the one which seems most probable, 
and is most generally received. St. John was doubtless 
banished into Patmos towards the end of Domitian's 
reign, by virtue of the emperor's edict for persecuting 
the Christians, and had his revelation contained in the 
Apocalypse during his exile, although the book itself 
could not have been published until after the apostle's 
release and return to Ephesus. Irenseus, Origen, and 
other early fathers, refer the apostle's exile to the latter 
part of Domitian's reign, which terminated in A. D. 96. 
Internal evidence likewise supports this conclusion. The 
seven Asiatic churches, described in the first three chap- 
ters of this book, are spoken of in a manner which 
proves beyond a doubt that they had been planted for a 
considerable time. 

The Christian exiles were liberated at the time of Do- 
mitian's death, which is related to have occurred in Sep- 
tember, 96. The emperor's decease and the permission 
to return could not have been known in Asia immediate- 
ly. Some time must have intervened before the apostle 
could have either written the Apocalypse at Ephesus, or 
sent it from Patmos ; hence Dr. Mill, Le Clerc, Dr. Lard- 
ner, Bishop Tomline, and many others, conclude that the 



64 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

Revelation was written in the year 96 or 97. From the 
book itself it is sufficiently evident that St. John, being 
in exile in the Isle of Patmos, is favored with the ap- 
pearance of the Lord Jesus Christ to him, and is com- 
manded to commit to writing the visions which he beheld. 
(See Rev. i. 11, 19, ii. 1, 8, 12, 18, iii. 1, 7, 14, xiv. 13, 
xix. 9, and xxi. 5.) 

The Apocalypse consists of two principal divisions, or 
parts, viz. : After the title of the book, — 

Part I. contains " The things which are" — - that is, the 
then present state of the churches (i. 9-20, ii.. iii.). 

Part II. contains a prophecy of the things which shall 
be hereafter, or the future condition of the church 
through succeeding ages, from the time when the apostle 
beheld the apocalyptic visions to the grand consumma- 
tion of all things/ including the grand conflict, the mil- 
lennium, the conflict renewed, the judgment, the new 
creation, and a description of the New Jerusalem (iv.- 
xxii. 1-5. The CONCLUSION (xxii. G-21). 

Manv parte of the Apocalypse are necessarily obscure 
to us, "because they contain predictions of events still 
future ; yet enough is sufficiently clear to convey to us 
the most important religious instruction. This book is 
to us precisely what the prophecies of the Old Testa- 
ment were to the Jews, nor is it in any degree more in- 
explicable. The pious Jew looked into the holy books 
containing these ancient prophecies with reverence, and, 
with an eye of patient expectation, " waiting for the con- 
solation of Israel." We, in like manner, " look into 
these prophecies of the Apocalypse for the full consum- 
mation of the great scheme of the gospel, when Chris- 
tianity shall finally prevail over all the corruptions of 
the world, and be universally established in its utmost 
purity.''* 

" Blessed is he that waiteth. But go thy way till the 
end be, for thou shalt rest, and stand in thy lot at the 
end of the days " (Dan. xii. 13). 



BOOKS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



65 



TABLES 

OF THE BOOKS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

THE GOSPELS AND ACTS OF THE APOSTLES. 



By whom 


Where written. 


When written. 


written. 


According 
to Home. 


According to 
A. Ciarke. 


According to 
Home. 


According 
to A.Clarke 


Matthew. 

Mark. 
Luke. 
John. 
Acts (Luke). 


Judea. 

Rome. 
Greece. 
Ephesus. 
Greece. 


Judea. 

Rome. 
Greece. 
Ephesus. 
Greece. 


Hebrew, 37. 

Greek, G4. 

Bet. 60 and G3. 

G3 or G4. 

97 or 98. 

63 or 04. 


A. D.64 

64 
63 or 64 

68 
63 or 64 



THE EPISTLES OF ST. PAUL. 



Order of 
the Books. 




Where 


written. 


When written. 


"S 







o 




o . 
















B& 


to 


To whom written. 


fcco 

.5 2 


to* 


bOg 

.5 s 


.5 8 


is 


11 

o 




■v3 O 

u 

o 


So 

o . 




"Ho 

o . 

V<1 


M 


< 




< 


< 


<1 


< 


i 


5 


The Romans. 


Corinth. 


Corinth. 


57 or 58 


Feb. 58 


2 


4 


1 Corinthians. 


Ephesus. 


Ephesus. 


57 


56 


3 


6 


2 Corinthians. 


Macedo- 
nia. 


Macedo- 
nia. 


58 


Oct. 57 


4 


3 


The Galatians. 


Corinth. 


Corinth 

orEph's. 

Rome. 


57 or 58 


52 or 53 


5 


7 


The Ephesians. 


Rome. 


61 


April 61 


6 


8 


The Philippians. 


Rome. 


Rome. 


62 or 63 


End of 62 


7 


9 


The Colossians. 


Rome. 


Rome. 


62 


End of 62 


8 


1 


1 Thessalonians. 


Corinth. 


Corinth. 


52 


52 


9 


2 


2 Thessalonians. 


Corinth. 


Corinth. 


52 


52 


10 


12 


1 Timothy. 


Macedo- 
nia. 


Macedo- 
nia. 


64 


56 


11 


14 


2 Timothy. 


Rome. 


Rome. 


65 


May 61 


12 


13 


To Titus. 


Macedo- 
nia. 


Macedo- 
nia. 


66 


56 


13 


10 


To Philemon. 


Rome. 


Rome. 


62 or 63 


End of 62 


14 


11 


The Hebrews. 


Italy. 


Italy. 


62 or 63 


Spring, 63 



NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 



THE CATHOLIC OB GENERAL EPISTLES. 



Order of 
the Books. 




Where written. 


When written. 


A 






















o 


o . 


















to 

g . 

|3 


By whom written. 




.5 3 
-S3 




bOM 

"85 


gm 


C3 






o . 








O 




o 


Z< 


a 


1H 


H 


< 




«4 


< 


< 


< 


i 


1 


I>v James. 


Jndea. 


Jndea. 


61 


01 or 02 


a 


2 


1 Peter. 


Koine. 


Koine. 


04 


04 


3 


4 


2 Piter. 


Koine. 


Home. 


65 


04 


4 


5 


1 Jolin. 


Unknown. 


Epliesns. 


08 or 09 


SO 


R 





2 and 3 John. 


Ephesus. 


Ephesus. 


68 orO!) 


bet. 80 & 90 


G 


3 


Jude. 


Unknown. 


I'nkn'n. 


14 or 05 


64 or 05 


7 


7 


Kev. St. John. 


Epliesns. 


Patmoe, 

or Eph's. 


90 or 97 


95 or 96 



BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCHES. 



MATTHEW. 



This apostle, surnnmed Levi (Mark ii. 14 and Luke 
v. 27), was the son of Alpheus, but not of that Alpheus, 
or Cleopas, who was the father of James, mentioned in 
Matt. x. 3, He was a native of Galilee, but of what 
city in that country, or what tribe of the people of Israel, 
we are not informed. Before his conversion to Chris- 
tianity Matthew was a tax-gatherer, usually styled apor- 
titor, or inferior collector of taxes, and not a publicanvs, 
or general farmer of customs. He probably held his 
appointment under the Romans, at the port of Caperna- 
um, a maritime town on the Sea of Galilee, and is under- 
stood to have collected the customs on all imports or 
exports at that place, and a tribute from all passengers 
who went by water. Thus we see that Matthew belonged 
to the lower class of people. In Matt. ix. 9, it is related 
how he was called to be an apostle. This is mentioned 
after the Sermon on the Mount. In Luke vi. 13, we 
read that Jesus selected twelve to be his apostles, before 
the Sermon on the Mount, and that Matthew was one of 
them. Hence we infer that, after he was called, as re- 
lated by Luke, he returned to his usual occupation, from 
which Jesus, on leaving Capernaum, called him away. 
On this occasion Matthew gave a parting entertainment 
to his friends. After this event he is mentioned only in 
Acts i. 13, where we learn that he, having remained with 
the other apostles at Jerusalem until the day of Pente- 
cost, was endowed with the Holy Spirit. How long he 
remained in Judea after this event, we have no authentic 
account. 

Socrates, an ecclesiastical historian of the fifth cen- 
tury, relates that when the apostles went abroad to 

67 



68 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

preach the gospel to the Gentiles, Matthew went into 
Ethiopia; and the common opinion has been that he suf- 
fered martyrdom at Naddabar or Naddaver, a city in 
that country. But this is contradicted by Heracleon, a 
learned Valentinian of the second century, and who, as 
cited by Clement of Alexandria, reckons Matthew among 
the apostles who did not sufi'er martyrdom. 

Matthew is generally allowed to have written first of 
all the evangelists, but the precise time of the composi- 
tion of his Gospel is a question that has been greatly agi- 
tated ; so also has the question as to the language in 
which this Gospel was originally written. From all the 
evidence adduced in these litigated questions, it seems 
most probable that St. Matthew wrote first a Hebrew 
Gospel, for the use of Hebrew converts, at quite an 
early date in the history of the church. As believers 
began greatly to increase who spoke the Greek language, 
it is highly probable that lie afterwards wrote in Greek, 
as after the destruction of Jerusalem the Jewish lan- 
guage, and everything belonging to the Jews, fell into 
the utmost contempt. It is clear, says Home, that our 
present Greek Gospel is an authentic original, and con- 
sequently an inspired production of the evangelist Mat- 
thew, written- a few years after the resurrection and 
ascension of our Lord. 

Except St. John, the evangelist Matthew had the best 
opportunity for writing a regular and connected narra- 
tive of the life of Christ, according to the order of time 
and the exact series of his transactions. 

Dr. Campbell says of the clearness of the style of St. 
Matthew's writings, in relating the discourses of Christ, 
that " his Sermon on the Mount, his charge to the apos- 
tles, his illustrations of the nature of his kingdom, and 
his prophecy on Mount Olivet, are examples. He has 
also wonderfully united simplicity and energy in relat- 
ing the replies of his Master to the cavils of his adver- 
saries." 

He is the only evangelist who has given us an account 
of our Lord's description of the process of the general 
judgment; and his relation of that momentous event is 
truly impressive. 

M ARK. 

According to ecclesiastical testimonies, this evangelist 
is the same person who, in Acts xiii. 5, 13, is called by 
his Hebrew name, John. He was not an apostle or com- 



MARK. 69 

panion of Jesus Christ during his ministry, though Epi- 
pnanius and several other fathers affirm that lie was one 
of the seventy disciples. 

All that we learn from the New Testament of him is, 
that he was " sister's son to Barnabas " (Col. iv. 10), 
and the son of Mary, a pious woman of Jerusalem, at 
whose house the apostles and first Christians often as- 
sembled (Acts xii. 12). As he is mentioned as a convert 
from Judaism, he was probably of Jewish descent. 

He is supposed to have adopted the surname Mark 
when he left Judea to preach the gospel in foreign coun- 
tries. From Peter's styling him as his son (1 Pet. v. 
13), this evangelist is supposed to have been converted 
under St. Peter's ministry, and served with him in the 
gospel. He was probably first introduced to St. Paul by 
Barnabas, and accompanied them in their travels (Acts 
xii. 25, xiii. f>, 13, xv. 36-41 ; 2 Tim. iv. 4; Philem. 24). 

From Philem. 24, and Col. iv. 10, it appears that the 
trouble between St. Paul and himself, referred to in 
Acts xv. 37-39, had been settled, and that he was with 
the apostle Paul in his first imprisonment at Home; and 
according to 2 Tim. iv. 11, he also was with him during 
his second captivity. 

There is a unanimous ecclesiastical tradition that 
Mark was the companion and interpreter of St. Peter, 
probably so called because he was the assistant of Peter, 
and either orally or in writing communicated and devel- 
oped what Peter taught. 

. The genuineness and authenticity of St. Mark's Cos- 
pel are proved by the universal testimony of ancient 
Christians, but considerable uncertainty prevails as to 
the time when it was composed. 

It is allowed by all the ancient authors, that St. Mark 
wrote from Rome ; and it is evident from the evange- 
list's own narrative (Mark xvi. 20) that he did not write 
until after the apostles had dispersed themselves among 
the Gentiles, and had preached the gospel everywhere, 
the Lord working with them, and confirming the word 
with signs following. 

Dr. Lardner, in discussing this subject, shows that the 
apostles did not all quit Judea earlier than A. D. 50, 
and the most probable date of this Gospel seems to be 
between the years GO and Go. 

It is the almost unanimous opinion of the ancients, 
that St. Mark wrote this Gospel at Rome by the request 



70 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

of many who had heard Peter publicly preach the Chris- 
tian religion in that city. 

St. Mark, having" for a longtime been the intimate com- 
panion of Peter, and being familiar with what that apos- 
tle had delivered, could commit the particulars to writ- 
ing with the accuracy of an eye-witness. Hence the 
character of Peter is as clearly developed in this Gospel 
as if it had been written by that apostle himself. His 
weaknesses and fall are clearly exposed, and his real 
virtues referred to with characteristic humility. All the 
transactions and sayings of Christ mentioned in this Gos- 
pel are those which Peter witnessed: and are related 
with such minuteness of circumstance as shows that the 
person who dictated it must have been an eye-w T itness of 
what is recorded. 

As much that is recorded by Mark corresponds so near- 
ly with the record by Matthew, some have supposed that 
Mark's Gospel was, in part at least, a copy of Matthew's. 
But his imperfect description of Christ's transactions with 
his disciples after his resurrection shows conclusively 
that he was wholly unacquainted with the contents of 
Matthew's Gospel. 

Some writers have affirmed that St Mark suffered 
martyrdom. But from Eusebius, Jerome, and others, 
we learn that after he had written his Gospel, he deliv- 
ered it to the persons who had requested him to write it, 
went into Egypt, and having planted a church at Alex- 
andria, died and was buried there in the eightli year of 
the reign of Nero. 

LUKE. 

Concerning this evangelist we have but little certain 
information. From what is recorded in the Scriptures, 
as -well as from what is related by the early Christian 
writers, we learn the following particulars : — 

His name is a contraction of Lucanus, and indicates 
that he w T as descended from heathen ancestors, and was 
either a slave or a freedman ; thus the name harmonizes 
with the idea that he was by profession a physician. 
The higher ranks of the Romans were disinclined to 
practise medicine, which they left rather to their freed- 
men. 

From bis attending St. Paul in his travels, some have 
concluded that he was a Jew; and others have supposed 
he was one of the seventy disciples. But the latter sup' 



LUKE. 71 

position is contradicted by St. Luke's own declaration that 
he was not an eye-witness of our Saviour's actions. 

The most probable conjecture is, that St. Luke was 
descended from heathen or Gentile parents, and in his 
youth embraced Judaism, from winch he was converted 
to Christianity at Antioch, his native city. It is clear 
that he was not one of the apostles, neither was he one 
of the seventy disciples (Luke x. 1), nor one of the two 
who went to Emmaus (Luke xxiv. 18), as has been 
sometimes supposed. 

The first time that this evangelist is mentioned in the 
New Testament, is in his own history of the Acts of the 
Apostles (Acts xvi. 10, 11). We there find him with St. 
Paul at Troas; thence he attended him to Jerusalem, 
continued with him in his troubles in Judea, and sailed 
in the same ship with him when he was sent a prisoner 
from Csesarea to Rome, where he staid with him during 
his two years' confinement (Acts xxvii. 1-17, xxviii.). 

The close of his life is as unknown as the commence- 
ment; but as none of the ancient fathers have mentioned 
his suffering martyrdom. Lardner and others think it 
probable that he died a natural death. 

The authenticity and genuineness of St. Luke's Gos- 
pel, and of his history of the Acts of the Apost'es, are 
confirmed by the unanimous testimony of antiquity. 
But notwithstanding this unanimous testimony of the 
ancient fathers, an attempt has been made in late years, 
by those who deny the miraculous conception of Jesus 
Christ, to impugn the authority of the first two chapters 
of this Gospel. But it will be seen by any careful obser- 
ver of the use of language, that this Gospel could not 
possibly have begun witli the second or third chapter, 
but must have been preceded by some introduction. 

The Gospel by St. Luke contains many exceedingly 
valuable accounts not mentioned by the other evangeiists ; 
for instance, those relating to the childhood of Jesus, tiie 
admirable parables related in chap. xv. and xvi., the 
narration respecting the disciples at Emmaus, the section 
from chap. ix. 51, to xix. 27, which contains particulars 
mostly wanting in the other evangelists. With regard to 
the time when St. Luke wrote his Gospel, and the place 
from which it was written, there seems to be a diversity 
of opinion. Micbaelis, Lardner. and, we think, a majori- 
ty of biblical critics, are of opinion it was written in the 
year 68 or 6-i, and the internal evidences of time ex- 
hibited in the Gospel itself seem to correspond with this 



i2 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

date. It is also most probable, that when Luke left 
Paul in Rome, he went directly into Greece, and there 
composed, or finished, and published his Gospel, and the 
Acts of the Apostles. 

That St. Luke wrote his Gospel for the benefit of 
Gentile converts is almost universally acknowledged by 
Christian antiquity, and may be inferred from his dedi- 
cating- it to one of his Gentile converts. 

It will be observed that the order of time of Matthew 
and Luke is different. Matthew narrates the facts re- 
corded in his Gospel chronologically ; Luke, on the con- 
trary, seems to pay but little attention to order, but 
makes a classification of events, referring each to its 
proper class, without regard to chronological arrange- 
ment. 

If it be asked how St. Luke, not being an apostle or 
disciple of Christ, could be able to write the narratives 
recorded in his Gospel, we answer that the evangelist 
himself expressly declares that he received his informa- 
tion from those who had been eye-witnesses. 

Dr. Campbell says of the writings of St. Luke, "No 
one lias surpassed him, especially in the moral instruc- 
tions given by our Lord in his parables, in uniting affect- 
ing sweetness of manner with genuine simplicity, partic- 
ularly in the parable of the benevolent Samaritan and 
the penitent prodigal." 

JOHN THE EVANGELIST. 

St. John, the evangelist and apostle, was the son of 
Zebedee, a fisherman of the town of Bethsaida, on the 
Sea of Galilee, and the younger brother of James the 
Elder. His mother's name was Salome. The parents 
of this evangelist seem to have been in easy circum- 
stances, for we learn that Zebedee, his father, was the 
owner of a vessel, and had hired servants (Mark i. 21), 
and that Salome, his mother, was among the number of 
those women who contributed to the maintenance of Jesus 
(xxvii. 56) ; and therefore we have no reason to imagine 
that their children were altogether illiterate, as some crit- 
ics have imagined them to have been from a misinterpre- 
tation of Acts iv. 13. They probably, from their stations 
in life, had not studied in the schools of the Pharisees, and 
were ignorant of the rabbinical learning and traditions of 
the Jews. But they were doubtless well acquainted with 
the Scriptures of the Old Testament, having not only read 



JOHN THE EVANGELIST. 73 

them, but heard them publicly explained in the syna- 
gogues. John's acquaintance with the high priest (xviii. 
15) would indicate that he lived at Jerusalem ; also that 
he belonged to the wealthier class. We have reason to 
believe that from a tender age lie nourished religious 
feelings, since Salome, his mother, who evinced so much 
love for Jesus, probably fostered at an early period, those 
hopes of a Messiah which she expresses in Matt. xx. 20, 
21. From chap. i. 37-41, it would seem probable that 
he had been a disciple of John the Baptist before he 
became a disciple of Christ. 

Jobn was called to be a follower of Christ while 
mending a net with his father and elder brother, James, 
at the Sea of Tiberias (Matt. iv. 21), which is supposed 
to have been when he was about twenty-five years old. 

The two brothers, with Peter, were often admitted to 
peculiar favors by our Lord (Mark v 37 ; Luke viii. 51 ; 
Matt. xvii. 1; Mark ix. 2; Matt. xxvi. 36-45; Mark xiv. 
32-42). Some of the ancient fathers affirm that Salome 
was the daughter of Joseph by a former wife, and that 
she was our Lord's sister, and John his nephew, which 
may explain the reason why such peculiar favors were 
shown to James and John, and why they sought and 
expected the first places in his kingdom. It may also be 
the reason why Jesus committed his mother to the care 
of John on the cross. 

John was a constant attendant of our Lord, and an eye- 
witness to all his labors, crucifixion, the scenes follow- 
ing the resurrection, and ascension. After the ascension 
of our Lord, he returned with the other apostles to 
Jerusalem, and on the day of Pentecost partook with 
them of the outpouring of the Spirit. After the death of 
Mary, the mother of Christ, which is supposed to have 
occurred about fifteen years after the crucifixion, and 
after the council held at Jerusalem, at which he was 
present (Acts xv.), John left Jerusalem, where he had 
resided since the crucifixion of Christ, and went into 
Asia Minor, where he formed and presided over seven 
churches in as many cities, but resided principally at 
Ephesus. It is supposed by some, however, that he 
remained in Judea and vicinity, and did not go into Asia 
Minor until the war broke out with the Romans, about 
A. D. GQ or 70. 

Towards the close of Domitian's reign, St. John was 
banished to the Isle of Patmos, where he wrote his 
Revelation (Rev. i. 9). After the death of Domitian, in 



74 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

A. D. 96, and the accession of Nerva to the imperial 
throne. St. John returned to Ephesus, where he wrote 
his Gospel and Epistles. 

Jerome relates that he continued preaching until so 
enfeebled by age he had to be carried into the assembly. 
And not being able to deliver a long discourse, his custom 
was to repeat in every meeting, " My dear children, love 
one another." 

Tertullian relates that, in the latter part of the reign of 
Domitian, St. John was forcibly taken to Rome, where he 
was thrown into a caldron of boiling oil, from which he 
was miraculously released, and then brought to Patmos. 
But as no other ancient writer relates this circumstance, 
and this mode of punishment was unknown at Rome, we 
shall lay but little stress upon the statement. John was 
the youngest of the apostles when called, and lived to 
the greatest age. He died A. D. 100, aged ninety-six 
years. 

The time when John wrote his Gospel cannot he 
definitely ascertained. Some writers claim that this 
Gospel was written before the destruction of Jerusalem, 
as the writer refers, in chap. v. 2, to the pool of Bethesda, 
at Jerusalem, as still standing, which would not be the 
fact if the city had been destroyed. But it is by no 
means certain that this pool was destroyed with the city; 
it is much more probable that it was spared. The inter- 
nal evidence of the Gospel, as well as the testimony of 
the ancients, seems to warrant the conclusion that the 
evangelist wrote his Gospel from Ephesus, after his re- 
turn from Patmos, about the year 97. Campbell says 
" this narrative is characterized by singular perspicuity, 
and by the most unaffected simplicity and benevolence. 
There are few passages in Holy Writ more deeply affect- 
ing than this evangelist s narrative of the resurrection 
of Lazarus." 



PETER. 

Simon, surnamed Cephas, or Peter, which appellation 
signifies a stone, or rock, was the son of Jonas, or Jonah, 
and was born at Bethsaida, on the coast of the Sea of 
Galilee. He had a brother named Andrew, and they 
jointly pursued the occupation of fishermen. In Matt. 
xvi. 17, he is called Simon Bar-jona, that is, son of 
Jonah. These two brothers were hearers of John the 
Baptist: and from his testimony and their own conver- 



PETER. 75 

sation with Jesus Christ, they were convinced that he 
was the Messiah (John i. 35-42). From this time it is 
probable they had frequent intercourse with our Saviour, 
and witnessed several of his miracles, especially that 
performed at Cana in Galilee (John ii. 1, 2.). Both 
Peter and Andrew seem to have followed their trade un- 
til Jesus called them to " follow him," and promised to 
make them "fishers of men "(Matt. iv. 18, 19; Mark 
i. 17; Luke v. 10). From this time they became his 
constant companions, and were numbered among his 
apostles. Peter was particularly, with James and John, 
honored with his Master's intimacy (Mark v. 37; Luke 
viii. 51 ; Matt. xvii. 1 ; Mark ix. 2 ; Luke ix. 28 ; Matt. 
xxvi. 36-5G). At the time Peter was called, he was 
married, and seems to have moved from Bethsaida to 
Capernaum, where his wife's mother resided ; and our 
Lord seems to have taken up an occasional residence at 
his house at that place after he left Nazareth and came 
to dwell in Capernaum (Matt. iv. 13), whither the people 
resorted to him (Luke iv. 40; Matt. viii. 16, xvii. 24-27). 

The distinguishing characteristics of the apostle Pe- 
ter are signally portrayed by the sacred historians, and 
these narrations of his weaknesses, as well as virtues, 
enhance the credibility of the sacred records, and show 
the sincerity of Peter's attachment to Christ, and the 
fervor of his zeal in the cause of his Master. 

He is always first to reply to all questions proposed to 
the disciples as a collective body by our Lord, as in 
Matt. xvi. 13-16. He exhibits the ardor of his spirit in 
attempting to walk on the sea (Matt. xiv. 28-31) ; and 
still more strikingly in his conduct towards the high 
priest's servant, whose right ear he cut off (Matt, xxvii. 
51-54). His presumption is also evinced in his declara- 
tion that he never would abandon his Master (Matt. 
xxvi. 33), and his weakness in afterwards denying him 
under the most aggravating circumstances (Matt. xxvi. 
69-75). It is probable remorse and shame prevented 
Peter from following Christ any farther than the high 
priest's palace, for it does not appear that he attended 
the crucifixion, as we find St. John did. Although forsa- 
ken by Peter before the crucifixion, our Lord remem- 
bered him after the resurrection, as we learn the second 
time he showed himself was to Peter. On another 
occasion (John xxi.) our Lord afforded Peter an oppor- 
tunity of thrice declaring his attachment to him, and 
charged him to feed the flock of Christ with fidelity and 



76 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

tenderness. After our Lord's ascension, Peter took an 
active part in the affairs of the infant church (see Acts 
i.-x.). He took an active part in the council held at Je- 
rusalem (Acts xv. 7-10). Peter is not again mentioned 
in the Acts of the Apostles, nor have we any certain in- 
formation respecting his subsequent labors. From Gal. 
ii. 11. it would appear that he afterwards preached at 
Antioch. And as he inscribed his First Epistle to the 
Hebrew Christians, he is supposed to have preached in 
the countries named in that inscription (1 Pet. i. 1, 2). 
Tradition reports that Peter, towards the close of life, 
went to Koine to dwell, and was made bishop of the 
church in that city, and finally suffered martyrdom in 
the persecution raised against the Christians by Nero. 
The Catholics having urged the claim of the supremacy 
of the pope on 'account of that tradition, a thorough 
examination into its accuracy has led to the following 
result: It is admitted as certain that Peter did suffer 
martyrdom, and probably by crucifixion, and as prob- 
able that this took place at Rome; nevertheless, it is 
pretty clear that he never for any length of time resided 
in Rome, and it is morally certain that he never was 
bishop of the church there. It is generally admitted 
that he was crucified with his head downwards. Clem- 
ent of Alexandria adds, from an ancient tradition cur- 
rent in his time, that Peter's wife suffered martyrdom a 
short time before him. 



ANDREW. 

This apostle was a native of Bethsaida, a town of 
Galilee, the son of Jona, and brother of Simon Peter. 
But little is known of Andrew, except what is related 
of him in connection with Peter, to which reference is 
made in the biography of that apostle, which see. The 
principal incidents in which his name occurs during the 
life of Christ are, the feeding of the five thousand (John 
vi. 8) ; his introducing to our Lord certain Greeks who 
desired to see him (John xii. 22) ; and his asking, with 
his brother Simon and the two sons of Zebedee, for 
further explanation of what our Lord had said in refer- 
ence to the destruction of the temple (Mark xiii. 3). 
We have no authentic record of his subsequent history. 
Tradition, however, assigns Scythia, Greece, and Thrace, 
as the scenes of his ministry ; and he is said to have 



BARTHOLOMEW. JAMES. 77 

been crucified in Achaia, on a cross of the form (X) 
commonly known as " St. Andrew's cross." 



BARTHOLOMEW. 

Bartholomew, one of the twelve (Matt. x. 3), is sup- 
posed to be the same person whom John, in naming the 
apostles, calls Nathanael. He is called Bartholomew in 
the first three Gospels, and by Luke in Acts i. 13, where 
the name Bartholomew is joined with Philip, and Na- 
thanael is omitted. 

Where the name Nathanael occurs in John, it is 
joined likewise with Philip, and Bartholomew is omit- 
ted. Nathanael may be considered as his real name, 
and Bartholomew merely expresses his filial rela- 
tion. He was a native of Cana, in Galilee, and is sup- 
posed to have followed the occupation of a fisherman 
(John xxi. 2). 

When informed by Philip that the Messiah had ap- 
peared on earth in the person of Jesus of Nazareth, he 
asked, ;; Can any good thing come out of Nazareth? " 

He, however, accepted Philip's laconic invitation, 
" Come and see." When Jesus saw him coming, he 
said, <; Behold an Israelite indeed, in whom there is no 
guile" (John i. -io-51). All the disciples of John the 
Baptist, named in the first chapter of John, became apos- 
tles. Bartholomew was one of those disciples to whom 
our Lord appeared after his resurrection, at the Sea of 
Tiberias (John xxi. 2). He was also a witness of the 
ascension, and returned, with the other apostles, to 
Jerusalem (Acts i. 4, 12. 13). Of his subsequent his- 
tory we have little more than vague tradition. 

JAMES. 

Two, if not three, persons of this name are men- 
tioned in the New Testament. 

1. James, the son of Zebedee, and brother of John 
the evangelist, was. on account of his being much older 
than tiie other, or from some peculiar honors or favors 
conferred upon him by our Lord, surnamed the Great. 
He and his brother, in company with Simon Peter, were 
fishermen (Luke v. 10), probably at Bethsaida. By 
comparing Matt. iv. 21, Mark i. 19, with John i., it ap- 



78 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

pears that James and John had been acquainted with our 
Lord for some time, and received him as the Messiah 
betore they were called to be his constant attendants — a 
call which they readily obeyed. Their mother's name 
was Mary, surnamod Salome. She is thought by some 
to be the sister of Mary, the mother of Jesus ; but it 
seems more probable that the mother of our Lord was 
an only daughter. We find James and John, with Peter, 
associated with our Lord on several interesting occa- 
sions. They were alone present at the transfiguration 
(Matt. xvii. 1 : Mark ix. 2; Luke ix. 28) ; at the restora- 
tion to life of Jairus's daughter (Mark v. 42; Luke viii. 
51); and in the garden of Gethsemane during the agony 
(Mark xiv. 33; Matt. xxvi. 37; Luke xxi. 37). With 
Andrew they listened in private to our Lord's discourse 
on the fall of Jerusalem (Mark xiii. 3). 

From a false notion entertained by them of the king- 
dom of the Messiah, their ambitious views led them to 
join in the request made by their mother (Matt. xx. 20- 
23; Mark x. 35). From Luke ix. 52, we may infer that 
their temparament was warm and impulsive. 

Probably on account of the boldness and energy which 
characterized their apostleship, they received from their 
Lord the appellation of Boanerges, or so?is of thunder. 
James was the first martyr among the apostles, being 
slain by order of Herod the king (Acts xii. 1-3), thus 
fulfilling the prediction of our Lord concerning him 
(Luke xxi. 1(1). 

Some Spanish historians claim that St. James made an 
extensive missionary tour through Western Europe, es- 
pecially Spain; that he returned to Jerusalem, and after 
his crucifixion, his body was carried back to Spain and 
buried, where it still remains. But we find nothing in 
biblical history to justify this conclusion. 

Clement of Alexandria reports that the officer that 
conducted James to the tribunal (or rather his accuser), 
on witnessing the bold declaration of his faith, was influ- 
enced to embrace the gospel, and avow himself also a 
Christian, in consequence of which he was beheaded at 
the same time. 

2. James, the son of Cleopas, or Alpheus (Mark iii. 18 ; 
Matt. x. 3; Acts i. 13), and Mary (Mark xv. 40), was 
called, either in reference to his years or stature, 
Jciuies the Less. It is said in John xix. 22, his mother 
was sister to Christ's mother. It is probable, however, 



JUDE, OR JUDAS. 79 

that she was not an own sister, properly so called. St. 
Jerome claims that the mother of James was the daugh- 
ter of Aggi, brother to Zacharias, father to John the 
Baptist — hence reputed our Lo.d's brother in the same 
sense he was reputed the son of Joseph. Indeed, we 
find several persons spoken of as our Lord's brethren 
but in what sense was controverted of old. St. Jerome. 
Chrysostom, and some others, will have them so called 
because the sons of Mary, cousin-german (according to 
the custom of the Hebrew language, sister) to the Vir- 
gin Mary. Ecclesiastical history, we think, warrants 
the conclusion that the mother of our Lord was the only 
daughter of her mother, who is generally supposed to be 
the second wife of Mary's father. 

Whether he is the James, ' ; the brother of the Lord " 
(Gal. i. 19), is a question which Dr. Neander pronounces 
to be the most difficult in the apostolic history, and can- 
not yet be considered as decided. We think it probable 
he is the same person, although there may be plausible 
objections to this opinion. 

That he was an apostle there can be no doubt, but it 
does not appear when his designation to this office took 
place. He is mentioned with peculiar distinction in Acts 
xii. 17, xv. 13, xxi. 18 ; 1 Cor. xv. 7 ; Gal. i. 19, and ii. 9, 
12. He resided at Jerusalem during the labors of the 
apostles, and was present at the apostolic council at 
Jerusalem, where he seems to have presided, as he was 
the last to give his judgment, in which all the other mem- 
bers of the council acquiesced (Acts xv. 13-19). On 
account of his distinguished piety and sanctity he was 
surnamed " the just." He was put to death about the 
time of the passover, A. D. 62 ; and tradition says he was 
thrown, by the Jews, from the battlements of the temple, 
and then despatched with a fuller's club, while on his 
knees and in the act of praying for his murderers. 

JUDE, or JUDAS. 

There are three several names by which this apostle is 
called, in the history of the gospel : Jude, Thaddeus, and 
Lebbeus (Matt. x. 4; Mark iii. 18). He was the son of 
Alpheus, and brother of James the Less, and one of the 
twelve apostles. Judas is the name of one of our Lord's 
brethren (Matt. xiii. 55), but it is not certain whether our 
Lord's brother is identical with the apostle of this name. 



80 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

There can be but little doubt, however, that he was, by 
descent and parentage, of our Lord's kindred. We have 
no account when or how he was called to the apostleship. 
There is no mention made of him until we find him enu- 
merated with the twelve apostles, nor is there anything 
particularly recorded of him afterwards, except in John 
xiv. 21-23, where we , read he addressed the following 
question to his divine Master : " Lord, how is it that thou 
wilt manifest thyself unto its, and not inito the world t " 
From this it is apparent that he entertained mistaken 
ideas of Christ's kingdom, and cherished those delusive 
hopes, in common with all the other apostles, of soon 
beholding his Master erect a powerful and magnificent 
empire. 

Jude continued with the other apostles after our Lord's 
resurrection and ascension (Acts i. 13), and was with 
them on the day of Pentecost (Acts ii. 1) ; and it is gen- 
erally supposed he preached the gospel for some time in 
Judea, and performed miracles in the name of Christ. 
As his life seems to have been prolonged, it is considered 
probable that he afterwards quitted Judea, and preached 
the gospel in other countries. It lias been said that he 
preached in Arabia, Syria, Mesopotamia, and Persia, 
and that he suffered martyrdom in the last-named coun- 
try. But we have no authentic account of his travels, 
and it may be even questioned whether he was a 
martyr. 

It seems certain that Jude was a married man, and 
had children, for Eusebius relates that Domitian, in a 
fit of jealousy, having heard that there were some.of 
the line of David and of Christ's kindred that remained, 
ordered an inquiry to be made concerning the posterity 
of David, as he suspected every one that might look like 
a co-rival in the empire, and that two grandchildren of 
St. Jude, the brother of our Lord, were brought before 
him. The emperor questioned them concerning their 
profession and manner of life, — which was husbandry, — 
and also concerning the kingdom of Christ, when it 
should appear. Being answered that his kingdom was a 
spiritual and not a temporal one, and that it would not 
appear until the end of the world, the emperor consid- 
ered them perfectly harmless, and dismissed them un- 
bound, and by an edict appeased the persecution raised 
against the church. 



JUDAS ISCARIOT. 81 



JUDAS ISCARIOT. 

Judas was one of the twelve chosen disciples of our 
Lord (Matt. x. 4). Nothing is certainly known of his 
parentage, or place of his birth ; yet the word Iscariot is 
supposed by some to signify of Carioih, a small town on 
the east of Jordan, while others think it is derived from 
a word which signifies suspension, and refers to the man- 
ner of Judas's death. In John vi. 71, he is called the 
son of Simon, whence it has been supposed by some that 
he was the son of Simon the Canaanite, another of the 
twelve apostles. 

The principal fact which the evangelists have re- 
corded concerning him is found in John xii. 1-8. In 
Matt. xxvi. 6-13, and Mark xiv. 3-9, this narrative is 
immediately followed by the account of Judas's betrayal 
of his Master, whence it has been supposed that Judas 
was offended at the rebuke which the Saviour adminis- 
tered to him for the covetous spirit which he manifested 
on that occasion, and that it was in a 6pirit of revenge 
that he betrayed his Master. 

In nearly every passage where the evangelists have 
referred to Judas, he is spoken of as the one who be- 
trayed Christ. As the sacred writers have only given us 
an account of the proceedings of Judas, without ex- 
pressing any opinion concerning them, the subject is 
open to inquiry ; and Kitto remarks, " We must be 
guided in our conclusions by the facts in the case, and 
by the known feelings and principles of human nature." 

The same writer adds, " The only conceivable mo- 
tives for the conduct of Judas are a sense of duty in 
bringing his Master to justice, resentment, avarice, dis- 
satisfaction with the procedure of Jesus, and a conse- 
quent scheme for the accomplishment of his own views." 
The conduct of Judas, before and after the betrayal, 
abundantly proves that it was not the first of the above 
motives which prompted him to commit this wicked 
deed. His preferring no charges against his Master, 
and not appearing at the trial as a witness against him, 
— especially when they were so troubled to find evi- 
dence, — and his confession to them after the trial and 
condemnation of Christ, saying, "I have sinned in that 
I have betrayed innocent blood," prove, beyond a doubt, 
that he had seen nothing to condemn in his Master, but 
everything to approve, and that he must have been con- 
6 



82 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

vinced from what he had seen and heard of the doings 
and teachings of Christ, that he was indeed the Messiah. 
And as there can be no justification for his conduct, if 
actuated by either of the other motives referred to, we 
leave every reader to decide what motive could induce 
Judas to betray his Master, whom he professed to love, 
and must have known to be the Messiah, into the hands 
of wicked men, to be crucified. Compare John xiii. 18; 
Matt, xxvii. 3-8 ; Acts i. 16-20. 

PHILIP. 

Philip, one of the twelve apostles, was born at Bethsai- 
da, a town near the sea of Tiberias, " the city of Andrew 
and Peter " (John i. 44). Of his parents and way of life 
the history of the gospel takes no notice. It is probable, 
however, that he was a fisherman, the trade generally 
of that city. 

With Andrew and John, lie was a disciple of John the 
Baptist, and was in the neighborhood where John was 
baptizing at the time of the baptism of our Lord, and 
heard the testimony of John concerning him. 

It has been claimed by some, that Philip had the 
honor of being the first who was regularly called to be 
a disciple and follower of Jesus. Others, including 
Kitto, place him the fourth on the list of the twelve. 

The first act we have recorded of Philip, after he is 
called to follow Jesus, — a call which he readily obeys, 
— was to bring to the Lord, Nathanael, who is supposed 
to have become an apostle under the name of Barthol- 
omew (John i. 45-51). But little more is recorded .in 
Scripture concerning this apostle, except the somewhat 
remarkable circumstance that when our Lord beheld 
the five thousand people, whom he afterwards fed with 
five loaves and two fishes, he singled out Philip for 
the question, " Whence shall we buy bread, that these 
may eat?" It is added, "This he did to prove him, 
for he himself knew what he would do " (John vi. 5, 6). 

As this question was directed to Philip, it has been 
claimed that he had committed to him the special charge 
of supplying food, while others suppose it was done to 
try Philip's faith, and justify their conclusion for his 
want of faith by the inappropriate remark of Philip (John 
xiv. 8), " Lord, show us the Father, and it sufficeth us." 
He is also referred to in John xii. 21, 22, as the person 
to whom certain Greeks applied, who sought an introduce 



THOMAS. 83 

tion to Jesus, of whom they had heard so much. The 
sacred history only adds to these facts that he was pres- 
ent with other apostles at the religious assembly in Jeru- 
salem, following the Lord's resurrection (Acts i. 13). 
There are many traditions respecting this apostle, all of 
which are vague and indefinite, and many of them, no 
doubt, originated by confounding the name of this apos- 
tle with that of Philip the evangelist, so honorably named 
in the Acts of the Apostles. But there is nothing im- 
probable in the statement that he preached the gospel in 
Phrygia, and that he met his death at Hierapolis, in 
Syria. 

THOMAS. 

When Jews were travelling into foreign countries, or 
conversing freely with Greeks and Romans, it was cus- 
tomary for them to assume to themselves some Greek or 
Latin name of great affinity, and sometimes of the very 
same signification, witli that of their own country. Thus 
our Lord is called Christ, corresponding to his Hebrew 
title Mashiac, or the Anointed. Simon was styled Peter, 
according to that of Cephas, which our Lord gave him ; 
Tabitha, called Dorcas, both signifying a goat. Thus it 
is that Thomas, according to the Syriac importance of 
his name, had the title of Didymus (John xx. 24), which 
signifies a twin. He was one of the twelve apostles 
(Matt. x. 3; Mark iii. 18; Luke vi. 15; Acts i. 13), and 
has been considered a native of Galilee, like most of the 
other apostles (John xxi. 2), but, according to tradition, 
he was a native of Antiochia, and had a twin sister called 
Lysia. 

From the brief account the evangelists have given of 
the life of Thomas, we find that not long after his call to 
the apostleship, he gave an eminent instance of his 
hearty willingness to undergo the saddest fate that might 
await him. 

When our Lord, on learning of the death of Lazarus, 
had resolved to go again into Judea to raise him from 
the dead, the rest of the apostles, having known that the 
Jews had recently sought to stone him, dissuaded our 
Saviour from going there, lest he should be put to death. 
But Thomas desires them not to hinder their Master 
from going thither, though it might cost them their lives. 
<; Let us go," said he, " that we may die with him." 
probably concluding that, instead of raising Lazarus, they 



84 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

themselves should be sent with him to their own graves 
(John xi. G-16). " Whosoever is minded like most re- 
ligionists, who complain of the scepticism of Thomas, to 
follow, in the common transactions of life, the dictates 
of vulgar prudence, may easily abstain from putting his 
hands into the marks of the nails and into the side of the 
Lord (John xx. L ; 5), but whosoever is ready to die with 
the Lord will be inclined to avail himself of extraordi- 
nary evidence for extraordinary facts, since no one likes 
to suffer martyrdom by mistake." It has been claimed 
by some that contradictory traits of character have been 
developed in Thomas, such as inconsiderate faith, and 
a turn for exacting the most rigorous evidence. 

We do not find that Christ blamed Thomas for avail- 
ing himself of all possible evidence, nor that he doubted 
the sincerity of his faith in his crucified Lord ; he only 
pronounced those blessed who should believe without 
these external evidences (John xx. 19-29). Of the sub- 
sequent transactions and manner of death of this apostle 
we have but little definite knowledge. He is said to have 
preached the gospel in Parthia, and, according to Jer- 
ome, in Persia, and was buried at Edessa. There is a 
tradition, however, that Thomas went to India, and suf- 
fered martyrdom there. 

SIMON. 

Simon, one of the twelve apostles, was surnamed Ze- 
lotes (Luke vi. 15; Acts i. loj, probably from his warm, 
ardent temperament, as the true rendering of the word 
(zealot) seems to imply, lie is also called ' ; the Canaan- 
ite " in Matt. x. 4 ; Mark iii. 18 ; from which it has been 
inferred by some that he was a Gentile, and probably a 
native of Cana of Galilee. While others even claim that 
he was the bridegroom at whose wedding in Cana our 
Lord wrought his first miracle (John ii. 1-11). 

But it should be observed that these opinions are 
founded only upon a doubtful tradition. Simon is the 
least known of all the apostles, not a single circumstance 
beyond the fact of his apostleship being recorded in the 
Scriptures concerning him. Tradition alleges that he 
preached the gospel throughout North Africa, from 
Egypt to Mauritania, and that he even proceeded as far 
west as the isles of Britain. 



MATTHIAS. PAUL. 85 



MATTHIAS. 

Matthias, one of the seventy disciples, was chosen by 
lot into the number of the apostles to supply the defi- 
ciency caused by the apostasy of Judas. In Acts 
i. 15-26, we find all that is positively known of this 
apostle. Soon after the return of the disciples from the 
Mount of Olives, where our Lord met them for the last 
time, and was parted from them, Peter called the atten- 
tion of the eleven apostles to the fact that the Scrip- 
ture had been fulfilled in the doom of Judas, and re- 
minded them that the same Scripture points out to them 
what their present conduct should be (Acts i. 20). For 
as it had been predicted that " his habitation should be 
desolate," so it was directed that another should take his 
office. It behooved them, therefore, to take one that 
had accompanied Jesus from his baptism by John, at the 
commencement of his ministry, until his ascension into 
heaven. Being unable of themselves to decide between 
Joseph, called Barsabas, and Matthias, they prayed to 
the Lord for direction, " and they gave forth their lots, 
and the lot fell upon Matthias, and he was numbered 
with the eleven apostles." 

It is remarkable that Matthias is not mentioned again 
in Scripture, while Barsabas is. Yet the Lord had good 
and wise reasons for choosing Matthias, which are wholly 
unknown to us. 

PAUL. 

The events in the life of St. Paul have been so clearly 
narrated in the Synchronology, and the Observations on 
the Acts of the Apostles, in other parts of this work, 
that it seems superfluous to rehearse them here at length. 
Great men have many biographers, and Paul is not an 
exception. In the many volumes that have been written 
upon his life and character, much has been drawn from 
the imagination of the writers, and from doubtful tra- 
ditions. Hence we find many things in these narratives 
apparently contradictory, and some that are irreconcila- 
ble. We shall endeavor to state, very briefly, some of 
the principal scenes in his eventful life, as we find them 
given in the Acts of the Apostles, by St. Luke, his com- 
panion in his labors and travels, and in the Epistles of 
St. Paul himself. 

In Acts xxi. 39, and xxii. 3, we learn that he was a 



8b NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

Jew, born in Tarsus, a city in Cilicia, and in Phil. iii. 5, 
that he was of the tribe of Benjamin. He belonged to a 
sect of the Pharisees, as did also his father (Acts xxiii. 
6). According to the custom of the country, he learned 
a useful mechanical trade (Acts xviii. 3), and was sent in 
early life to Jerusalem (Acts xxvi. 4, 5), where he was 
educated under the immediate instruction of Gamaliel, a 
distinguished Jewish Rabbi, where he became master of 
the written law of Moses, and " profited in the Jews' 
religion above many of his equals in his own nation, 
being exceeding more zealous in the traditions of the 
fathers" (Gal. i. 13, 14). 

He declared himself to be " zealous toward God" 
(Acts xxii. 3), and exhibited a fiery zeal, bordering on 
madness, by his cruel persecutions even unto death 
(Acts xxii. 4) of all who dared worship the God of the 
Hebrews, contrary to the customs and traditions of the 
fathers. He is first introduced to our notice as a young 
man named Saul, who was present at the martyrdom of 
Stephen, and consenting to his death (Acts vii. 57, 58, 
viii. 1) — an act for which we afterwards find him con- 
demning himself (Acts xxii. 20). Immediately after, we 
find him in the councils of the chief priests, and sharing 
their confidence. To him they intrust the responsibility 
of executing their designs towards the followers of Jesus 
(Acts xxvi. 10, 12). 

While executing his cruel commission, and in his ig- 
norance endeavoring to injure the cause of Christ, the 
great author of Christianity was about to make him a 
distinguished trophy of its power, and one of the most 
devoted and successful of its advocates. While on his 
way to Damascus, on an errand of persecution, he was 
suddenly arrested by a miraculous vision of Christ, who, 
addressing him from heaven, demanded the reason of 
his furious zeal, in these remarkable words : " Saul, 
Saul, why persecutest thou me ? " (For a full account of 
the conversion of Paul, and his labors and persecutions 
for the next three years, see Acts ix.). Being sought 
by Barnabas, he is found at Tarsus, and accompanies 
him to Antioch, from whence they are both sent to Jeru- 
salem to carry alms (Acts xi. 25-30). 

The firs't missionary journey of Paul and Barnabas 
from Antioch continued about two years (Acts xiii., xiv.), 
commencing about A. D. 45, nine years after the con- 
version of Paul. t They return to Antioch, where they 
spend several years (Acts xiv. 28), when they are sent a 



PAUL. 87 

second time to Jerusalem, to consult the disciples re- 
specting circumcision (Acts xv. 2). Paul, on his second 
missionary tour (Acts xv. 40), after passing through 
Asia Minor to Europe, finds Aquila and Priscilla at 
Corinth (Acts xviii. 2). Here he remains eighteen 
months (Acts xviii. 11), when he departs for Jerusalem 
the fourth time, and then goes to Antioch (Acts xviii. 
22). He winters at Nicopolis (Titus iii. 12), and then 
goes to Ephesus (Acts xix. 1), where he remains two 
years or more, and then departs for Macedonia (Acts 
xx. 1). After wintering in Achaia, Paul goes the fifth 
time to Jerusalem, where he is imprisoned (Acts xx., 
xxi.). He is sent to Csesarea, where he remains a pris- 
oner for two years. 

Being brought before Porcius Festus for trial, he per- 
ceived that Festus showed a strong disposition to favor 
the Jews, and he felt himself constrained to appeal to 
Caesar. 

He is accordingly sent to Rome as a prisoner, where 
he arrives the following spring, having spent the winter 
in Malta (Acts xxiv. 27, xxv.-xxviii.). St. Luke has 
not continued the history of St. Paul beyond his first im- 
prisonment at Rome ; consequently we have no authen- 
tic information of his travels and labors after his release 
from prison to the time of his martyrdom, nor is it 
known by what means he was delivered from prison. 
Calmet conjectures, with some probability, that the Jews 
durst not prosecute him before the emperor. 

From intimations contained in some of St. Paul's 
Epistles, it has been conjectured, that, being released 
from his first imprisonment, he left Italy and sailed for 
Judea, accompanied by Timothy and Titus ; that he 
left Titus at Crete, and thence proceeded with Timothy 
into Judea, and visited the churches to which he had 
recently sent the Epistle which is now ascribed to the 
Hebrews. Having visited the churches in Asia Minor, 
lje leaves Timothy at Ephesus, and proceeds to Macedo- 
nia. After visiting the churches in Greece,, and prob- 
ably in Corinth, he spends the winter in Epirus, and 
then returns to Crete, and, as Michaelis supposes, visits 
Corinth the third time ; from whence -he goes to Rome, 
where he is imprisoned the second time. Dr. Macknight 
thinks he remained in prison a year or more, before 
being put to death. (See Observations on the Sec- 
ond Epistle to Timothy, pp. 41 and 42 of this book). 
According to a primitive tradition, St. Paul was be- 



88 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

headed, A. D. 66 or G7, three miles from Rome, at Aquae 
Salvias, and buried in Via Ostensis, two miles from the 
city, where Constantino the Great afterwards erected a 
church to his memory. " But," says Dr. Hales, " his 
noblest monument subsists in his immortal writings ; 
which, the more they are studied, and the better they 
are understood, the more they will be admired to the 
latest posterity for the most sublime and beautiful, the 
most pathetic and impressive, the most learned and pro- 
found specimens of Christian piety, oratory, and phi- 
losophy." Dr. Paley pays a just tribute to the great 
Apostle to the Gentiles, in the following brief summary 
of his labors and trials : — 

" We see him, in the prosecution of his purpose, 
travelling from country to country, enduring every spe- 
cies of hardship, encountering every extremity of dan- 
ger, assaulted by the populace, punished by the magis- 
trates, scourged, beaten, stoned, left for dead; expect- 
ing, wherever he came, a renewal of the same treatment 
and the same dangers ; yet, when driven from one city, 
preaching in the next, spending his whole time in the 
employment, sacrificing to it his pleasures, his ease, his 
safety; persisting in this course to old age (through 
more than thirty years) ; unaltered by the experience of 
perverseness, ingratitude, prejudice, desertion; unsub- 
dued by anxiety, want, labor, persecutions; unwearied 
by long confinement, undismayed by the prospect of 
death." 



TABLE OF PAUL S JOURNEYS. 



89 



TABLE 

OF ST. PAUL'S APOSTOLIC JOURNEYS. 



Various opinions are entertained as to the precise number of 
journeys performed by the Apostle to the Gentiles. The accom- 
panying- table, which we copy from Wilbur's Reference Bible, 
may, however, enable the student better to trace the extended 
missions which this great missionary performed in the short 
space of thirty years. See the following Map, showing the jour- 
neyings of St. Paul. 



First 


Second 


Third 


Fourth 


Fifth 


Journey. 


Journey. 


Journey. 


Journey. 


Journey. 


Antioch in 


Rest of Syria, 


Galatia, 


Antipairis, 


Colosse. 


Syria, 


Cilicia, 


Phrygia, 


Cesarea, 


Philippi. 


Seleucia. 


Derbe. 


Ephesus, 


Sidon, 


2sicopo!is, 


Salamis, 


Lystra, 


Troas, 


Myra, 


Epirus, 


Paphos, 


Iconium, 


Macedonia, 


Near Salmo 


Corinth, 


Perga in 


Phrygia, 


Greece, . 


ne, 


Troas, 


Pamphylin, 


Galafia, 


Corinth, 


Fair Havens, 


Miletuinin 


Antioch in 


Troas, 


Macedonia , 


Melite Isl'd, 


Crete. 


Pisidia, 


Samothracia, 


Philippi, 


Syracuse, 


Rome. 


Iconium, 


Xeapolis, 


Troas, 


Rhegium, 




Lystra, 


Philippi, 


Assos, 


Puteoli, 




Derbe, 


Amphipolis, 


Mitylene 


Appii Fo- 




Lystra, 


Apollonia, 


Island, 


rum, 




Iconium, 


Thessalonica, 


Chios Isl'd 


Three Tav- 




Pisidia, 


Berea 


Samos " 


erns, 




Perga, 


Athens, 


Trogy Ilium 


Rome, 




Attalia, 


Corinth, 


Miletus in 


Italy, 




Antioch in 


Cenchrea, 


Asia, 


Spain, only 




Syria, 


Ephesus, 


Coos Isl'd, 


intended, 




Phenicia, 


Cesarea, 


Rhodes ' ; 


Crete, 




Samaria, 


Jerusalem, 


Patara in 


Jerusalem, 




Jerusalem. 


Antioch in 


Lycia, 


Antioch in 




Antioch in 


Syria. 


Tyre, 


Syria. 




Syria. 




Ptolemais, 

Cesarea, 

Jerusalem. 







GEOGEAPHICAL DESCRIPTION 



OF THE PRINCIPAL PLACES MENTIONED IN 
THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



Abile'ne (Luke iii. 1). The tetrarchy of Lysanias, 
of which Abila was the capital. 

Its precise limits and extent remain unknown. It 
must have extended northward beyond the Upper Bar- 
rada to have included Abila; and it is probable its south- 
ern border extended to Mount Hermon. 

Acel'dama (field of blood). A field lying without the 
south wall of Jerusalem, purchased with the money for 
which Judas betrayed Christ, and which was appropriated 
as a place for the burial of strangers (Matt, xxvii. 8 ; Acts 
i. 19). Dr. Robinson says the field or plat is not now 
marked by any boundary to distinguish it from the rest 
of the hill-side ; and the former charnel-house, said to 
have been erected by the Armenians in the seventeenth 
century, now in ruins, is all that remains to point out 
the site. 

Acha'ia (proper) was a province in the south of 
Greece, of which Corinth was the capital, running west- 
ward along the Bay of Corinth, but by the poets is often 
put for the whole of Greece. Under the Romans, Greece 
was divided into two provinces, Macedonia and Achaia, 
the former of which included Macedonia proper, with 
lllyricum, Epirus, and Thessaly, and the latter, all that 
lay south of the former. It is in this latter acceptation that 
the word Achaia is always used in the New Testament. 
(Acts xviii. 12, xxvii. 19, 21 ; Rom. xv. 26. xvi. 5 ; 1 Cor. 
xvi. 15; 2 Cor. i. 1, ix. 2, xi 10 ; 1 Thess'. i. 7, 8). 

Adramyt'tium. A maritime city of Mysia, in Asia Mi- 
nor, opposite the Isle of Lesbos, and an Athenian colony. 
It is mentioned in Scripture only from the fact that the 
ship in which St. Paul embarked at Caesarea as a prisoner, 

91 



92 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

on his way to Italy, belonged to Adramyttium (Acts xxvii. 
2). It was rare to find a vessel going direct from Palestine 
to Italy. It is built on a hill, and is said to contain about 
one thousand houses, and is still a place of some com- 
merce. 

A'dria. A city of Italy, which gives its name to the 
Gulf of Venice, or Adriatic Sea. It was formerly given 
to the whole of the Mediterranean (Acts xxvii. 27). 

Alexandria, or Scanderia. Once a magnificent, rich, 
and celebrated city of Egypt, was built by Alexander the 
Great, under the superintendence of Dinocrates, — the 
same architect who had rebuilt the temple of Diana at 
Ephesus, — near the most westerly branch of the Nile, 
soon after the overthrow of Tyre, about 332 B. C. It 
was made the capital of the kingdom under the Ptolemies. 
Alexandria is famous, among other things, for the exten- 
sive library which the pride or learning of the Ptolemies 
had collected there, at a vast expense, from all parts of 
the world. 

Alexandria was conquered by Julius Caesar, 47 B. C, 
and this library of the Ptolemies, containing four hundred 
thousand valuable works in manuscript, burned. Alexan- 
dria was conquered again by the Saracens, A. D. G42, and 
a second library, said to contain seven hundred thousand 
volumes, destroyed by order of the Caliph Omar; and 
during six months the numerous volumes supplied fuel 
for the four thousand baths which contributed so much to 
the health and convenience of the populous capital «of 
Egypt. 

Ancient Alexandria was at one time the centre of scien- 
tific knowledge, and to have studied there was a sufficient 
recommendation to distant countries. The astronomi- 
cal school founded there by Philadelphus maintained its 
superior reputation ten centuries, until the time of the 
Saracens. 

Historians tell us that at one time the city contained a 
free population of three hundred thousand, and an equal 
number of slaves. It was Jews from this city that per- 
secuted Stephen (Acts vi. 9). Apollos was a native of it 
(Acts xviii. 24). In a ship belonging to it, Paul sailed for 
Rome (Acts xxvii. 6). From the time of the apostles to 
the Saracen invasion, Alexandria was under the domin- 
ion of Rome, and afforded an extensive market for grain ; 
hence the ease with which the centurion having Paul in 
charge as a prisoner on his way to Rome, " found a ship 
of Alexandria, laden with corn, sailing into Italy." It 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 93 

will be remembered that the celebrated translation of the 
Hebrew Scriptures into Greek, called the Septuagint ver- 
sion of the Bible, was made by Ptolemy Philadelphia, king 
of Egypt, 277 B. C, for the use of the Jews in Alexandria, 
who knew only the Greek language. 

St. Mark is said to have introduced the Christian reli- 
gion into Alexandria, which early became one of the 
strongholds of the true faith. 

The Jews remained in the enjoyment of their civil 
rights till A. D. 415, when, having incurred the hatred of 
Cyril the patriarch, they were, at his instance, banished 
to the number of forty thousand, and their synagogues 
destroyed. 

Amphip'olis. A city of Greece, through which Paul 
and Silas passed on their way from Philippi to Thessalo- 
nica (Acts xvii. 1). It was originally founded by the 
renowned Athenian general Cimon, about B. C. 500. It 
was situated on the left bank of the River Stiymon, which 
nearly surrounded it, from which it took its name. Am- 
phipolis was a place of much importance, and was an 
object of contest, and the cause of many wars between 
the Athenians and Spartans. It has long been in ruins. 

An'tioch. 1. A city on the banks of the Orontes, 
three hundred miles north of Jerusalem, and about equi- 
distant from Constantinople and Alexandria. It was the 
metropolis of Syria, the residence of the Syrian kings, 
and afterwards became the capital of the Roman provinces 
in Asia. For power and dignity it was but little inferior 
to Alexandria, and was the third great city of all that be- 
longed to the Roman provinces. It was very populous. 
In less than one hundred and fifty years after its erection, 
the Jews slew one hundred thousand persons in it in 
one day. 

In the time of Chrysostom, the population was com- 
puted at two hundred thousand, of whom at least one 
half were professors of Christianity. The Christian faith 
was introduced into Antioch at an early date, and with 
great success (Acts xi. 19-24). 

The name Christian was first applied here to its pro- 
fessors, whether as a term of reproach or a mere distinc- 
tive title is not known (Acts xi. 26).- The First Apos- 
tolic Council or convention was held here (Acts xv). It 
was the scene of the early labors of St. Paul, and from 
here he set forth on his first missionary labors (Acts xi. 
2G, xiii. 2). It was here where both Luke and Theophilus 
were born and dwelt. The calamities which have be- 



94 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

fallen Antioch are probably without a parallel, both in 
respect to number and severity. 

It has been besieged and plundered not less than fifteen 
times ; three times it has been visited with famine, twice 
with fire, and once with plague. It has frequently been 
brought to the verge of utter ruin by earthquakes ; and 
by that of A. D. 526, not less than two hundred and fifty 
thousand persons were destroyed, many of whom were 
strangers attending the festival of the ascension. 

In A. 1). 12G8 Antioch was occupied by Boadocbar, 
sultan of Egypt and Syria; seventeen thousand persons 
were slaughtered, and one hundred thousand sent into 
captivity. About the middle of the fifteenth century, 
the three patriarchs of Alexandria, xVntioch, and Jerusa- 
lem convoked a synod, and renounced all connection 
with the Latin church. 

The inhabitants are said to have amounted to about 
twenty thousand in 1822, when an earthquake destroyed 
about one fourth of them. The line of the ancient wall 
may be easily traced, and the present town occupies 
scarcely one third of the area originally enclosed. 

An'tiocii. 2. In (or near) Pisidia, in Asia Minor, 
was the capital of that province. Paul and Barnabas 
preached there (Acts xiii. 14), and we have a fuller 
abstract of one of Paul's sermons at this place than of 
any other of the apostolic discourses. A violent persecu- 
tion was raised against them by the Jews, and they were 
obliged to leave the place, which they did in strict accord- 
ance with their Lord's injunction (Acts xiii. 50, 51, com- 
pared with Matt. x. 14; Luke ix. 5). There were at 
least sixteen cities of the name of Antioch in Syria 
and Asia Minor. 

Axtip'atris. A city on the road from Jerusalem to 
( a-area, and about seventeen miles from Joppa, accord- 
ing to Josephus. It was formerly called Caphar-saba; 
but being rebuilt and beautified by Herod the Great, it 
w r as by him named Antipatris, in honor of his father, 
Antipater. St. Paul was brought from Jerusalem to 
Antipatris by night, on his route to Caesarea (Acts xxiii. 
31). 

Appii Forcm. The forum, or market-place, to which 
pedlers and petty merchants resorted in great numbers, 
built by Appius Claudius, the consul. It was about fifty 
miles south of Rome, on the great road from Rome to 
Brundusium. The name is derived from the cireuiu- 
stance that it is situated on the " Appian Way." Thus 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 95 

far the Christians of Rome came to meet Paul (Acts 
xxviii. 15). 

Ara'bia. An extensive country of Asia, reaching from 
the Euphrates to Egypt, and from the Red Sea to the 
Persian Gulf (Gal. i. 17). It is usually divided into 
three parts. 1. Arabia Deserta (or desert), lying nearly 
to the east of Judea, and whose inhabitants dwelt in 
tents. This was the country of the Ishmaelites, and is 
inhabited by the modern Bedouins, who lead a wandering 
life, having no cities, houses, or fixed habitation, but 
wholly dwelling in tents. 2. Arabia Petrcea (or the 
rocky), lies to the south of the Holy Land. Petra was 
its capital. This part of Arabia must ever remain mem- 
orable as the scene of the journeying of the children of 
Israel from Egypt to the promised land. 3. Arabia 
Felix (or the happy), so called from its fertility, lies be- 
tween the Red Sea on the west and the Persian Gulf on 
the east. It is thought the Queen of Sheba, who visited 
Solomon (1 Kings x. 1), was queen of part of Arabia 
Felix. This was the cradle of Mohammedan supersti- 
tion, containing Mecca, the birthplace of Mohammed, 
the prophet, from whence he fled in his fifty-third year 
(July 1(3, A. D. 622) to Medina, also in Arabia Felix, 
where he died and was buried ten years after. This 
formed the first year of the famous Hegira. 

The ancient Arabs were idolaters ; they worshipped a 
stone. The Black Stone which has the repute of having 
been from time immemorial the object of their worship is 
still seen in the Caaba of Mecca. They say this stone was 
originally white, but wept itself black on account of the 
sins of the people. Strabo fells us that they adored but 
two gods, Bacchus and Jupiter; which Alexander the 
Great being informed of, he resolved to subdue them, that 
he might oblige them to worship him as their third deity. 

Arabs are mentioned among the strangers assembled 
at Jerusalem at the Pentecost (Acts ii. 11). The mod- 
ern Arabs are the descendants of IshmaeL a supersti- 
tious, vindictive race, given to robbery, but which they 
justify, because Abraham the father of Ishmael gave 
all that he had unto Isaac (Gen. xxv. 5, 6). Since the 
promulgation of the gospel, many of the Arabs have 
embraced Christianity, but by far the greater portion of 
them continue to this dky to profess the faith of Mo- 
hammed. 

Aueop'agus (the Hill of Mars). A place at Athens 
where the magistrates held their supreme council. This 



96 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

tribunal is said to have been instituted at Athens by Ce- 
crops, the founder of that city. It took cognizance of 
matters of religion, the consecration of new gods, erec- 
tion of temples and altars, and the introduction of new 
ceremonies into divine worship. On this account St. 
Paul was brought before the tribunal of the Areopagus 
as a ; * setter forth of strange gods," because he preached 
unto the Athenians Jesus and the resurrection (Acts 
xvii. 19). 

It is said the sittings of the Areopagus were held only 
in the night, that the judges might not be distracted or 
biassed by extraneous objects. 

Arimatue'a. A small town to which the wealthy Jo- 
seph belonged, who begged the body of our Lord from 
Pilate, after the crucifixion, and placed it in his own new 
sepulchre (Matt, xxvii. 57). It is situated about thirty-six 
miles north-west of Jerusalem, on the road to Joppa. 
The Arimathea of Joseph is usually regarded as the 
Romathaim of Samuel. Hence it has, by some, been 
identified with the existing Raraleh. Some writers sup- 
pose this to be the Roma, situated about six miles north- 
west of Jerusalem. 

Armaged'don. The Hebrew name given to the place 
where the Popish and Mohammedan troops shall be de- 
stroyed under the Sixth Vial. Its name alludes to Me- 
giddo, where Barak, with ten thousand troops, slew the 
mighty hosts of the Canaanites, and has been interpreted 
the destruction of troops. Whether it shall be in Judea 
or in Italy, or perhaps rather in both at the same time, 
cannot now be determined (Hev. xvi. 1G, xvii. 13, 14). 

A'sia (Acts ii. 9) was not known to the ancients as one 
of the four grand divisions of the earth. It is not men- 
tioned in the Old Testament. In the New Testament it 
is taken for the peninsula on the western or south-west- 
ern side of the continent of Asia, or Asia Minor, and in- 
cludes the proconsular Asia, which comprised the four 
regions, Phrygia, Mysia, Caria, and Lydia. In this pro- 
consular Asia were the seven churches (Rev. ii.). 

Ath'ens. A celebrated city of Greece, the capital of 
Attica, and the seat of learning, science, and the arts. It 
was for some time a very powerful commonwealth. 
After the twenty-eight years of misfortune and bloodshed, 
caused by the Peloponnesian war, Athens was almost 
totally ruined on the 24th of April, B. C. 404, by Lysan- 
der. After this war, Athens never recovered the politi- 
cal place which she previously held, but that she rose so 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 97 

high towards it, was truly wonderful. St. Paul, coming 
hither in about A. D. 52 or 53, found the people given to 
idolatry and idleness (Acts xvii.). The great apostle of 
the Gentiles, taking opportunities here to preaeh Jesus 
Christ, was carried before the judges or the tribunal 
called the Areopagus, where he gave an illustrious testi- 
mony to truth, and a remarkable instance of powerful 
reasoning. (See " Areopagus.") 

Azo'tus, or Ash'dod. A city of Judea, situated fifteen 
or twenty miles north of Gaza, in a pleasant plain. Here 
the ark of Jehovah triumphed over the Philistine idol 
Dagon (1 Sam. v. 2), and Philip, the evangelist, was 
found after he had baptized the Ethiopian eunuch (Acts 
viii. 40). 

Ashdod exists at present as an inconsiderable village. 
The site is marked by ancient ruins; there is also what 
has the appearance of a very ancient khan, the principal 
chamber of which had obviously, at some former period, 
been used as a Christian chapel. The place is still called 
Esdud. 

Bab'ylon. A celebrated city, the capital of the Assyrian 
empire, on the banks of the Euphrates. It is sup- 
posed to have begun to be built at the same time as the 
tower of Babel, and both were left unfinished at the con- 
fusion of tongues (Gen. xi. 4-8). Although small at 
first, Babylon was afterwards enlarged and improved by 
Belus, Semiramis, Nebuchadnezzar, and his queen, 
whom Herodotus calls Nitocris, until it became the 
wonder of the world. (For a full account of Babylon, in 
its greatness, before the Christian era, see Bible Dic- 
tionary, or Home's Introduction to the Bible, vol. iii. 
pp. 517, 518. ) It is several times mentioned in the New 
Testament, as Matt. i. 11, 17; Acts vii. 43; 1 Peter v. 13. 
As Babylon of old was the chief of all idolatrous cities, 
she is taken as a fit emblem of the enormous guilt and 
extensive influence of the idolatrous and papal Rome, 
whose destruction is predicted in Rev. xiv. 8, xvi. 19, 
xvii. 5, xviii. 1, 10, 20. 

Bere'a. A city of Macedonia, about twenty miles west * 
of Thessalonica, near Mount Pindus. Paul and Silas 
withdrew to this place from Thessalonica, where they 
preached the gospel with great success (Acts xvii. 
10-14). 

Bethab'ara. The name of a town on the east bank of 
the Jordan, where there was a ford ; hence the name 
(house of passage). It is mentioned in John i. 28 as the 
7 



98 SEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

place where John baptized. It is probable that the Israel- 
ites crossed the Jordan at this place, under the conduct 
of Joshua. More recent and probably reliable manu- 
scripts give the name Bethany, and give tue location 
much farther north, east ot the Jordan, and about twen- 
ty-live or thirty miles south of the Sea of Galilee, where 
John baptized. 

Bkth'any. A town of Judea, on Mount Olivet, where 
Lazarus dwelt, and where he was raised from the dead, 
about fifteen furlongs from Jerusalem, on the way to 
Jericho (John xi. IS). " At present," says Dr. Robin- 
son, " Bethany is a small and poor village, and the cul- 
tivation round it much neglected. But it is a shady, ro- 
mantic spot, on the side of the Mount of Olives, abounding 
in trees and long grass." But the tract of ground bear- 
ing that name extended to within eight furlongs of Jeru- 
salem, it being only a Sabbath day's journey from it 
(Luke xxiv. 50; Acts i. 12); then began the tract 
called 

Blth'phage, which ran along so near Jerusalem, that 
the outmost street within the walls was called by that 
name. 

Bethes'da. The Hebrew name of a pool or reservoir 
of water in the city of Jerusalem, built round with porches 
for the accommodation of the sick, who resorted thither 
for the benefit of the medicinal qualities of the water, 
and upon one of whom Christ performed the healing mir- 
acle recorded in John v. 2-10. 

Beth'lkhem (house of bread), now called Beit-Lahm, 
was a celebrated city about six miles south-west of Jeru- 
salem ; called also Bethlehem Ephrath (the fruitful), or 
Ephrata (Gen. xxxv. l'J. xlviii. 7). It was so inconsid- 
erable a place as to be omitted in the general list of the 
cities of Judah (Josh. xv. ; Neh. xi. : see also Micah v. 2). 
It was a city, however, in the time of Boaz (Ruth iii. 11, 
iv. 1), and was fortified by Kelioboam (2 Cliron. xi. b). 
It is called Bethlehem of Judea to distinguish it from 
another Bethlehem, situated in Lower Galilee, in the 
tribe of Zebulon, and mentioned in Josh. xix. 15. Beth- 
lehem is chiefly celebrated as the birthplace of David 
(hence it is called the city of David) and of the Messiah 
(Luke ii. 4-15; Matt. ii. 6). 

There never has been any doubt as to the site of Beth- 
lehem, which has always been an inhabited place, and its 
sacred associations have caused it to be visited by an 
unbroken series of pilgrims and travellers. It is pleas- 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 99 

antly situated on the brow of a hill, in a very fertile 
soil, and consists of one broad and principal street. The 
houses are built principally of clay and bricks, and 
nearly every house is provided with an apiary, with bee- 
hives constructed of a scries of earthen pots, ranged 
on the house-tops. 

The population is said to number about fifteen hun- 
dred, mostly Christians, the rest Mohammedons. About 
two miles from Bethlehem, towards Jerusalem, is the 
tomb of Rachel. 

On the north-eastern side of it is a deep valley, 
which is said to be the place where the angels appeared 
to the shepherds of Judea, with the glad tidings of the 
Saviour's birth fXuke ii. 8). In the same valley is a 
fountain of delicious water, said, with some probability, 
to be that for which David longed, and which three 
of his mighty men procured for him at the hazard of 
their lives (2 Sam. xxiii. 15-18). About two hundred 
paces east of Bethlehem, the place is pointed out where 
it is supposed our Saviour was born. Not much reli- 
ance is, however, to be placed in these traditions. 

Bethsai'da (fishing town). 1. A town in Galilee, on 
the western side of the Sea of Tiberias, towards the 
middle and not far from Capernaum (John i. 44; Mark 
vi. 45, viii. 22; John xii. 21). It was the native place 
and residence of Philip, Andrew, and Peter (John i. 
44), and the frequent residence of Jesus. Its site is 
unknown, and the very name has long eluded the 
search of travellers. 

Bethsaida. 2. From Luke ix.10, and parallel pas- 
sages (Matt. xiv. 13; Mark vi. 32-45), it would seem 
that the feeding of five thousand i% near to a city called 
Bethsaida," could not have taken place in Galilee, but 
on the eastern side of the lake. It was originally only 
a village, but was enlarged and beautified by Philip the 
tetrarch, not long after the birth of Christ, and by him 
named Julias, in honor of Julia, the emperor's daughter. 

Bithyn'ia. A province in Asia Minor, on the Euxine 
Sea and the Propontis, bounded on the west by Mysia, 
on the south and east by Phrygia and Galatia. It is 
directly opposite Constantinople. 

It is probable that the gospel was introduced into this 
province at an early period, as the apostle Peter ad- 
dressed his First Epistle to the Christian congregations 
there (1 Pet. i. 1). The apostle Paul was once in- 



100 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

clinecl to go into Bithynia with Silas and Timothy, but 
the Spirit suffered him not (Acts xvi. 7). 

C^esarea, of Palestine, was so called to distinguish it 
from the other Csesarea, from its eminence, as the Roman 
metropolis of Palestine, and the residence of the proc- 
urator. 

It was formerly named the Tower of Strato. Its har- 
bor being extremely incommodious, Herod the Great 
erected one of the most stupendous works of antiquity (a 
spacious mole), and greatly enlarged ami beautified the 
city, which he denominated Caesarea in honor of Augus- 
tus Caesar, the emperor, his great patron, 22 B. C. 

This place is situated about fifty-five miles north-west 
of Jerusalem, and is called, by way of eminence, Caesa- 
rea. Herod added many splendid buildings to the city, 
and when the whole was completed, twelve years alter 
he commenced the undertaking, he fixed his residence 
there, thus elevating the city to the rank of the civil and 
military capital of Judea, which rank it enjoyed as long 
as the country remained a province of the Roman em- 
pire. 

Vespasian raised Caesarea to the rank of a Roman col- 
ony, granting it exemption from the capitation tax, and 
afterwards from the ground taxes. 

The place was inhabited chiefly by Gentiles, although 
some thousands of Jews lived in it. Caesarea is fre- 
quently mentioned in the New Testament. Here Corne- 
lius and his kinsmen were converted by the preaching of 
Peter, being the hrst fruits of the Gentiles (Acts x.) ; 
here lived Philip the evangelist (Acts xxi. 8) ; here St. 
Paul was imprisoned for two years, and so admirably 
defended himself before Festus and King Agrippa (Acts 
xxi v.). 

It was here, also, in the Amphitheatre built by his 
father, that Herod Agrippa ^was smitten of God and died 
(Acts xii. 21-23). Cassarea retains nothing of its former 
greatness. At present the whole of the surrounding 
country, on the land side, is a sandy desert. Its ruins, 
which are very considerable, have long been resorted to 
as a quarry, when building materials were required at 
Acre. 

The place is seldom visited by travellers in Palestine, 
although the small vessels of the country put in here to 
take in their supplies. The present tenants of the ruins 
are said to be Snakes, scorpions, lizards, wild boars, and. 
jackals. 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 101 

CLksare'a Philip'pi (formerly called Paneas). At the 
foot of Mount Paneas, near the springs of Jordan. It 
was first called Lais, or Lechem (Judges xviii. 7), and 
after it was subdued by the Danites (ver. 29) it received 
the appellation of Dan (Judges xviii. 29). It lay about 
one hundred and twenty miles north from Jerusalem, a 
day's journey from Sidon, a day and a half from Damas- 
cus (Matt, xvi 13). 

Philip the tetrarch embellished and enlarged it, and 
called it Oaesarea in honor of Caesar, with his own name 
subjoined. In compliment to the Emperor Nero, its mime 
was afterwards changed to Neronias. The woman who 
was troubled with an issue of blood, and healed by our 
Saviour (Matt. ix. 20), is said to have been of Caesarea 
Philippi. The place has now dwindled into a paltry and 
insignificant village. 

Calvary, the same as Golgotha, is supposed to have 
been a hill just outside the walls of Jerusalem. St. Paul 
delicately alludes, in his Epistle to the Hebrews (xiii. 
12, 13), to this, and says that Christ, as a sacrifice for 
sin, suffered without the gate ; subjoining, kt Let us, 
therefore, go forth to him without the camp (or the city) 
bearing his reproach." Golgotha signifies the place of a 
skull, and is so called by some from its fancied resem- 
blance, in shape, to a skull ; by others, — and which seems 
more probable, — either because criminals were executed 
there, or perhaps because this place contained sepulchral 
caverns for the dead. 

Ca'na. A small town of Galilee, situated on a gentle 
eminence to the west of Capernaum. The ruler of Ca- 
pernaum, whose child was dangerously ill, besought 
Jesus to come down and heal his son (John iv. 40-51) ; 
thus the writings of the evangelist correspond with the 
geography and present appearance of the country. About 
a quarter of a mile from the village (for such it now is), 
on the road from Nazareth, is a well of delicious water 
by the road-side, whence all the water is taken for the 
supply of the inhabitants. 

This well is supplied by springs from the mountains, 
some two miles distant; and here it is usual for the pil- 
grims to halt, as being the source of the water, which our 
Saviour, by his first miracle, converted into wine (John 
ii. 11). In consequence of this miracle, both the Chris- 
tian and Turkish inhabitants of Cana cherish the singu- 
lar notion that, by drinking copiously of this water, in- 
toxication is produced. This Cana is not mentioned in 



102 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

the Old Testament, but is called Cana of Galilee to dis- 
tinguish it from Cana or Kana (Josh. xix. 28), which 
belonged to the tribe of As her, and was situated in the 
vicinity of Sidon. 

Ca'maax, Land of, previous to its occupation by the 
Israelites, was possessed by the descendants of Canaan, 
the youngest son of Ham, and grandson of Noah, who 
divided the country anions his eleven sons, each of whom 
was the head of a numerous tribe or clan (Gen. x. 
15-19). Here they resided for more than seven centu- 
ries, and founded numerous republics and kingdoms. 

In its more contracted sense, as divided by Joshua, 
( anaan is calculated to have been not above one hun- 
dred and sixty miles long by fifty broad, but in its more 
enlarged sense it extended south to the desert of Kadoh, 
north to Lebanon, east to the Euphrates, ami west to the 
Mediterranean (Gen. xv. 18: Deut. xi. 24; Acts vii. 11, 
xiii. 10). 

Caper'naum. A city on the north-western side of the 
Lake Gcnnesoretll, on the borders of the tract occupied 
by the tribes ofZebulon and NcphthaJim. This place is 
Celebrated for being the residence of Christ after he com- 
menced his great mission, and the many mighty works 
he performed here; but the infidelity and impenitence 
of the inhabitants of the place, after the evidence given 
them by the Saviour himself of Ins divine mission, 
brought Upon them the heavy denunciation recorded in 
Matt. xi. LV>. And this denunciation has been SO Com- 
pletely fulfilled that even the site of Capernaum is quire 
uncertain. 

In the vicinity of this city our Lord delivered his ad- 
mirable sermon; and near it, also, was the custom-house 
at which Matthew the publican was sitting when Jesus 
called him to the apostleship (Matt. ix. 1. \)). Here the 
Jews bad a Synagogue (Mark i. 23; Luke iv. 88); as the 
Christians afterwards had a church. 

Mr. Buckingham found rarious remains of some an- 
cient settlement in its vicinity, and describes the appear- 
ance of the Lake of Gennesareth from Capernaum as sin- 
gularly grand and impressive. 

Cappado'cia. An ancient province of Asia Minor; 
hounded on the north by Pontus, on the east by the Eu- 
phrates and Armenia Minor, on the south by Mount 
Taurus (beyond which are Cilicia and Syria), and on the 
west by Phrygia and Galatia. The country is moun- 
tainous, and abounds in water, and was celebrated for its 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 103 

production of wheat, its fine pastures, ami for mules and 

hursefi, of which it gave yearly to the Persians about 
two thousand of each. The Cappadoeians were notori- 
ous for their dullness and vice, and are said to have been 
so servile that when the liomans offered them their free- 
dom to live by their own laws, they said they could not 
endure liberty. Christianity was very early propagated 
in Cappadocia, for St. Peter mentions it in addressing 
the Christian churches in Asia Minor (1 Pet. i. 1). Cap- 
padoeians were present at Jerusalem on the day of Pen- 
tecost (Acts ii. 9). 

Ce'drox. See ;> Kidron." 

Cenchre'a. One of the seaports belonging to Corinth, 
whence Paul sailed for Ephesus (Acts xviii. 18). It is 
situated on the eastern side of the isthmus, about ten 
miles from the city of Corinth. The other port, on the 
western side of the isthmus, was called Lechieum. 

Ciiix'xereth, Lake of. The same as " Gennesareth," 
which see. 

Chi'os (Acts xx. 15). One of the principal islands of 
the iEgean Sea, between Lesbos and Samos, celebrated 
in ancient and modern times for its wine, iigs, marble, 
and white earth. The island is abt-mt thirty miles long 
from north to south, and its greatest breadth about tea 
miles. 

The principal town was also called Chios, and had the 
advantage of a good harbor. The island is now called 
by the Greeks Kliio, and by the Italians Seio. It was 
taken by the Turks from the Greeks in 1822. and the 
wholesale massacre and enslavement of the inhabitants 
by the Turks forms one of the most shocking incidents 
of the Greek war. 

Chora'zin. A small town situated on the western 
coast of the Sea of Galilee, at no great distance from 
Capernaum. It was one of those places in which our 
Saviour performed many of his mighty works, and whose 
inhabitants he upbraided for their infidelity (Matt. xi. 
21 ; Luke x. 13). Jerome makes it about two miles 
from Capernaum : but no place of the name has been 
historically mentioned since his days, and not only the 
town, but the very name, seems to have long since per- 
ished. 

Cili'cia. A country of Asia Minor, between Pam- 
phvlia on the west and Pieria on the east, the Mount 
Taurus on the north and the Ciiician Sea on the south; 
celebrated on account of Cicero, proconsul there, but 



104 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

more on account of St. Paul's birth at Tarsus, a city 
of Cilicia (Acts xxi. 39). Many Jews wore settled in 
Cilicia (Acts vi. 9). 

Clau'da. A small island near Crete, situated near 
the southern and western sea. It is mentioned in xYcts 
xxvii. 16, as is also 

Cki'dus (xxvii. 7), which was a city and promontory 
of Paria, memorable for the worship of Venus. 

Colos'sae, or CoLAs'&aa, was a city of Phrygia, in 
Asia Minor, situated near the conflux of the Lye us 
and the Meander, and near the towns of Laodicea, 
Apamea, and Hierapolis (Col. ii. 1). A Christian 
church was formed here very early, probably by 
Kpaphras (Col. iv. 13, 15), consisting of Jews and 
Gentiles, to whom Paul, who does not appear to have 
ever visited Colossie in person (Col. ii. 1), addressed 
an Epistle from Home. 

According to Eusebius, this city, with Laodicea and 
Hierapolis. was destroyed by an earthquake in the 
tenth year of the reign of Nero, not long after the 
writing of St. Paul's Epistle to the Colossians ; but the 
town must have been immediately rebuilt, for in the 
twelfth year of Nero it is named as a nourishing place. 

Co'os. A fertile island in the JEgean or Jearian Sea, 
near Myndos and Cnidus, which had a city of the same 
name, from which Hippocrates, the celebrated physician, 
and Apelles, the famous painter, were called Coi. It 
was celebrated for its wine, silks, and cotton of a beau- 
tiful texture. Here were made those Coce vestes, which 
were transparent, and are so often mentioned by the 
classic poets. Here also, was a large temple of iEscu- 
lapius, and another of Juno. It is mentioned in Acts 
xxi. 1. 

Coit'iNTii, the metropolis of Achaia proper, and the 
ornament of Greece, was situated on an isthmus between 
the yEgean and Ionian Seas. A lofty rock rises above it. on 
which was the citadel, or the Acrocorinthus. Its earliest 
name, as given by Homer, is Ephyre. When the Achae- 
an League was rallying the chief powers of Southern 
Greece, Corinth was its military centre. As the spirit 
of freedom was active in that confederacy, they were 
certain, sooner or later, to give the Eomans a i>n?tence 
for attacking them. The fatal blow fell on Corinth 
(L>. C. 1*G) when L. Mummius (or Memmius), by or- 
der of the Roman Senate, barbarously destroyed that 
beautiful city, eminent, even in Greece, for painting, 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 105 

sculpture, and all working in metal and pottery. The 
territory was given over to the Siconians, and we must 
infer that the whole population was sold into slavery. 

The Corinth of which we read in the New Testament 
was quite a new city, having been rebuilt and established 
as a Roman colony by the dictator Julius Caesar, about 
one hundred years after the destruction of the Achaean 
League, and made the residence of the proconsul of 
Achaia not long before the assassination of Csesar. Fa- 
vored by its situation between two seas, the new city 
soon regained its ancient splendor; commerce produced 
an influx of riches, and the luxury and voluptuousness 
which followed in consequence corrupted the manners 
of its inhabitants, who became infamous to a proverb. 
In earlier times Corinth had been celebrated for the 
great wealth of its Temple of Venus, which had a gain- 
ful traffic of a most disreputable kind with its numerous 
merchants resident there ; and the same phenomena, no 
doubt, reappeared in the later Christian age. In the vi- 
cinity of this city were celebrated the Isthmian games, 
to which St. Paul alludes in different parts of his Epis- 
tles. Corinth also possessed numerous schools, in which 
philosophy and rhetoric were taught by able masters, 
and strangers resorted thither from all quarters to be 
instructed in the sciences. The number of Sophists, in 
particular, was very great. 

The knowledge of these circumstances affords a key 
to St. Paul's exhortations against fornication, lascivious- 
ness, and covetousness (1 Cor. vi. 9, 10), and also his 
defence of the Christian doctrine against the Sophists, 
to whom the fathers attribute all the strifes and conten- 
tions that sprang up in this church. 

Crete. One of the largest islands in the Mediterra- 
nean, now called Candia, and by the Turks, Kirid. It 
is situated at the entrance of the Archipelago, south- 
west of Asia Minor. It is about one hundred and sixty 
miles long, but of very unequal width, varying from six 
to thirty-five miles. Its in Habitants claimed great an- 
tiquity, and some have supposed the island was original- 
ly peopled from Egypt. This is founded on the conclu- 
sion that Crete was the Caphtor of Deut. ii. 23, and the 
country of the Philistines, which seems very doubtful. 
The island was highly prosperous and full of people in 
very ancient times. It was eminent as having produced 
the legislator Minos, about 1400 B. C, whose institu- 
tions had such important influence in softening the man- 



10G NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

ners of a barbarous age, not only in Crete, but also in 
Greece, where these institutions were introduced. 

The character of the Cretans was of the most unfa- 
vorable description, and fully agrees with the quotation 
which St. Paul produces from " one of their own poets " 
in his Epistle to Titus (i. 12), who had been left, in 
charge of the Christian church in the island. '*The 
Cretans are always liars (eternal liars), evil beasts (lit- 
erally 'brutes'), slow bellies (gorbellies, bellies which 
take long to fill"). Crete derives its strongest scriptural 
interest from the circumstances connected with St. Paul's 
journey to Koine (Acts xxviii.). 

Cl PROS. An island in the Mediterranean, and next 
to Sicily in importance. It is about one hundred and 
forty miles in length, and varies in breadth from fifty to 
five miles. Its numerous havens made it a general ren- 
dezvous for merchants. It abounded in mineral and 
vegetable productions, and it was the boast of the Cypri- 
ans that they could build and complete their ships with- 
out any mil from toreign countries. In 1571 it was taken 
from the republic of Venice by Selim II., and has since 
been under the dominion of the Turks. The majority 
of the inhabitants belong to tire Greek church. It was 
one of the first places out of Palestine in which Chris* 
ti unity was promulgated, though at first to Jews onlv 
(Acts xi. 19). It was visited by Paul and Barnabas on their 
first missionary tour (Acts xiii. 4), and subsequently by 
Barnabas and John Mark (Acts xv. 3D). Paul sailed to 
the south of the island on his journey to Koine (Acts 
xxvii. 4). 

Ctre'ne. The principal city of the province of Libya, 
in Africa, founded in (532 13. C, by a colony of Greeks 
from Thera (Santorini), a small island in the JEgean 
Sea. It was sometimes denominated Cyrenaica, and by 
the evangelist Luke is paraphrastically called " Libya 
about Gyrene" (Acts ii. 10). Simon, whom the Jews 
compelled to bear our Saviour's cross (Matt, xxvii. 82; 
Luke xxiii. 26), was a native of this place. At Cyrene 
resided many Jews, who had a synagogue at Jerusalem. 
Among the Christians scattered abroad in consequence 
of the " persecution that arose about Stephen," Luke 
enumerates those of Cyrene (Acts xi. 20). 

Dalmanu'tha. A city on the western shore of the 
Sea of Galilee (Mark vifi. 10). See '■ Magdala." 

Dalma'tia. A province of Europe, on the east of the 
Adriatic Sea, forming part of lilyricum, and contiguous 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 107 

to Macedonia. Titus was sent into this region by St. 
Paul to spread the knowledge of the gospel (2 Tim. 
iv. 10). 

Damas'cus is claimed by some to be the most ancient 
city in the world, and is called by the Orientals " a pearl 
surrounded by emeralds." Nothing can be more beauti- 
ful than its position; and the view of the city when the 
traveller emerges from Anti-Libanus is of the most en- 
chanting kind. For many miles the city is girdled by 
fertile fields, or gardens, as they are called, presenting 
the appearance of a vast superficies of rich, luxuriant 
foliage. The plain of Damascus owes its fertility and 
loveliness to the River Barrada, which is supposed by 
many to be the Abana or Pharpar of 2 Kings v. 12. Put 
the interior of the city does not correspond with the 
exquisite beauty of its environs. 

In the Armenian quarter, the houses are low, built 
with mud, and the liat, arched doors resemble those of 
stables. There is a fine wide street formed by the pal- 
aces of the agas of Damascus, wiio are the nobility of 
the land. The fronts of the^e palaces, however, towards 
the street, are mere mud walls, like those of a prison or 
hospital, with few or no windows, whilst at intervals is a 
great gate opening on a court. Put the interior is mag- 
nificent, being ornamented in the costliest style of Past- 
ern art. 

Situated on the edge of the desert, at the mouth of the 
plains of Coele-Syria and the valley of Galilee, it was 
needed as a resting-place for the caravans to India, and 
was essentially a commercial town. Two hundred mer- 
chants are said to be settled there. 

Lamartine makes its population about three 1 hundred 
thousand, of whom thirty thousand are Christians. An- 
other estimate, w bich probably approximates closer to the 
true number, makes the population but about one half 
this number, including twelve thousand Christians and 
about the same number of Jews. The proverbial big- 
otry of the Damascenes lias been somewhat mitigated by 
political and social influences, and a better feeling on 
religion prevails among the higher classes, but the lower 
classes are still fanatical. 

Of the origin of Damascus, nothing certain is known. 
It was the residence of Eiiezer, the servant of Abraham, 
and, according to Josephus, was built by Uz, the son of 
Aram, mentioned in Gen. x. 23. How long it retained 
its independence cannot be determined; but it appears 



108 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

(2 Sam. viii. 5, G, and 1 Chron. xix. 4) that its monarch 
having unadvisedly attacked the victorious David, the 
Hebrew sovereign defeated the Syrians, making a great 
slaughter of them, and in his turn subdued Damascus, 
and exacted tribute from its inhabitants. 

In the time of Benhadad, about 940 B. C., Damascus 
was the head of a very powerful empire, since it appears 
(1 Kings xx. 1), that "thirty and two kings " accompa- 
nied him in a campaign which lie undertook against 
Samaria. In the time of the apostle Paul it belonged 
to the dependent kingdom of the Arabian prince Aretas. 
A great era in the history of Damascus is its conquest 
by the Saracens. The war was begun about G3o A. D., 
by the celebrated Abubekr, the successor of Mohammed, 
and ended in the capture of the city and the substitution 
of Islam is ni for Christianity. In 1301 Timour the 
Tartar captured the city, and barbarously treated its in- 
habitants. Damascus is famous, in the first age of Chris- 
tianity, for the conversion and first preaching of the 
apostle Paul (Acts ix. 3, 20; Gal. i. 12). " The street 
which is called Straight" (Acts ix. 11), or, at any rate, a 
street bearing that name, is still found in Damascus. 
The house ot Judas, to which Ananias was sent, is still 
pointed out, as well as that of Ananias himself; also the 
place on the wall from which St. Paul is said to have 
been let down in a basket to escape the indignation of 
the Jews (Acts ix.). These places are pointed out with 
great confidence by the Christians of all sects, and held 
in great veneration, and it may not be unreasonable to 
suppose that the true spots have been handed down by 
tradition among the followers of the cross. 

Decap'olis, the canton of, which derives its name 
from the ten cities it contained, is considered by Re- 
land and other eminent authorities, as part of the region 
of Peraea. Concerning its limits and the names of its 
ten cities, geographers are by no means agreed; but 
according to Josephus, whose intimate knowledge of the 
country constitutes him an unexceptionable authority, 
it contained the cities of Damascus, Otopos, Philadel- 
phia, Itaphana, Scythopolis (the capital of the district), 
Gadara, Hippos, Dios, Pella, and Gerasa. The name 
Decapolis was, in course of time, applied to more than 
ten towns, a circumstance which may in part account 
for the discrepancies in the lists given by various writers. 
The Decapolitan towns, referred to in the Gospels, were 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 109 

evidently situated not far from the Sea of Galilee (Mark 
v. 20, and vii. 31). 

Deii'be. A city of Lycaonia, in Asia Minor, about 
sixty miles south-east from Ieonium, and eighteen miles 
east of Lystra. It was the birthplace of Gaius, the friend 
and felknv-traveller of Paul (Acts xx. 4) ; and it was to 
this place that Paul and Barnabas fled when expelled 
from Ieonium (Acts xiv. 6). 

E'gypt. An ancient kingdom of Africa, sometimes 
called " the land of Ham," a son of Noah. Its length 
was very disproportionate to its breadth ; its extent from 
the mouths of the Nile to Syene, the border of Nubia, 
under the tropic of Cancer, was about five hundred miles, 
but it was little wider than the valley through which the 
Nile ran in Upper Egypt, until it reached the Lower 
Egypt, at some distance above the head or vertex of the 
Delta, where the valley expanded itself. From Mizraim, 
the second son of Ham, comes the ordinary biblical 
name Mizraim, a word which properly denotes Lower 
Egypt, as being that part of the country with which the 
Israelites were nearest, and best, if not (in the earlier 
period of their history) solely, acquainted. 

This designation, however, is sometimes used for 
Egypt indiscriminately, and was, by the later Arabs, ex- 
tended to the entire country. The Upper Egypt, or The- 
baid, seems to be called Pathros in Scripture, as dis- 
tinguished from the Lower, which is also sometimes 
called Caphtor, or Egypt. (Compare Isaiah xi. 11, with 
Ezek. xxix. 14, and Jer. xliv. 1, with Ezek. xxx. 14-10, 
Deut. ii. 23. Jer. xlvii. 4.) 

Egypt is the land of the Nile, the country through 
which that river flows from the Island of Philae, situated 
just above the cataracts of Syene, in latitude 24° 1' 30", 
to Damietta, in 31° 35' N., where its principal stream 
flows into the Mediterranean Sea. On the east it is 
bounded by Palestine, Idumaea, Arabia Petrasa, and the 
Arabian Gulf. But the moving sands of the wide Libyan 
deserts obliterate the traces of all political or physical 
limits on the west. 

The superficial extent of Egypt has been estimated at 
about eleven thousand square miles. Inhabited Egypt, 
however, is restricted to the valley of the Nile, which, 
having a breadth of from two to three miles, is enclosed 
on each side by a range of hills : the chain on the eastern 
side disappears at Mocattam, that on the west extends to 
the sea. The soil is productive, and consists almost en- 



110 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

tirely of mud brought down and deposited by the river, 
whose waters are indispensable every year for the pur- 
poses of agriculture, as the limits of their flow are the 
limits of vegetation. The agency of the stream is the 
more necessary as rain seldom falls in Lower Egypt. 
The Nile is never mentioned by name in our translation 
of the Old Testament. It is always called the river of 
Egypt, although the word Nile occurs in the original 
(Isa. xxvii. 12; Josh. xv. 4; 2 Kings xxiv. 7). 

This country seems to have attained an earlier and a 
higher civilization than any other in the world. Even in 
Abraham's times, we find it the seat of a royal govern- 
ment and a princely court, abounding in provisions, 
while the neighboring countries, including the fertile 
Palestine, were exposed to frequent famines (Gen. xii. 
10). In his grandson Jacob's time there was a settled 
caravan trade carried on through Palestine from Arabia 
and the East for spicery, balm, and myrrh, and probably 
for slaves (Gen. xxxvii. 25). 

In every age of the world, since the commencement of 
its antiquity, Egypt has been celebrated for those stupen- 
dous monuments of ancient art, the Pyramids, several of 
which have been successfully explored by the enterpris- 
ing traveller M. Belzoni. The purpose for which the 
Pyramids were erected was once as little known as were 
most other things connected with Egypt. It is now sat- 
isfactorily ascertained that they were designed to be mau- 
soleums. 

The countless number of date trees, which form even 
forests about some of the villages, furnisli a great source 
of subsistence for the people. To cut these down would 
be to cut off the support of the present and the hopes of 
a future generation. Nothing could be more terrible 
than the denunciation against Egypt (Jer. xlvi. 22, 23). 

The common name of the Egyptian kings was Pharaoh, 
which signified sovereign power, though each had a 
name peculiar to himself. Xo intercourse subsisted be- 
tween the Israelites and Egyptians from the departure 
of the former out of Egypt, B. C 1491, to the reign of 
Solomon, B. C. 1015, who, having married a daughter 
of Pharaoh (1 Kings iii. 1, vii. 8), and established a con- 
siderable trade between Egypt and Palestine, the two 
kingdoms became intimately connected. 

This intimacy, however, declined even during the reign 
of Solomon, as Pharaoh afforded shelter to Jeroboam, 
son of Nebat, who afterwards became king of the ten 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. Ill 

revolting tribes of Israel. Towards the end of the king- 
doms of Israel and Judah, when the sovereigns of those 
countries found themselves too weak to resist the Assyr- 
ian and Babylonian monarehs, they often applied to the 
kings of Egypt for succor. But these applications were 
always fatal to them, and the vain confidence of the peo- 
ple of God in these heathen princes is a frequent subject 
of reproof in the writings of the prophets (Isa. xxx. 2, 
xxxvi. G; Ezek. xxvi. G, 7; Hos.ea vii., viii., and ix.). 
(For history of the Egyptian Empire, as connected with 
that of the Israelites, see ''Home's Introduction to the 
Bible" vol. iii. pp. 52G-528.) The relation which the 
religion of the Egyptians sustains to that of Moses is one 
of much more importance, and merits a greater degree 
of attention, than seems to have been generally acknowl- 
edged. Egypt was made a province of -the Persian em- 
pire B. C 350, and finally became a Roman province at 
the death of Cleopatra, B. C. 30. 

Em'mats (hot baths). A small village of Judea, sixty 
stadia, or seven and a half miles, from Jerusalem, noted 
for our Lord's interview with two of his disciples on the 
evening of the day of his resurrection (Luke xxiv. 13- 
35). The site is not now known. 

E'xox (fountain). A place between Salim and the Jor- 
dan, north-east of Jerusalem, where John was baptizing 
(John iii. 23). The reason given, "because there was 
much water there," would suggest that he baptized at the 
springs from which the place took its name. 

Eph'esus. An old and celebrated city, the capital of 
Ionia, one of the twelve Ionian cities in Asia Minor, in 
mythic times. It was situated at the mouth of the River 
Cayster, on the shore of the iEgean Sea, between Smyr- 
na and Miletus. About the time of the introduction of 
Christianity, while other Greek cities declined, Ephesus 
rose more and more. Under the Romans, Ephesus was 
the capital, not only of Ionia, but of the entire province 
of Asia, and bore the honorable title of the greatest me- 
tropolis of Asia. In the days of St. Paul, Jews were 
found settled in the city in large numbers, from whom 
the apostle collected a Christian community (Acts xviii. 
19, xix. 1, xx. 18), which, being fostered by the hand 
of Paul himself, became the centre of Christianity in 
Asia Minor. The city abounded in orators and philoso- 
phers ; and its inhabitants in their Gentile state were cele- 
brated for their idolatry and skill in magic,- as well as 
for their luxury and lasciviousness. On leaving the city, 



112 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

the apostle left Timothy there (1 Tim. i. 3). At later 
times, according to tradition, St. John lived and labored 
for the spread of the gospel in Ephesus, where he died 
at an advanced age, and was buried with Mary, the 
mother of the Lord. < 

In the hook of Revelation (ii. 1), a favorable mention 
is made of the Christian churches at Ephesus. The 
classic celebrity of the city is chiefly owing to the Tem- 
ple of Diana, a most magnificent and stately edifice, 
which had been erected at the common expense of the 
inhabitants of Asia proper, and was reputed one of the 
seven wonders of the world. The books mentioned in 
Acts xix. 19, were doubtless books of magic; how ex- 
tensively they were in use at the time they were burned 
may be inferred from "the price of them" being "fifty 
thousand pieces of silver. M Ephesus is now under the 
dominion of the Turks, and is in a state of almost total 
ruin. A few cornfields are scattered along the site of 
the ancient city, which is marked by some large masses 
of shapeless ruins and stone walls. Towards the sea 
extends the ancient port, which is a pestilential marsh. 
The ruins of the adjoining town, which rose about four 
hundred years ago, are composed entirely of materials 
from Ephesus. Consecrated first of all to purposes of 
idolatry, Ephesus next had Christian temples almost 
rivalling the pagan in splendor; and after the lapse of 
some centuries, the Mohammedan crescent glittered on 
the dome of the recently Christian church. But now 
Ephesus has neither temple, cross, crescent, nor city, 
but is " a desolation, a dry land, and a wilderness." 

E'piiuaim. A considerable city of Judea, eight miles 
north of Jerusalem, and near the desert of the same 
name; to which Jesus withdrew from the persecution 
which followed the miracle of raising Lazarus from the 
dead (John xi. 54). Bagster says, Ephraim appears to 
be the same city which is called Ephrain (2 Chron. xiii. 
1 ( J), and Ephron (Josh. xv. 9), which was situated eight 
miles north of Jerusalem, near Bethel, and apparently 
between that city and Jericho. Accordingly we find that 
a desert or wilderness extended from Jericho to Bethel 
(Josh. xvi. 1), called the wilderness of Beth-aven (Josh, 
xviii. 12), in which Joshua and the Israelites slew the in- 
habitants of Ai (Josh. viii. 2-t). 

Ethio'pia is the name by which the English and most 
other versions render the Hebrew Cush. Among the 
Greeks and Romans, the word was used to denote any of 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 113 

tlic countries where the people were of a sable or sun-: 
burnt color. But the Hebrews understood by Ethiopia, 
or African Cush, the whole of the region south of Egypt, 
above Syene, the modern Assouan (Ezek. zxix. 10. xxx. 
6 . Its limits on the west and south were undefined: but 
it was probably regarded as extending east to the Red Sea, 
and perhaps including some of the islands of that sea, 
such as the famous Topaz Isle (Job xxviii. 19). It thus 
corresponds in a general sense to the countries known to 
as as Nuoia and Abyssinia. But that part of the vast 
region of Cush, which seems chiefly intended in these 
and most other passages of Scripture, is the tract of 
cuuntry in Upper Nubia, which was famous, in an- 
tiquity, as the kingdom of Ethiopia, or the state of 
Me roe. 

The Ethiopian nations generally ranked low in the 
scale of civilization ; but the splendid ruins of temples, 
pyramids, and other edifices found throughout the dis- 
trict of Meroe, attest that a high degree of civilization 
and art once existed among the Ethiopians. Queen Can- 
dace, mentioned in Acts viii. 27, was doubtless the reign- 
ing sovereign of Meroe, where it is probable a form of 
Judaism was at that time professed by a portion of the 
inhabitants, as seems to have been tite case in the adja- 
cent region of Abyssinia. 

Elpiira'tes. Termed in Deut. i. 7, " the great river," 
where it is mentioned (ver. 8) as the eastern boundary 
of the land which God gave to the descendants of Abra- 
ham. 

In Gen. ii. 14, the Euphrates is stated to be the fourth 
of the rivers flowing from a common stream in the garden 
of Eden. 

It is by far the most considerable river in Western Asia, 
and is often designated as " the river," as in Exod. xxiii. 
31, Isa. viii. 7, Jer. ii. 18, and Rev. ix. If. It has two 
sources, and two arms, the eastern and western, which 
rise in the Mountains of Armenia. These two arms 
unite about three days' journey from Erzeroom. and, thus 
united, give rise to the Euphrates, stricily so called, 
which, flowing to the south, divides Armenia from Cappa- 
docia; but being driven westward by the Taurus and 
Anti-Taurus Mountains, it makes a very circuitous route, 
passing the north of Syria and north-east of Arabia De- 
serta. and at length, after many windings, it unites with 
the Tigris, and thus finds its termination in the Persian 
Gulf. 

8 



114 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

Fatr Ha'vens. A small bay of Crete, a little to tho 
north-east of Cape Leon, the present Cape Matala. The 
unsafeness of the harbor in which to winter occasioned 
the attempt to make for Phenice, on the other side of the 
island, which eventually led to the loss of the vessel in 
which St. Paul sailed for Rome (Acts xxviii. 8). 

Gab'batiia. Where the Evangelist states (John xix. 
13) that Pontius Pilate, alarmed in his attempts to save 
Jesus, went into the Praetorium, and brought Jesus out to 
them, and sat down once more upon the tribunal. The 
Roman governors, although they tried causes, and con- 
sulted their council within the Praetorium (Acts xxv. 12), 
always pronounced sentence in the open air. 

Gad'ara was. according to Josephus, the metropolis 
of Persea, or the region beyond Jordan. Both the city 
and villages belonging to it lay within the region of the 
Gergcsenes, whence Christ, going into the country of 
the Gadarenes (Mark v. 1), is said to go into the region 
of the Gergesenes (Matt. viii. 28). The remains of the 
warm baths for which this place was anciently celebrated, 
and also of the tombs (among which the Gadarene demo- 
niac abode), are still to be seen. Gadara is now called 
Oomkais. 

Gala'tia. A province of Asia Minor, bounded on the 
north by Bithynia and Paphlagonia, on the south by 
Lycaonia, on the cast by the River Ilalys, and on the 
west by Phrygia. The Galatians were the descendants of 
those Gauls, who, finding their country too small to sup- 
port its redundant population, emigrated from it after the 
death of Alexander the Great, B. C. 278. They wor- 
shipped the mother of the gods, and so, St. Paul says 
(Gal. iv. 8), "They knew not God." 

In chap. iii. 1, St. Paul says, " O foolish Galatians, 
who hath bewitched you? " This church was so danger- 
ously perverted, and almost overturned, by the Judaizers 
there, that the apostle, in his Epistle to them, does not 
call them saints. 

Gal'ilee. The name given to one of the three divis- 
ions of Palestine, the other two being Judea and Sa- 
maria. This portion of the Holy Land was the most 
northern, and its limits seem to have varied at different 
times. It comprised the country formerly occupied by 
the tribes of Issachar, Naphtali, and Asher, and by part 
of the tribe of Dan. and is divided into Upper and Lower 
Galilee. 

Uppeii Galilee abounded in mountains, having Mount 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 115 

Lebanon on the north, and from its vicinity to the Gen- 
tiles who inhabited the cities of Tyre and Sidon, it is 
called "Galilee of the Gentiles" (fsa. ix. 1; Matt. iv. 
15), and the "coasts of Tyre and Sidon" (Mark vii. 
31). The principal city of this region was Caesarea Phi- 
lippi, through which the main road lay to Damascus, 
Tyre, and Sidon. 

Lower Galilee, which lay between the Mediterra- 
nean Sea and the Lake of Gennesareth, was situated in 
a rich and fertile plain, and, according to Josephus, was 
very populous, containing upwards of two hundred cities 
and towns. 

This country was most honored by our Saviour's pres- 
ence. Hither Joseph and Mary returned with him out of 
Egypt, and here he resided permanently until his baptism 
by John, at thirty years of age (Matt. ii. 22. 23; Luke ii. 
o'J-51; Matt. iii. 13; Luke iii. 21). Hither he returned 
after his baptism and temptation (Luke iv. 14) ; and alter 
his entrance on his public ministry, though he often en- 
tered into other provinces, yet so frequent were his visits 
to this country, that he was called a Galilean (Matt. xxvi. 
G ( J). To this province our Lord commanded his apostles 
to come and converse with him after his resurrection 
(Matt, xxviii. 7, 1G), and of this country, most, if not 
the whole, of the apostles were natives, whence they are 
styled by the angels, "men of Galilee " (Acts i. 11). 
The Galileans spoke a corrupt and unpolished dialect of 
Syriac, and it was this which led to the detection of Peter 
as one of Christ's disciples (Mark xiv. 70). The Gali- 
leans are represented to be a turbulent and rebellious 
people, and were particularly forward in an insurrection 
against Pilate himself, who, as a summary punishment, 
caused a party of them to be treacherously slain, during 
one of the great festivals, when they came to sacrifice at 
Jerusalem. This may explain the expression in St. 
Luke's Gospel (xiii. 1), " whose blood Pilate mingled 
with their sacrifices," and may also account for his 
abrupt question when he heard of Galilee, and inquired 
if Jesus " were a Galilean" (Luke xxiii. 6). 

The principal cities of Lower Galilee mentioned in the 
Xew Testament are, Tiberias, Chorazin, Bethsaida, 
Xazareth. Cana, Capernaum, £sain, Cassareaof Palestine, 
and Ptolemais. 

Ga'za. A very celebrated city of the Jews, about 
sixty miles distant, south-west from Jerusalem. It was 
one of the fine cities of the. Philistines which fell by lot 



118 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

to the tribe of Judah (Josh. xv. 47), and which offered 
their golden emerods to the God of Israel for a trespass 
offering (1 Sam. vi. 17). Its gates were carried away by 
Samson (Judges xvi. 3), and hither he was conducted 
when taken by the Philistines, great numbers of whom 
perished when lie pulled down the house of their god 
Dagon (Judges xvi. 21-30). 

This ancient town was laid waste by Alexander, and 
so made desolate, agreeably to the prediction in Zcph. 
ii. 14. 

After this event, a new and smaller town of the same 
name being built nearer to the sea, the former, or old 
Gaza, fell to decay ; this last is the place mentioned by 
St. Luke (Acts viii. 26), as Gaza "which is called des- 
ert," where Philip baptized the eunuch " of great author- 
ity under Candace, queen of the Ethiopians/' 

Gennes'areth. 1. A very pleasant and fruitful place, 
abounding in the gardens of great men, whence it had its 
name from Gen and Sar, as being the garden of princes; 
it lay at the foot of the Lake of Gcnnesareth, and gave 
that name to it (Luke v. 1). 

Gennesareth (called also Cinncreth). 2. The Sea 
of Galilee (so called from its situation on the eastern 
borders of that division of Palestine), through which the 
Jordan flows (Luke v. 1; Matt. xiv. 34 ; Mark vi. 53); 
called also the k ' Sea of Tiberias" (John vi. 1, xxi. 1), 
from the contiguous city of Tiberias. 

The waters of the northern part of this lake abound in 
fish, which circumstance marks the propriety of our 
Lord's parable of the net cast into the sea (Matt. xiii. 47, 
48), which was delivered by him from a vessel near the 
shore. This lake is about fifteen miles in length by six 
in breadth. 

The Jordan enters it on the north, and it is said runs 
directly through, and leaves it on the south without the 
mingling of the waters. A strong current marks the 
passage of the Jordnn through the lake, and when this 
is opposed by contrary winds, which blow here with the 
force of a hurricane from the south-east, sweeping into 
the lake from the mountains, a boisterous sea is instant- 
ly raised, which the small vessels of this country are ill 
qualified to resist. It was in one of these small vessels, 
and tossed in a storm, the disciples saw Jesus, in the 
fourth watch of the night, walking to them on the wave 
(Matt. xiv. 24-26). 

From numerous indications it has been inferred the 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OP PLACES. 117 

bed of this lake was formed from some volcanic eruption 
history does not record. Many of the apostles were 
fishermen of this lake. In Christ's time, the borders of 
the lake were covered with numerous villages, and well 
peopled; but now they are almost desolate, and the fish 
and water- fowl are seldom disturbed. 

Ger'izim and E'bal. Two mountains of Samaria, form- 
ing the opposite sides of the valley containing the ancient 
town of Shcchcm. It was on these two mountains that 
the tribes were to be assembled, one half on each, to 
hear the fearful maledictions pronounced by the Levites 
upon all who should violate the obligations of the sacred 
code, and the blessings promised to those who should 
observe them (Deut. xxvii. ; Josh. viii. 30-35). Gerizim 
is the mountain referred to in John iv. 20, on which the 
Samaritans built a temple and worshipped. 

Getiise.m'axe. A garden or small field, about fifty 
paces square, just out of Jerusalem, beyond Kidron. at 
the foot of Mount Olivet, and so called from the wine- 
presses in it. It is enclosed by a wall of no great height, 
founded of loose, rough stones. The garden belongs to 
one of the monastical establishments, and although great 
care has been taken to preserve the few old olive trees 
which occupy the enclosure from destruction, they exhibit 
symptoms of decay, clearly denoting their great age. 
Gethsemane is memorable in the evangelical history as 
being the scene of our Saviour's agony (Matt. xxvi. 3G). 

Gergasites', or Gergesexes'. The inhabitants of 
Gergesa, a town on the east of Gennesareth, near to 
Gadara (Matt. viii. 28). 

Gol'gotha. See " Calvary." 

Gomok'kah. One of the five cities destroyed by fire 
from heaven (Gen. xix. 1; Matt. x. 15). See " Sodom." 

Go'shex. A district or province of Egj^pt, in which 
Jacob and his family settled, through the instrumentality 
of his son Joseph. Kittoadds, i; They and their descen- 
dants remained there for a period of four hundred and 
thirty years (Gen. xiv. 10, xlvi. 28, xlvii. 27, 1. 8; Exod. 
viii. 22, ix. 26)." But this is evidently an error. The 
four hundred and thirty years referred to by Moses com- 
menced with the call of Abraham, or God's covenant with 
him, B. C. 1921. It was two hundred and fifteen years 
from this date, or B. C. 1706, that Jacob and his family 
went down into Egypt, where they remained until the 
exode, B. C. 1491, or two hundred and fifteen years, 
making four hundred and thirty years from the covenant 



118 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

with Abraham to the giving of the law, the same year as 
the exodus out of Egypt (Gal. iii. 17). 

The Bible does not present any definite information as 
to the precise location of Goshen but it is evident that 
at the time of the exode the Israelites did not cross the 
Kile; hence it is generally inferred that this land lay 
along the easterly branch of the Nile, and on the east side 
of it. (Compare Exod. xiii. 17, and 1 Chron. vii. 21.) 

Greece, in the Scriptures, often comprehends all the 
countries inhabited by the descendants of Javan, the 
fourth son of Japheth, as well in Greece as in Ionia and 
Asia Minor. Since the time of Alexander the Great, the 
name of Greece is taken in a more uncertain and en- 
larged sense, because, the Greeks being masters of Egypt 
and Syria, of the countries beyond the Euphrates, &c, 
the Jews called all those Gentiles Greeks. In the Mac- 
cabees, the Gospels, and Paul's writings, a Greek com- 
monly signifies a Gentile. In the Old Testament, Greece 
and Greeks are named Javan (Isa. lxvi. ID ; Ezek. 
xxvii. 13, 19; Dan. xi. 2, viii. 21, x. 20). 

After a beginning had been made of preaching the 
gospel to the Gentiles, Greece at once became a princi- 
pal sphere for missionary labor. The Grecian cities, 
whether in Europe or Asia, were the peculiar field for 
the apostle Paul. 

Greece proper was divided by the Romans into two 
provinces, of which the northern was called Macedonia, 
and the southern Achaia (2 Cor. ix. 2, &c). It is diffi- 
cult to determine the exact division between these two 
provinces, but this is not important to the biblical stu- 
dent. Corinth is the only city celebrated in Greek his- 
tory in the early Christian times, in Macedonia were 
the two great cities of Philippi and Thessalonica ; the for- 
mer, however, was rather recent, being founded by Philip 
the Great. Nicopolis, built by Augustus in memory of 
the victory at Actium, B. C. 31, had risen into some im- 
portance in St. Paul's day, and many suppose it is this 
Nicopolis he refers to in his Epistle to Titus (iii. 12). 

Hierap'olis. A city of Phrygia, not far from Colassae 
and Laodica?a, in which there was a Christian church as 
early as the time of St. Paul, which was under the 
charge of Epaphras (Colos. iv. 12, 13). It was an- 
ciently a place of considerable importance, as is clearly 
attested by its magnificent ruins. 

Ico'nium. A city of Lycaonia, the chief of the four- 
teen belonging to that tetrarchy. It is situated about 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 119 

one hundred and twenty miles inland from the Mediter- 
ranean Sea. Here was a synagogue of the Jews and 
proselytes, to whom Paul and Barnabas preached, and 
confirmed their doctrine by miracles, making many 
proselytes (Acts xiv. 1-3) : but some unbelieving Jews 
excited against them a persecution, which they escaped 
with difficulty. About six years after. Paul undertook a 
second journey to Iconium. The church here planted 
by the apostle continued to flourish until the persecu- 
tion by the Saracens, and afterwards by the Seljukians, 
-when it became nearly extinct. But some Christians of 
the Greek and Armenian church, with a Greek metropol- 
itan bishop, are still found in the suburbs of the city, not 
being permitted to reside within its wails. 

Idum^e'a is the Greek form of the Hebrew name Edom, 
derived from the name of Isaac's son Edom, otherwise 
called Esau, the elder twin brother of Jacob. It com- 
prised the extreme southern part of Judea, from the Sea 
of Sodom to the Red Sea, together with some small part 
of Arabia. Esau removed into this district during the 
lifetime of his father, and his posterity gradually obtained 
possession of the country which God assigned to him in 
the prophetic blessing of his father (Gen. xxvii. 39, 40, 
xxxii. 3; Deut. ii. 5-12). 

This province, previous to its occupation by Esau, was 
called Blount Seir, a designation which it never entirely 
lost (Gen. xiv. (3). The mountains of Edom afforded 
peeuliar facilities for the construction of caves, which 
appear to have been the earliest human habitations. 

In process of time the Idumaeans advanced northward 
in Judea, nearly as far as Hebron. During the Baby- 
lonish captivity, being left destitute of inhabitants, or not 
sufficiently inhabited by its natives, it seems to have been 
seized by the neighboring Idumaeans ; and although they 
were afterwards subjugated by the powerful arms of the 
Maccabees and Asmonean princes, and embraced Juda- 
ism, yet the tract of country of which they had possessed 
themselves continued to retain the appellation of Idu- 
ma?a in the time of Christ, and for a considerable subse- 
quent period. The situation of the country afforded pe- 
culiar facilities for commerce, which seem to have been 
improved from a very early period. The time of its 
greatest prosperity was probably soon after the founding 
of the kingdom of Arabia Petraea, of which Petra was the 
renowned metropolis. The religion of the early Edom- 
ites was, perhaps, comparatively pure: but in process 



120 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

of time they embraced idolatry. Under the Maccabees 
they were forced to submit to circumcision (Mark iii. 8). 

Illyr'icum. A province lying to the north and north- 
west of Macedonia, along the eastern coast of the Adri- 
atic Gulf, or Gulf of Venice. It was divided into two 
parts, Liburnia to the north (now called Croatia), which 
is not mentioned in the New Testament, and Dalmatia 
in the south, which region still retains the same name. 
Hither St. Paul informs Timothy that Titus had gone 
(2 Tim. iv. 10). Paul himself preached the gospel in 
Illyricum, which was at that time a province of the Ko- 
man empire (Rom. xv. 19). 

Itub2B 7 a anciently belonged to the half tribe of Manas- 
seh. who settled on the east of Jordan; it stood to the 
east of Batamea, and to the soutli of Trachonitis. It 
probably derived its name from Jetur, a son of Ishmael 
(1 Chron. i. 31), and was also called Auranitis, from the 
city of llauran. 

During the exile this and other border countries were 
taken possession of by various tribes, whom we arc not 
bound to regard as descendants of the original possessors 
of the countries of which they took possession, although 
called after the original names of such countries. 

These new Ituraeans were eventually subdued by King 
Aristobulus (about B. C. 100). by whom they were con- 
strained to embrace the Jewish religion, and were at 
the same time incorporated with the state. When Herod 
the Great divided his dominions among his sons, he be- 
queathed Ituraea to Philip, as part of a tetrarchy com- 
posed of Trachonitis and Ituraea (Luke iii. 1). 

Jer'icho. A celebrated city in a plain of the same 
name, situated in the tribe of Benjamin, not far from the 
Kiver Jordan, at the point of its entrance into the Dead 
Sea. It lay before the Israelites when they crossed the 
river on their first entrance into the Promised Land 
(Josh, ii.), and was the first city taken from the Canaan- 
ites by Joshua, who razed it to the ground, and de- 
nounced a severe curse upon the person who should 
rebuild it (Josh. vi. 20, 26; Heb. xi. 80) ; and all the in- 
habitants were put to the sword, except Rahab and her 
family. This curse was literally fulfilled, in tiie days of 
Ahab, upon Hiel, the Bethelite, by whom the city was re- 
built (1 Kings xvi. 34). After this event it was enno'led 
by the schools of the prophets, which were established 
there (2 Kings ii. o; Judges iii. 13); its inhabit mts 
returned after the exile, and it was eventually fortified 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 121 

by the Syrian general Bacchides (Ezra ii. 34; Neh. 
iii. 2.) Near it was a large but unwholesome spring, the 
waters of which rendered the soil unfruitful, until they 
were cured by the prophet Elisha (2 Kings ii. 21) ; and 
from that time they have become exceedingly whole- 
some and fertilizing. In the time of our Saviour Jericho 
yielded only to Jerusalem in size and the magnificence 
of its buildings. Herod the Great, in the beginning of 
his reign, captured and sacked Jericho; but afterwards, 
when he had redeemed its revenues from Cleopatra, he 
strengthened and adorned it. Here was the Hippodrome 
or Circus, in which this same tyrant caused to be shut up 
the nobles of the land while on his death bed at Jericho, 
to be massacred after his death. He died here, but his 
bloody purpose was not executed. 

Jericho was situated in a bottom, in that vast plain 
which was named the great plain (which marks the pro- 
priety of tiie expression, " going down from Jerusalem " 
(Luke x. 30) ; it is about nineteen miles distant from the 
capital of Judea. It was one of the cities appropriated 
for the residence of the priests and Levites, twelve thou- 
sand of whom resided there; and as the way thither from 
Jerusalem was rocky and desert, it was, as it still is, in- 
fested wiili thieves. A country more favorable for the 
attacks of banditti, and caves better adapted to conceal- 
ment than those presented on this road, can scarcely be 
imagined. This circumstance marks the admirable pro- 
priety with which our Lord made it the scene of his 
beautiful parable of the "good Samaritan" (Luke x. 
30-37). 

Jeuu'salem (habitation of peace), the Jewish capital 
of Palestine. It is mentioned very early in Scripture, 
being usually supposed to be Salem, of which Melchize- 
dek was king. "In Salem is his tabernacle, and his 
dwelling-place in Sion " (Psalm lxxvi. 2). Jerusalem is 
frequently styled, in the Scriptures, the Holy City (Isa. 
xlviii. 2; Dan. ix. 24; Neh. xi. i; Matt. iv. 5; Rev. xi. 
2), because "the Lord chose it out of all the tribes of 
Israel to place his name there," his temple and his wor- 
ship (Deut. xii. 5, xiv. 23, xvi. 2, xxvi. 2). It is held 
in the highest veneration, by the Christians, for the 
miraculous and important transactions which occurred 
there; also by the Mohammedans, who never call it by 
any other appellation than El-Kods, or The Holy. 

The import of Jerusalem is (from its original name 
Saiem, Uen. xvi. 18) the " Vision or Inheritance of 



122 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

Peace; " and to this it is not improbable our Saviour 
alluded, in his beautiful and pathetic lamentation over 
the city (Luke xix. 41). 

It was also formerly called Jehus, from one of the 
sons of Canaan (Josh, xviii. 28). The name Jerusalem 
first occurs in Josh. x. 1, where Adoni-sedek, king of 
Jerusalem, is mentioned as having entered into an alli- 
ance with other kings against Joshua, by whom they 
were all overcome (Josh. xii. 1). 

After its capture by Joshua (Josh, x.), Jerusalem was 
jointly inhabited by Jews and Jebusites (Josh. xv. 63) 
for about four hundred years. After David — who had 
previously reigned over Judah alone in Hebron — was 
called to rule over all Israel, he led his forces against 
the Jebusites, and conquered the castle of Zion, which 
Joab first sealed (2 Sam. v. 5-9; 1 Chron. xii. 4-8). He 
then fixed his abode on this mountain, and called it the 
" City of David." It was to this place he carried the 
ark of the covenant, and built unto the Lord an altar, on 
the place where the angel stood who threatened Jerusa- 
lem with pestilence (2 Sam. xxiv. 15-25). By the 
prophet Isaiah (Isa. xxix. 1) Jerusalem is termed Ariel, 
or the Lion of God; but the reason of this name and its 
meaning, as applied to Jerusalem, are obscure and doubt- 
ful. The promise made to David received its accom- 
plishment when Solomon built his temple upon Mount 
Moriah, 13. C. 1004. On the east stands the Mount of 
01ive>, facing the temple, of which it commands a noble 
prospect (Matt. xxiv. 2, 3). On the descent of this 
mountain our Saviour stood when he beheld the city and 
wept over it ; and on this mountain he stood when he 
uttered his prediction of the downfall of Jerusalem (Luke 
xix. 41-44) ; and we arc told that the army of Titus en- 
camped upon the very spot where its destruction had been 
foretold. Dr. Clarke discovered some pagan remains 
on this mountain, and at the foot of it he visited an olive 
ground, always noticed as the garden of Gethsemane. 
(See also " Kidron.") On the south side stood the Mount 
of Corruption, where Solomon, in his declining years, 
built temples to Moloch (livings xi. 7; 2 Kings xxiii. 
13) ; it was separated from the city by the narrow val- 
ley of Hinnom (Josh, xviii. 16; Jer. xix. 2), where the 
Israelites burned their children in the fire to Moloch 
(Jer. vii. 31, xxxii. 35), thence made the emblem of hell, 
Gehenna (Matt. v. 22, xxiii. 33 ; Mark ix. 43). Towards 
the west, and without the walls of the city, agreeably to 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OP PLACES. 123 

the law of Moses (Lev. iv.), lay Calvary, or Golgotha. 
(See " Calvary.") The southern quarter, originally the 
" City of David," built on Mount Sion, Josephus ealls 
the Upper City, and the house of Millo is what he ealls 
the Upper Market. In process of time the upper city 
spread downward to the winding hollow way, which he 
calls the '* valley of cheesemongers" (Syropeam), and 
comprised the Lower City, called by him Acra. 

Much uncertaiuty exists as to the ancient gates of Je- 
rusalem ; it has been objected that more are named than 
a city of its size would require. But it is usually sup- 
posed that two or more of the names applied to the same 
gate. In the account of the rebuilding of the wall under 
the direction of Nehemiah, ten gates are distinctly enu- 
merated, viz., three on the south, four on the east, and 
three on the western side of the wall. We have no ac- 
count of any gates being erected on the northern side. 
(For full account of these gates, and the names and 
order of them that built the wall, see Neh. iii.) 

The towers of Jerusalem are often mentioned in Scrip- 
ture and in Josephus. Most of those mentioned by Jo- 
sephus were built by Herod the Great, and were conse- 
quently standing in the time of Christ. The temple was 
in all ages the great glory as the principal public building 
of Jerusalem, as the heathen temple, church, or mosque, 
successively occupying the same site, has been ever since 
the Jewish temple was destroyed. 

Besides the preceding edifices, Josephus mentions a 
house or palace, erected by the princes of the Asmonean 
family, and called the Asmonean Palace. It appears to 
have been the residence of the Herodian family whenever 
they went up to Jerusalem (Luke xxiii. 7-11). After the 
secession of the ten tribes under Jeroboam, Jerusalem 
was the capital of the kings of Judah. It was captured 
four times, without being demolished, viz., by Shishak, 
sovereign of Egypt (2 Chron. xii), from whose ravages it 
never recovered its former splendor ; by Antiochus Epiph- 
anes, who treated the Jews with singular barbarity ; by 
Pompey the Great, who rendered the Jews tributary to 
Rome ; and by Herod, with the assistance of a Roman 
force under Sosius. It was first entirely destroyed by 
Nebuchadnezzar, B. C. 588, after eighteen months' siege, 
Jerusalem and the temple burned, and the Jews carried 
captive beyond the Euphrates ; and again destroyed by 
Titus, the son of Vespasian, emperor of Rome, A.D. 70; 
and ail the awful predictions of our Lord, as well as those 



124 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

of the ancient prophets, are literally fulfilled. The city 
is desolated, the temple destroyed (notwithstanding the 
efforts of Titus to save it), so that not one stone was left 
upon another; eleven hundred thousand persons perished 
in the siege, and the remnant of the Jews are scattered 
among all nations. From the destruction of Jerusalem 
by the Romans, until the present time, it has remained 
for the most part in a state of ruin and desolation, and 
has never been under the government of the Jews them- 
selves, but oppressed and broken down by a succession 
of foreign masters, — the Romans, the Saracens, the 
Franks, the Mamelukes, and last by the Turks, to whom 
it is still subject. The general condition of the popula- 
tion is that of abject poverty. A large number, espe- 
cially Jews, professedly live on charity. 

The number of inhabitants of Jerusalem has been vari- 
ously estimated by different travellers, but probably does 
not exceed fifteen thousand, about one half of whom are 
Jews, one fourth Mohammedans, and one fourth Chris- 
tians. This is a very slender estimate compared with 
the nourishing population the city once supported; but 
the numerous sieges the city has undergone, and their 
consequent spoliations, have left no vestige of its origi- 
nal power. We have it upon judgment's record, that 
K< b J'oj-c a marching army, a land lias been as ike 
garden of Eden, behind it, a desolate wilderness" (Joel 
ii. :>). 

Jop'ta, a seaport of Palestine, on the Mediterrane- 
an Sea, about forty miles north-west of Jerusalem, owes 
all its celebrity, as the principal port of Judea, to its sit- 
uation with regard to Jerusalem. As a station for ves- 
sels, its harbor is one of the worst on the coast of the 
Mediterranean. Ships generally anchor about a mile 
from the shore, to avoid the shoals and rocks of the 
place. It existed as early as the time of the invasion of 
the land of Canaan by the Israelites, as lying on the 
border of the tribe of Dan (Josh. xix. 4(5). It was here 
that the timber for the first and second temple was 
landed (1 Kings v. 9 ; 2 Chron. ii. 10 ; Exra iii. 7). It was 
here that Jonah found a ship going to Tarshish (Jonah 
i. 3). It appears from the xVcts of the Apostles (ix. 10, 
11), that the gospel was received here soon after the 
ascension of Christ. Here, also* Peter restored Dorcas 
to life (Acts iv. 40). From the first crusades down to 
the present time, Joppa has been the la r ding-place of 
the pilgrims bound for Jerusalem. In 17ti7, the place 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 125 

was taken by storm, by the French army under Napole- 
on, and was sacked without mercy, when the Turkish 
prisoners, to the number of five hundred or six hundred, 
were carried to the top of the neighboring sand-hills, and 
put to death by his order. The inhabitants arc said not 
to exceed four thousand, of whom about one fourth are 
reckoned to be Christians. 

Jor'dan. The principal river which waters Palestine. 
Its true source is the Lake Phiala, near Caesarea Philippi, 
at the foot of Anti-Libanus, whence it passes under 
ground, and emerging to the light from a cave in the 
vicinity of Paneas, it flows due south through the centre 
of the country, intersecting the Lake Merom, and the 
Sea of Galilee, and (it i3 said) without mingling with its 
waters, and finally loses itself in the Dead Sea. 

Its banks are covered with a forest of reeds and 
shrubs, affording shelter to wild beasts ; which were, 
however, driven therefrom when the river overflowed its 
banks, as it sometimes did, to the extent of a mile on 
either side (Jer. xlix. 11); Matt. iii. 6). The passage of 
this deep and rapid river by the Israelites, at the most 
unfavorable season of the year, when augmented by the 
melting of winter snows, was more manifestly miracu- 
lous than the crossing of the Red Sea. 

Jude'a. The most southern of the three divisions of 
Palestine. It comprised the territory which had formerly 
belonged to the tribes of Judah, Benjamin, Simeon, 
and to part of the tribe of Dan, being nearly coexten- 
sive with the ancient kingdom of Judah. Its metropolis 
was Jerusalem. 

It has been divided into four parts. 1. The western 
province, along the borders of the Mediterranean, in- 
habited by the Philistines. 2. The mountainous dis- 
trict, called hill country (Josh. xxi. 11; Luke i. 39). 
3. The wilderness of Judea, along the shore of the Dead 
Sea. 4. The valley west of Jerusalem. In our Lord's 
time, Judea extended from the Mediterranean west to 
the Dead Sea east; bounded on the north by Samaria, 
and on the south by Edom, or the Desert. 

Kid'ron, Ked'ron, or Ce'dron, as it is variously 
termed (2 Sam. xy. 2 ; 1 Kings xv\ 13 ; 2 Kings xxiii. 
6; 2 Chron. xxix. 1G; Jer. xxxi. 40; John xviii. 1), runs 
in the Valley of Jehoshaphat, eastward of Jerusalem, 
between that city and the Mount of Olives : except in 
winter, or after heavy rains, its channel is usually dry ; 
but when swollen by torrents it flows with great impetu* 



1*2G NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

osity, and like other brooks in cities, it is contaminated 
with the filth of which it is the receptacle and common 
sewer. 

Laodice'a. There were four places of this name, 
although but one is mentioned in Scripture. The one 
situated on the coast of Syria, which was destroyed by 
an earthquake in 1822. has been supposed by some to 
be the Laodicea of Scripture; but it is now believed the 
true place named in Scripture was in the western part 
of Phrygia, on the borders of Lydia, and about forty 
miles south-east of Ephesus, It was the capital of 
Greater Phrygia, and in the primitive time of Christian- 
ity, as appears from St. Paul's Epistle to the Colossians, 
in which the Laodiceans are frequently mentioned, 
this place possessed a flourishing church. This is one 
of the •• seven churches in Asia" to which St. John was 
commissioned to deliver the awful warning contained in 
Pev. iii. 14-19. The doom denounced upon the Laodi- 
ceans, we are to suppose, applied to the Christian church 
there, and not to the city itself, and seems to have been 
more severe and terrible than that of the other six apoc- 
alyptic churches. The frequent earthquakes to which 
this region was exposed destroyed the greater part of 
the city, many of its inhabitants, and eventually obliged 
the remainder to abandon the spot altogether. The 
stately edifices of ancient Loadicea are now peopled 
with wolves and jackals. 

Lir.'vA. among the ancient Greeks, was used as an- 
other name for Africa, as it imports a part of it. But 
the Libya of the New Testament, and the country of the 
Lubim of the Old, was a large tract lying along the 
Mediterranean, to the west of Egypt. Luke says it 
was --the dwellers of Libya about Gyrene" (Acts ii. 10) 
who came up to Jerusalem at the day of Pentecost. It 
is noted in the Old Testament for its chariots and horses 
used in fight (2 Chron. xvi. 8, 9). 

Lycao'kia. A province in Asia Minor, between Ga- 
latia and Cappadocia. Its three principal cities are all 
mentioned in Acts iiv», viz.. Iconium, Lystra, and Der- 
be. They spake in the Lycaonian tongue (ver. 13), 
which is generally supposed to have been a corrupt 
Greek, intermingled witli many Syriac words. 

Lyc'ia. A province of Asia Minor, forming part of 
Cappadocia (Acts ii. 9). 

Lyd'da, which in later times was called Diospolis, 
was a large village, and, according to Josephus. hut a 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 127 

little inferior to a city in size. The place was celebrated 
in the Acts of the Apostles for the miraculous cure of 
Eneas by Peter (Acts ix. 32-35). 

Lyd'ia. A province of Asia Minor, lying east of Ionia 
and the iEgean Sea. In the time of the travels of the 
apostles, it was a province of the Roman empire. Its 
chief towns were Sardis (the capital), Thyatira, and 
Philadelphia, all of which are mentioned in the New 
Testament, although the name of the province itself 
does not occur. The manners of the Lydians are said 
to have been corrupt to a proverb. 

Lys'tra. A city of Lycaonia, rendered memorable 
by the miracle there wrought upon the lame man by 
Paul and Barnabas, which made the Lycaonians think 
the gods had come down to them in the likeness of men 
(Acts xiv. 10, 11), and for the circumcision of Timothy 
(Acts xvi. 1). This city was south of Iconium, but its 
exact site is uncertain, as well as that of Derbe, men- 
tioned with it. 

Macedonia. A vast province or kingdom of Greece, 
formerly called JEmathia: and from the king? of M;-.ce- 
don, Macedonia. It was bounded on the north by the 
mountains of Haemus. on the south by Epirus and 
Achaia, on the east by the iEgean, and on the west by 
the Ionian and Adriatic Seas. Macedonia was the ori- 
ginal kingdom of Philip and Alexander, by means of 
whose victories the name of the Macedonians became 
celebrated throughout the East, and is often used for the 
Greeks in Asia generally. It is celebrated in all histo- 
ries for being the third kingdom, that, under Alexander 
the Great, obtained the empire of the world, and had 
under it one hundred and liny nations. Macedonia was 
subdued by the Romans under Paulus iEmilius, B. C. 
163. and divided into four provinces. It was not. how- 
ever, reduced into a province of the Roman empire 
until twenty years after, when the whole of Greece was 
divided into two great provinces. Macedonia and Achaia. 
Therefore in the time of Christ and his apostles Mace- 
donia was a Roman province, and governed by a procon- 
sul. To this country, whose metropolis was then Thes- 
salonica, St. Paul was called by a vision (Acts xvi. 9) ? 
and the churches planted by him were celebrated for 
their great charity and ready contributions to the dis- 
tressed Jews in Jndea (2 Cor. viii. 9), when they them- 
selves lay under the extremest poverty. 

Mag'dala: A town in Galilee mentioned in Matt. 



128 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

xv. 39, situated beyond Jordan, on the bank of Gedara. 
It is l*be supposed birthplace of Mary Magdalene, from 
which sbe took her surname. It readied to the bridge 
above Jordan, which joined it to the other side of Gal- 
ilee, and contained within its precincts Dalmanutha; 
hence, while Matthew says (xv. 19), Christ came into the 
coast of Magdala, St. Mark says, more particularly 
(viii. 10), that he came into the parts of Dalmanutha. 

Kitto and some others place Gedara on the western 
shore of Lake Gennesareth ; but after a careful consid- 
eration of the route of Christ before he came to this 
place, and after he left it, we are inclined to credit the 
views of Bagster and Dr. Lightfoot, who claim that it 
was situated on the south-east side of the Lake of Gen- 
nesareth, a Sabbath day's journey, or two miles, from 
Chammath, and one mile from Jordan ; and many Jew- 
ish writers confirm this view, while the Jerusalem Tal- 
mud (compiled at Tiberias) several times speaks of 
Magdala as adjacent to Tiberias. This was also prob- 
ably the Migdal-el, in the tribe of Naphtali, mentioned 
in Josh. xix. 38. 

Me'dia (Acts ii. 9) was a vast region of Asia, east of 
Armenia and Assyria, and north of Persia. It had its 
name from Madai, the son of Japhet, mentioned in Gen. 
x. 2. In the Babylonian captivity, the Jews were car- 
ried captive into Assyria, and placed in the cities of the 
Medes (2 Kings xvii. G. and xviii. 11). Hence we find 
many of them and their proselytes at Jerusalem when 
the Holy Ghost fell on the apostles. 

Mel'ita. An island in the Mediterranean Sea, on 
which the ship was wrecked (Acts xxviii. l-lOj which 
was conveying St. Paul as a prisoner to Home, and which 
was the scene of the interesting circumstances recorded 
in Acts xxvii. The learned Mr. Bryant, Dr. Hales, and 
some others have attempted to show that this island was 
in the Adriatic Gulf; but the general opinion of modern 
critics and geographers is in favor of Malta, which lies 
in the Mediterranean, about sixty miles south from Cape 
Passaro, in Sicily. It is about twenty miles in length 
and twelve miles in breadth. The island makes no 
figure from the sea, having no mountains or high hills. 
It was naturally a barren rock, but the industry and toil 
of man have rendered some parts of it abundantly fer- 
tile. The name St. Paul's Bay has been given to the 
place where the vessel is supposed to have been wrecked. 
The island was firat colonized by the Phoenicians, from 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 129 

whom it was taken by the Greek colonists in Sicily, 
B. C. 736. It was afterwards possessed by the Cartha- 
ginians, from whom it was taken by the Romans about 
B. C. 242. The government was administered by a pro- 
praetor, dependent upon the praetor of Sicily ; and this 
office appears to have been held by Publius when Paul 
was on the island (Acts xxviii. 7). 

The government having undergone many changes till 
A. D. 1530, Charles V., who had annexed it to the Ger- 
man empire, transferred it to the Knights of St. John of 
Jerusalem, whom the Turks had recently dispossessed 
of Rhodes. The order of St. John, commonly called 
Knights of Malta, gradually fell into decay, and the 
island was surrendered to fche French under Bonaparte, 
when on his way to Egypt, in 1798. 

From the French it was retaken by the English, with 
the consent and concurrence of the natives, and was to 
have been restored to the Knights of Malta by the stipu- 
lations of the treaty of Amiens ; but the order being com- 
posed mostly of Frenchmen, from whom no satisfactory 
security for the independence of the order could be ob- 
tained, the English retained it in their hands, which ne- 
cessary infraction of the treaty was the ostensible ground 
of the war which ended with the signal defeat of the 
French under Bomiparte at the battle of Waterloo, in 
Belgium, June 18, 1815. 

Mesopotamia. A famous province, situated between 
the Rivers Tigris and Euphrates, The Hebrews call it 
Aram jVaharaim, or Aram of the Rivers, because it was 
first peopled by Aram, father of the Syrians, and is situ- 
ated between two rivers. 

This country is celebrated in Scripture as the first 
dwelling of men after the deluge, and as the birthplace 
of Phaleg, Heber, Terah, Abraham, Nahor, Sarah, Re- 
bekah, Rachel, Leah, and the sons of Jacob. Babylon 
was in ancient Mesopotamia till, by vast labor and in- 
dustry, the Euphrates and Tigris were reunited in one 
channel. The plains of Shinar were also in this country. 
It was often called Mesopotamia Syriaa, because it was 
inhabited by Aramaeans, or Syrians, and sometimes 
Padan Aram (Gen. xxviii. 2), or the plains of Aram ; or 
Sede-Aram, the field of Aram, to distinguish them from 
the barren and uncultivated mountains of the same coun- 
try. Balaam, son of Beor, was of Mesopotamia (Deut. 
xxiii. 4). Chushan-rishathaim, King of Mesopotamia, 
subdued the Hebrews (Judges iii. 8). "Dwellers in 



130 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

Mesopotamia " were among the multitude assembled at 
Jerusalem on the day of Pentecost (Acts ii. 9 ; see also 
Acts vii. 2). 

Mid'ian, in Arabia Petrsea. The land into which 
Moses tied from tiie Egyptians (Acts vii. 29), and where 
he lived with Jetiiro, liis father-in-law, till he was sent 
back to deliver Israel (Ex. ii. 15, &c). 

The people were descended from Madian, the son of 
Abraham and" Keturah (Gen. xxv. 2), whence we have 
reason to believe they still retained the worship of the 
true God. 

Milk'tus. A city and seaport of Ionia, in Asia Minor, 
about thirty-six miles south of Ephesus. St. Paul 
touched at this port on his voyage from Greece to Syria, 
and delivered to the elders of the church of Ephesus, 
who had come to meet him there, that affecting and re- 
markable discourse recorded in Acts xx. 17-35. 

In this city were born Thales, one of the seven wise 
men, Anaxnnander, his disciple, Timotheus, the celebrat- 
ed musician, and Anaximenes, the philosopher. There 
was another Miletus, in Crete, where St. Paul leftTroph- 
iuius sick (2 Tim. iv. 20). 

Mityle'ne. A large and beautiful city, the capital of 
the Island of Lesbos, in the JEgean Sea, about seven and 
a half miles from the opposite point on the coast of Asia 
Minor. It was the birthplace of Pittacus, one of the 
wise men, Alcaeus, the poet, Diophanes, the orator, and 
Tiieophanes, the historian. It' it had that name in St. 
Pauls time, we may understand St. Luke to mean either 
the island or the city when lie says (Acts xx. 14), 4t We 
came to Mitylene." 

My'ka was one of the six great cities of Lycia, situ- 
ated near the sea; whence St. Luke says (Acts xxvii. 5), 
that »• sailing over the Sea of Citicia and Pamphylia, 
they came to Jlyra in Isysia." 

Mys'ia. A province of Asia Minor, south of Bithynia, 
and west of Pnrygia Minor. It was visited by St. Paul 
(Acts xv i. 7, 8). 

Na'in. A small city or town of Galilee, not far from 
Capernaum, at the gates of which Jesus Christ raised to 
life a widow's only son (Luke vii. 11-15). 

Naz'areth. A small city of Lower Galilee, celebrated 
as having been the place where our Saviour was edu- 
cated, where he preached, and whence he was called a 
Nazarene. It is situated about six miles west from Ta- 
bor (Matt. ii. 23 ; Luke iv. 16). In the time of Christ it 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 131 

did not possess the best of characters (John i. 46). It 
was from a hill which overlooks the town the inhabitants 
would have precipitated him headlong (Luke iv. 29). 

Neap'olis. A maritime city of Macedonia, near the 
borders of Thrace, now called Napoli. Also a new name 
given to Shechem when rebuilt. (See " Shechem.") Paul 
landed here on his first journey into Europe (Acts 
xvi. 11). 

Nicop'olis. A city of Thrace. In Titus iii. 12, Paul 
expresses his intention of wintering here, and invites 
Titus, then in Crete, to join him at this place. 

Ol'ivet, or Mount of Olives, so called for its nu- 
merous olive trees, was about one mile from Jerusalem ; 
and from hence our Lord ascended into heaven (Acts i. 
12). See also "Jerusalem." 

Pa'dan A 'ram. See "Mesopotamia." 

Pamphyl'ia. A province in the southern part of Asia 
Minor, having to the south the Pamphylia Sea, men- 
tioned in Acts xxv ii. 5, Cilicia to the east, Pisidia. to the 
north, — whence we find St. Paul passing through Pi- 
sidia to Pamphylia (Acts xiv. 24;, and from Pamphylia to 
Pisidia (Acts xiii. 14), — and Lycia to the west. The 
cities mentioned in Scripture as belonging to it are 
Perga and Attalia (Acts xiv. 25;. 

Here many Jews resided, and hence those of Pam- 
phylia are mentioned among those who appeared at Je- 
rusalem on the day of Pentecost (Acts ii. 10) ; and Chris- 
tianity was probably first preached in this country by 
some of the Jewish proselytes converted at that time. 

Pa'phos. The metropolis of Cyprus, at the western 
extremity of the island, and the residence of the Roman 
proconsul (Acts xiii. 4, 6). Paphos was memorable for 
a temple of Venus, whose infamous rites and impure 
worship were practised here four hundred years after- 
wards, notwithstanding the success of Paul and Barnabas 
and others in preaching the gospel. 

Here St. Paul struck blind Elymas, the sorcerer, and 
converted Sergius Paulus, the proconsul. The Jews 
dwelt here in great numbers (ver. 16). Twenty-five or 
thirty miserable huts are all that remain of this once most 
distinguished city of Cyprus. 

Par'thia. The country of the Parthians, mentioned, 
in Acts ii. 9, as being, with their neighbors the Medes and 
Elamites, present at Jerusalem on the day of Pentecost. 
The term originally applied to a small mountainous dis- 
trict lying to the north-east of Media. About 256 13. C. 



132 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

Arsaces rose against the Syro-Macedonian power, and 
commenced a new dynasty in his own person, designated 
by the title of Arsacidaj. This was the beginning of the 
great Parthian empire, which extended itself, in the early 
days of Christianity, over all the provinces of what had 
been the Persian kingdom, being separated from the do- 
minions of Kome on the west by the Euphrates. It was 
divided into eighteen provinces. The Parthians were 
often in open hostilities with Home, and were sometimes 
tiie victors and then the vanquished, yet they were never 
subjugated by the Romans. The Parthians were cele- 
brated for their veneration for their kings, and their way 
of righting by flight, and shooting their arrows back- 
wards. 

The Parthians were at length conquered by Artaxerxes, 
A. 1). 229, who represented himself to be a descendant 
of the ancient Persian kings, and who succceeded to all 
the dominions of the Parthian kings, and founded the 
new Persian empire. 

Pat'ara. A seaport in Lycia, Asia Minor, situated 
at the mouth of the River Xanthus. It had a famous 
ti mple and oracle of Apollo. It was here that St. Paul, 
on his voyage i<> Jerusalem, changed his ship for one 
bound to Phoenicia (Acts xxi. 1, 2). 

Pat'mos. An island in the iEgean Sea. The island is 
said tv) be rocky and fare, and on account of its desolate 
character was used, when under the Roman empire, as a 
plaee of banishment; hence it was that St. John was ex- 
iled thither "for the testimony of Jesus" (Rev. i. 9) 
about A. 1). U-4. It was here that he had the revelation 
which he has recorded in the Apocalypse. 

Per'ga. A city of Pamphylia (Acts xiii. 13), rnemo- 
ral le among the heathen for a temple of Diana built 
there, and among the Christians for the departure thence 
of John Mark from Barnabas and Paul to Jerusalem, 
which occasioned the rupture between them for a season 
(Acts xv. o7, 40). 

Per'gamos, or Per'gamus, was the ancient metropolis 
of Mysia, the residence of the Attalian kings, and a seat 
of literature and the arts. King Eumenes, the second 
of the name, greatly beautified the town, and increased 
the library of Pergamos so considerably that the number 
of volumes amounted to two hundred thousand. The 
library was at length removed from Pergamos to Egypt 
by Antony, who presented it to Queen Cleopatra. As 
the art of cleaning and preparing sheep and goat skins, 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 133 

to be used for manuscripts, was brought to perfection at 
Pergamos, they, from that circumstance, obtained the 
name of pergamena, or parchment. Pergamos, under 
the name of Bergamo, is a place of considerable impor- 
tance. 

One of the seven churches in Asia, to which the 
Apocalypse is addressed, was in Pergamos. This 
church was commended for its fidelity and firmness 
(Rev. ii. 13). 

Philadelphia. A city of Lydia, in Asia Minor, and 
a seat of another of the seven Asiatic churches to which 
the Apocalyptic admonitions were addressed. 

It was situated about twenty-five miles south-east from 
Sardis. Not long before the writing of the Apocalypse, 
the city having suffered so much from earthquakes, it 
was to a great extent abandoned by its inhabitants, 
which may, in a measure, account for its poverty, and its 
poverty may also, in some degree, account for its virtue, 
which is so highly commended (Rev. iii. 7-13). Gib- 
bon says, " Among the Greek colonies and churches of 
Asia, Philadelphia is still erect — a column in a scene 
of ruins." Whatever may be lost of the spirit of Chris- 
tianity, there is still the form of a Christian church in 
this city, which yet exists as a Turkish city, under the 
name of Allah Shehr (" city of God "), i. e. High-town. 

Philip'pi was a city of Macedonia Prima, or the first 
of the four parts into which that province was divided. 
It was of moderate extent, and situated on the confines 
of Thrace. 

It was formerly called Crenides, or Krenides, from its 
numerous springs, and afterwards Datus, from the coal 
mines in its vicinity ; but having been taken and forti- 
fied by Philip of Macedon, he named it after himself, 
Philippi. It eventually became celebrated for the battle 
in which Brutus and Cassius were defeated, B. C. 42. 
Julius Caesar planted a colony here, which was after- 
wards enlarged by Augustus, and hence its inhabitants 
were considered as freemen of Rome. It was here that 
the interesting circumstance occurred which is related 
in Acts xvi. 

The city was again visited by St. Paul on his depart- 
ure from Greece (Acts xx. 6). 

Phce'nice, or Phceni'cia. A province of Syria, which 
extended from the Gulf of Issus, where it bounded Cili- 
cia on the north, along the coast southwards, to the ter- 
mination of the ridges of Libanusand Anti-Libanus, near 



134 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

Tyre, where it met the border of Palestine. Its princi- 
pal cities are Tyre and Sidon, which see. See also 
Acts xxvii. 12, and xi. 19. 

Phryg'ia. An inland province of Asia Minor, divided 
into the Greater and Lesser. The former had Bithynia on 
the north, Galatia on the east, Pamphylia and Lycia on 
the south, and Lydia and Mysia on the west. 

Its chief cities, mentioned in Scripture, are Laodicea 
and Hierapolis (Col. ii. 1); and of this St. Luke seems 
to speak in Acts ii., because he joins it with Pamphylia, 
below it. 

Phrygia Minor is referred to in Acts xvi. 6, 18, also in 
ver. 22, where he says they passed through Phrygia and 
Galatia. 

Pisid'ia. A country in Asia Minor, lying mostly on 
Mount Taurus, between Pamphylia, Phrygia, and Lycao- 
nia. Its chief city was Antioch in Pisidia (Acts xiii. 14), 
so called to distinguish it from Antioch in Syria. 

Pon'tus. Ad extensive province of Asia Minor, south 
of the Euxine Sea. It is supposed St. Peter preached in 
Pontus, beeause he addresses his First Epistle to the be- 
lieving Hebrews, who were scattered throughout this and 
the neighboring provinces. It was also the birthplace of 
Aquila (Acts xviii. 2). 

Ptolema'is, anciently called Accho (Judges i. 31), 
and now known by the name of Acre, was a maritime 
city of Judea, on the shore of the Mediterranean Sea, on 
the confines of Upper and Lower Galilee. It received its 
name from one of the Ptolemies. Here St. Paul rested 
for one day on his journey from Ephesus to Jerusalem 
(Acts xxi. 7). 

It was during the crusades the scene of many san- 
guinary conflicts between the infidels and Christians. 

Acre is celebrated for the repulse given there to Na- 
poleon Bonaparte b} r the Turks under Sir Sidney Smith, 
who, after a long and memorable siege, compelled the 
French to retire with great loss, and ultimately to aban- 
don Syria. 

Pute'oli. A maritime city of Campania, in Italy, on 
the north shore of the Bay of Naples, and about eight 
miles north-west of the city of that name, where it still 
exists under the name of Pozzuoli. Here the apostle 
Paul abode seven days, by the favor of the centurion, on 
his first journey as a prisoner to Rome (Acts xxviii. 13). 

Rhe'gium. A port town in Italy, opposite to Sicily. It 
is now called Reggia, and is the capital of Calabria. 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 135 

Here St. Paul staid but one day (Acts xxviii. 13), 
and accomplished nothing which St. Luke saw fit to 
record. 

Rhodes. An island and a city in the Mediterranean 
Sea, near the coast of Asia Minor. It is said to have de- 
rived its name from the great abundance of roses that 
grew there. St. Paul passed through Rhodes on his way 
to Jerusalem from Miletus (Acts xxi. 1). 

Rome. The metropolis of the world during the period 
comprised in the New Testament history. According to 
the chronology of Archbishop Usher, Rome was founded 
by Remus and Romulus, B. C. 748, towards the close of 
the reign of Hezekiah, king of Judah. The city is so 
well known, it seems useless to give an extended account 
of it here. The sacred writers of the Old Testament 
have never mentioned it, but it frequently occurs in the 
books of the New Testament. St. Peter (1 Pet. v. 13) 
denoted it by the figurative name of Babylon. 

St. John, in his Revelation (xiv. 8, xvi. 19, xvii. 5, 
xviii. 2, 10, 21), points it out by the same name, and de- 
scribes it in such a manner as can only agree to Rome. 

1. By its command over all nations; 

2. By its cruelty towards the saints ; and 

3. By its situation upon Seven Hills (Rev. xvii. 9). 
In A. D. 61, St. Paul came to Rome as a prisoner, after 

he had appealed to Caesar, and again probably in A. D. 
65, a year before his martyrdom. St. Peter is also sup- 
posed to have suffered martyrdom at Rome in A. D. 66. 

Nero sets fire to the city of Rome, A. D. 64, and throws 
the blame on the Christians. 

Sal'amis, one of the chief cities of Cyprus, on the 
south-east coast of the island (Acts xiii. 5). It was 
afterwards called Constantia, and in still later times, 
Famagusta. 

Sa'lem. The city of Melchisedek, generally believed 
to be Jebus, or the ancient Jerusalem, which see. 

Sxi'lim. A place near Enon, where John baptized 
(John iii. 23). 

Salmo'ne. A seaport city at the eastern extremity of 
the Island of Crete (Acts xxvii. 7). 

Sama'ria, the ancient capital of the kingdom of Is- 
rael, is frequently mentioned in the Old Testament. It 
was built by Omri, king of Israel, about B. C. 925, on a 
mountain or hill of the same name. The hill was pur- 
chased from its owner, Shemer, from whom it derived its 
name (1 Kings xvi. 23, 24). Samaria continued to be 



136 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

the capital of Israel and the seat of idolatry for about 
two centuries, until Shalmaneser carried away the ten 
tribes beyond the Euphrates, B. C. 721 (2 Kings xvii. 3, 
G), and replaced them by a mixed people. It seems to 
have arisen again from its ruins during the reign of Alex- 
ander, after whose deatli it was subject to the Egyptian 
and Syrian kings, until it was besieged, taken, and razed 
to the ground by Hyrcanus after a year's siege, B. C. 
110 (Micah i. 6, 7). It was afterwards wholly rebuilt 
and considerably enlarged by Herod the Great, who gave 
it the name of Sebaste, and erected a temple there in 
honor of the Emperor Augustus. The whole city was 
greatly ornamented, and became a strong fortress. 

The Samaritans could not, however, be induced to 
offer sacrifices in their new temple, but still continued to 
worship on Gerizim. 

Such was the Samaria mentioned in the New Testa- 
ment, where the gospel was preached by Philip, and a 
church founded by the apostle (Acts viii. 5, 9). Shecbem, 
now called Nabnlus, is the present place of abode of the 
Samaritans. They still possess a copy of the Mosaic 
law, which is the only portion of Scripture they ever 
received or acknowledged. It is highly improbable the 
Israelites, when carried away captive into Assyria, took 
with them all the copies of the law; thus we infer that 
the Samaritan, as well as the Jewish copy, originally 
flowed from the autograph of Moses. 

Sa'mos. An island of the Archipelago, on the coast of 
Asia Minor, on which St. Paul went ashore as he was 
going to Jerusalem (Acts xx. 15). 

Samothra'cia. An island in the north-east part of 
the iEgean Sea, with a lofty mountain and city of the 
same name. The island was celebrated for the mysteries 
of Ceres and Proserpine, and was a sacred asylum. St. 
Paul, departing from Troas for Macedonia, arrived first 
at Samothracia, and then landed in Macedonia (Acts xvi. 
11). It received its name from the circumstance of its 
being peopled by Samians and Thracians. 

Sar'dis, the royal city of Lydia, in Asia Minor, was 
celebrated anciently for its great wealth and importance. 
It was the object of much cupidity and many sieges. 
When taken by Cyrus, under Croesus, its last king, who 
has become proverbial for his riches, Sardis was one of 
the most splendid and opulent of Eastern cities. It sub- 
sequently passed to the Romans, under whom it rapidly 
declined until the time of Tiberius, when (A. D. 17), it 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 137 

was, with eleven other Asiatic cities, destroyed by an 
earthquake, but was rebuilt by order of the emperor. 
The inhabitants of Sardis bore an ill repute among the 
ancients for their voluptuous habits of life. It was the 
seat of another of the Apocalyptic churches (Rev. iii. 
1-6). Successive earthquakes, and the ravages of the 
Saracens and Turks, have reduced this once flourishing 
city to a heap of ruins. The habitations of the living 
form only a wretched village, called Sart. 

Sarep'ta, or Zarep'tha. A town between Tyre and 
Sidon. It was the place where Elijah, dwelling, was 
preserved by the widow's cruse of oil and barrel of 
meal that wasted not (1 Kings xvii. 9; Luke iv. 26). 

Sa'ron. A spacious and fertile vale, between Lydda 
and the sea, which contained several villages. Peter's 
miraculous healing of the paralytic Eneas at Lydda was 
the means of bringing the inhabitants of Saron to the 
saving knowledge of the gospel (Acts ix. 35). 

Seleu'cia. A city and district of Syria, near the Oron- 
tes River, near the sea coast, west of Antioch. 

It is sometimes called Seleucia Pieria, to distinguish it 
from several other cities of the same name. Paul and 
Barnabas on their first voyage embarked from this port 
for Cyprus (Acts xiii. 3, 4). 

She'chem, or Si'chem. A city of high antiquity, sit- 
uated in Samaria, among the mountains of Ephraim (Josh. 
xx. 7), and consequently within the tribe of Ephraim 
(Josh. xxi. 20). It is about thirty-four miles north of 
Jerusalem, and seven miles south of Samaria. It was 
here that Abraham sojourned, and where Jacob's sons 
slew Hamor (Gen. xii. 6, xxxiv. 1, &c). During the 
lifetime of Joshua, Shechem, being the nearest consider- 
able town to the residence of that chief in Timnath- 
serah, was a centre of union to the tribes (Josh. xx. 7, 
xxi. 21, xxiv. 1, xxv), During the judges, it became 
the capital of the kingdom set up by Abimelech (Judges 
ix. 1), who at length conquered and destroyed it (Judges 
ix. 34). It was soon rebuilt, and became a town of some 
importance ; for Rehoboam, at the time of his accession, 
here gave the meeting to the delegates of the tribes 
which ended in the division of the kingdom, B. C. 975 
(1 Kings xii. 10). The first monarch of the new king- 
dom made this the capital of his dominions (1 Kings xii. 
25), although later in his reign he built him a palace, 
and made the summer residence of his court at Tirzah, 
which place became of so much importance as to be 



138 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

regarded as the capital of the kingdom until Samaria 
deprived it of that honor (1 Kings xiv. 17, xvi. 24). In 
the vicinity of this place is Jacob's well, memorable for 
our Saviour's conversation with the Samaritan woman 
(John iv. G). In the New Testament it is called by the 
name of Sychar, although Stephen, in his historical ret- 
rospect (Acts vii. 1G), uses the ancient proper name. 
See " Neapolis." 

Si'don, or Zi'don, a very ancient and celebrated city 
in Phoenicia. Justin derives its name from the Phoenician 
word fish, but Josephus from the eldest son of Canaan, 
by whom it was founded. 

It is situated on the Mediterranean, a day's journey 
from the springs of Jordan, and has an excellent harbor. 
This city has always been famous for its great trade and 
navigation. The best vessels in the fleet of Xerxes were 
Sidonian. The inhabitants were very early celebrated 
on account of their luxury (Judges xviii. 7). It still 
subsists under the name of Saide, or Seide. (See Matt, 
xi 21 ; Acts xxvii. 3.) 

Sil'oam. A fountain under the walls of Jerusalem, 
east and between that city and the Brook Kidron. It is 
supposed to be the same as the fountain En-rogel, or the 
Fuller's Fountain (Josh. xv. 7, xviii. 1G; 2 Sam. X vii. 
17, and 1 Kings i. 9). The spring issues from a rock, 
and runs in a silent stream, according to the testimony 
of Jeremiah. The pool, or rather two pools of the same 
name are situated near the spring. The most remark- 
able feature is the ebb and tlow of the waters, some- 
times discharging a current like the fountain of Vau- 
cluse, at other times retaining and scarcely suffering it 
to run at all. The pools are still used for washing linen, 
as formerly. The water of the spring is brackish, and 
has a very disagreeable taste ; and people still bathe their 
eyes in it in memory of the miracle performed there on 
the man born blind (John ix. 7), 

On the last day of the feast of tabernacles, which 
was a day of great festivity among the Jews, it was the 
custom to bring water from this pool, some of which 
they drank with loud acclamations of joy and thanks- 
giving, and some they brought to the altar, where it was 
poured upon the evening sacrifice. During this solemn 
offering, the people sang with transports of joy the 
twelfth chapter of Isaiah's prophecy, and particularly the 
third verse. To this custom, no doubt, our Lord al- 
ludes in John vii. 37 ; it was observed in commemora- 



GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 139 

tion of their forefathers being miraculously relieved 
when they thirsted in the wilderness. 

Sl'OH. See " Zion." 

Smyr'na. A city of Asia Minor, situated about forty- 
five miles nortli of Ephesus, of which city it was for- 
merly a colony. Smyrna was a very ancient city, but 
having been destroyed by the Lydians, it lay waste about 
four hundred years, to the time of Alexander the Great. 

It was rebuilt at a distance of about two and one half 
Roman miles from the ancient city, and in the time of 
the first Roman emperors was one of the finest cities of 
Asia. It is now celebrated for the number, wealth, and 
commerce of its inhabitants. It early became the seat 
of a Christian church, which is noticed in the Apoca- 
lypse as one of " the seven churches in Asia" (Rev. i. 

11, ii. 8-11). It was destroyed by an earthquake in 
A. D. 177, but was rebuilt by order of the Emperor Mar- 
cus Aurelius, with more than its former splendor. It is 
said to be a better built town than Constantinople, and 
in proportion to its size, there are few places in the Turk- 
ish dominions that have so large a population, it being 
computed at one hundred and thirty thousand, about 
twenty-five thousand of whom are Christians, in com- 
munion with the Greek church. The Christians here 
are in better condition than in any other of the "seven 
churches." It is supposed to be the place where Poly- 
carp, the disciple of St. John and bishop of Smyrna, 
and probably " the angel of the church of Smyrna " 
(John ii. 8), to whom the Apocalyptic message was ad- 
dressed, suffered martyrdom. The Christians of Smyr- 
na hold the memory of this venerable person in high 
esteem, and go annually to his supposed tomb, which is 
at a short distance from the place of martyrdom. 

Sod'om. A city in the vale of Siddim, where Lot 
settled after his separation from Abraham (Gen. xiii. 

12, xiv. 12, xix. 1). It had its own king, as well as the 
other four cities of the plain (Gen. xiv. 2, 8, 10), and 
was, along with them, Zoar only excepted, destroyed by 
fire from heaven, on account of the gross wickedness 
of its inhabitants (Gen. xix.). The peculiar solemnity 
with which the destruction of Sodom is introduced, and 
the circumstances which precede and follow it, as re- 
corded in Gen. xviii. 25-33, and chap, xix., should claim 
special attention. It is not our purpose to give, in this 
work, the theories of different writers as to the physical 
agencies through which this overthrow was effected. It 



140 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL, 

has, however, been established by Dr. Robinson, that a 
lake to receive the Jordan and other waters must have 
occupied this basin long before the catastrophe of Sod- 
om, but of less extent. 

Spain. The name originally given to the whole of 
the peninsula now occupied by Spain and Portugal. In 
the time of the apostles, and until A. D. 410, Spain was 
a Roman province, and many Jews were settled there. 
It seems certain from Rom. xv. 24, 28, that Paul once 
formed the design of visiting Spain and preaching the gos- 
pel there. But whether he ever executed these intentions 
is not positively known. Those who hold that he suf- 
fered but one imprisonment at Rome — that in which the 
Acts of the Apostles leave him — deny this, of course ; 
but those who claim that he was twice imprisoned, con- 
jecture that after he was released, and during the inter- 
val between the first and second imprisonment, he ex- 
ecuted this intention. But the evidences are hardly 
sufficient to warrant the latter conclusion. Doddridge 
infers from Rom. xv. 20, that no Christian church had 
been formed in Spain before the time mentioned in verse 
xxiv., although an ancient legend makes James to have 
resided there fifteen years. 

Sy'char. See " Shechem." 

Svr'acuse. A strong, wealthy, and populous city on 
the south-east of the Island of Sicily. 

Syracuse remained an independent state, under its own 
kings, until about B. C. 200, when it was taken after a 
siege rendered famous by the mechanical contrivances 
whereby Archimedes protracted the defence. It still ex- 
ists as a considerable town, under its ancient name. St. 
Paul spent three days at Syracuse, after leaving Melita, 
when being carried prisoner to Rome. 

Syr'ia. In Hebrew called Aram, from the son of Shem 
(Gen. x. 22). It was a country in Asia comprehended 
between the Euphrates on the east, the Mediterranean 
on the west, Cilicia on the north, Phoenicia, Judea, and 
Arabia Deserta on the south. It was divided into sev- 
eral cantons or provinces, which derived their names 
from their situation with respect to certain rivers or 
cities. As most of these provinces are noticed under 
their respective names, it seems unnecessary to repeat 
them here. The Syro-Phoenician woman is so called by 
Mark (vii. 26) because she was of Phoenicia, which was 
then considered as part of Syria. St. Matthew calls her 






GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF PLACES. 141 

a Canaanitish woman (xv. 22, 24), because this country 
was really peopled by the Canaanites. 

Ta'bor, or Tha'bor, is a mountain of conical form, 
entirely detached from any neighboring mountain, situ- 
ated on the confines of Zebulun and Naphtali, on the 
north-east border of the plain of Esdraeloo. It is com- 
puted to be nearly one mile in height. Here Barak was 
encamped, when, at the suggestion of Deborah, he de- 
scended, with ten thousand men, and discomfited the 
host of Sisera (Judges iv.). 

On the top of the mountain is an oval plain, covered 
with a fertile soil. On the eastern side may be found a 
mass of ruins, the vestiges of churches, grottos, and 
strong walls, all decidedly of some antiquity. It is now 
conceded that, at the time of our Saviour, the top of this 
mountain was covered with a walled and fortified city. 
This city was known to exist as late as sixty years after 
the birth of Christ. This and other circumstances seem 
to contradict the commonly received idea, that it was on 
this mountain where our Saviour was transfigured in the 
presence of Peter, James, and John (Matt. xvii. 1-8) ; 
for it is manifest that the transfiguration occurred in a 
solitary place, from the word *' apart," and from the fact 
that Peter proposed to build three tabernacles on the 
spot. This mountain is several times mentioned in the 
Old Testament (Josh. xix. 12, 22 ; Judges iv. 6, xii. 14, 
&c), but not in the New. 

The prospects from this mountain are said to be singu- 
larly delightful and extensive. To the south lie the 
mountains of Egedda and Samaria; to the north-east 
appears Mount Hermon, beneath which were Nain and 
Endor ; to the north lie the Mount of the Beatitudes 
(in the vicinity of which Christ miraculously fed the 
multitude), and the mountains of Gilboa, so fatal to 
Saul. 

The Sea of Tiberias is clearly discovered towards 
the north-east, terminated by the snow-capped Hermon 
(Light's Travels, p. 200). Mount Carmel is to the 
south-west, and conceals the Mediterranean. 

Tar'sus, the metropolis of Cilicia (Acts xxi. 39), was 
celebrated for being the place whither Jonah designed to 
flee, and where St. Paul was born. It was a very rich 
and populous city, and excelled in all arts of polite learn- 
ing and philosophy ; and it is said that even Alexandria, 
Athens, and Rome itself, were indebted to Tarsus for their 
best professors. 

Thessaloni'ca. A large and populous city and sea- 



142 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

port of Macedonia, situated at the mouth of the River 
Echedorus. It had its name from Thessalonice, tie wife 
of Cassander, who built the city on the site of the ancient 
Thermae, after which town Sin its Therrnaicus was called. 
The modern name of this place is Salonichi; it is the 
chief port of modern Greece. When St. Paul came hither 
from Philippi, where the gospel was first preached, to 
communicate the " glad tidings" to the Thessalonians, 
the Jews were sufficient in number to " set the whole city 
in an uproar" (Acts xvii. 1-9). 

Three Tav'ebns. A town in Italy, so sailed, perhaps, 
from its having three houses for the entertainment of 
travellers. Hither the Christians of Rome came to meet 
Paul on his way to Rome as a prisoner (Acts xxvii. 15). 

Tiivati'ka. A considerable city of Asia Minor, on the 
road from Pergamos to Sardis, and about twenty-seven 
miles from the latter. It was anciently, and is still, 
noted for its art of dyeing, as appears from Acts xvi. 14. 

Tibe'rias A city of Galilee, built by Herod the Great, 
and so called in honor of the Emperor Tiberias. It was 
situated on the Lake of Gennesareth (which see), which 
is thence termed the Lake or Sea of Tiberias (John vi. 
1-23, xxi. 1). It is about ninety miles distant from 
Jerusalem ; the modern town stands close to the lake, 
upon a small plain surrounded by mountains, and is cele- 
brated for its hot baths, which are much frequented. 
After the destruction of Jerusalem, it became the chief 
city of Judea. 

Tka( uoni'tis. A rough and mountainous country 
east of Iturea, and belonging to the tetrarchy of Herod 
Antipas (Luke iii. 1). The rocks with which it abounded 
afforded shelter for numerous thieves and robbers. 

Tro'as. A province and city of Lesser Asia. Paul is 
said to have twice visited this place (Acts xvi. 8, 9, xx. G ; 
2 Cor. ii. 12 ; 2 Tim. iv. 13). Sometimes the name is used 
to include the whole country of the Trojans. Troas is 
usually supposed to have been the ancient Troy. 

Trogyl'lium. A promontory near the foot of Mount 
Mycale, and about five miles from Samos (xlcts xx. 15). 

Tyre. A celebrated city of Phoenicia; its Hebrew 
name. Tsor, signifies a rock (its true designation) ; but it 
became a place of great trade and opulence, and conse- 
quently of great vice (Isa. xxix. 1; Heb. ix. Ii, 12, 23). 

Za'reptha. See " Sarepta." 

Zi'on. A mountain fortified by the Jebusites, but on 
which David built his palace, and called it the city of 
David. 



SYNCHRONOLOGY 

OF THE PRINCIPAL 

EVENTS IN SACRED AND PEOFANE HISTORY, 

FROM THE BIRTH OF JULIUS C^SAR, B. C. IOO, 
TO THE DEATH OF ST. JOHN, A. D. IOO. 



Present reigning Sovereigns of the principal Nations of 

the Earth. 
B.C. 

100 Egypt. — Alexander and Cleopatra, since B. C. 107. 
Syria. — Antiochus VIII., Grypus, since B. C. 123. 
Judea. — Alexander Janneus, since B. C. 106. 
Rome. — Consular government, since the expulsion 
of the Tarquins, B. C. 509, after which Rome con- 
tinued independent until the battle of Pharsalia, 
B. C. 48. 
Italy. — C. Marius is rewarded with a sixth consulate. 
He was the pride and hope of the popular party, 
and noted for his courage, talents, and rude mili- 
tary virtue, joined to rough manners, hatred of the 
nobles, and contempt for their cultivation and re- 
finement. Through his assistance the popular par- 
ty had gained the superiority, and the aristocracy 
were induced to array themselves around Corne- 
lius Sylla, a politic and ambitious man, who united 
in himself the cultivation and love of art of the 
nobles, with their vices and excesses. 
From this time two powerful political parties stood 
opposed to each other in arms, which finally result- 
ed in the perilous social wars that soon followed. 
Birth of Julius Cassar. 
99 Alexander Janneus, king of the Jews, attacks Gaza, 
and demolishes it. 

143 



144 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

B. C. 

99 China still submits to the Han dynasty ; Sematzin 
emperor. 

97 By the death of Ptolemy Apion, Cyrene becomes a 
Roman province. 
Syria, death of Antiochus VIII. He is succeeded 
by his son, Seleucus VI., Nicator. 

95 Alexander Janneus, after various transactions, some 
successful and others unsuccessful, is opposed, at 
the temple, during the feast of the tabernacles, by a 
mutiny of the Jews, of whom he slays six hundred 
men. 

94 He subdues the inhabitants of Gilead and the Moab- 
ites. 

93 Seleucus is defeated and succeeded by Antiochus Eu- 
sebes, and burned in Mopsuestia. 
Tigranes king of Armenia. 

92 Antiochus, brother of Seleucus, and second son of 
Grypus, assumes the diadem. He is presently de- 
feated by Eusebes, and drowned in the Orontes. 

(H Alexander Janneus having ill success in war against 
Obodas, an Arabian king, the Jews make war 
against him. This war continued six years. 
Antiochus is succeeded by Philip, his brother, third 

son of Grypus. 
The social war begins in Italy, and continues three 
years, till finished by Sylla, the celebrated Roman 
general. 
Ariarathes VIII., king of Cappadocia. Mithridates, 
king of Pontus, puts him to death, and sets his son 
upon the throne. 
Ariarathes IX. takes Cappadocia from the son of 
Mithridates : he is soon afterwards reestablished by 
his father. 

90 Sylla enters Cappadocia, drives the son of Mithri- 
dates out of it, and sets Ariobarzanes I. upon the 
throne. 
Demetrius Euchares, fourth son of Grypus, is estab- 
lished king of Damascus, by the aid of Lathyrus. 

89 Alexander kills his mother Cleopatra; he is expelled, 
and dies soon after. 
Tigranes, king of Armenia, drives Ariobarzanes out 
of Cappadocia, and reinstates the son of Mithri- 
dates. 
Beginning of the war between Mithridates, king of 
Pontus, on the Biack Sea, and the Romans. 



SYXCHRONOLOGY. 145 

B.C. 

88 By the orders of Mithridates, all the Roman subjects 
in Western Asia, 80,000 in number, were put to 
death in one frightful day of slaughter. 
Anna, the prophetess, daughter of Phanuel, of the 
tribe of Asher, this year becoming a widow, departs 
not from the temple, but serves God with fasting 
and prayer, night and day, for eighty-four years 
together, until sucli time as she sees Christ in the 
temple (Luke ii. 37). 

87 The Roman Senate gives the command against Mith- 
ridates to Sylla, who had distinguished himself in 
the social war, and been rewarded with a consu- 
late. Marius envied his opponent this Asiatic cam- 
paign, and during Sylla's absence secured the pas- 
sage of a resolution by the people, securing to 
himself the appointment to conduct the war. Sylla 
returned with his army to Rome, from Lower Italy, 
and had Marius and eleven of his confederates out- 
lawed as traitors to their country. Marius escapes 
into Africa. 
Sylla now passed ever into Greece, stormed Athens, 
seized upon the treasures of the temple of Delphi, 
and overthrew the generals of the king of Pontus in 
two engagements. He sent the valuable library to 
Rome. 
Sylla marched through Macedonia and Thracia into 
Asia Minor. 

86 Marius, having returned from the ruins of Carthage 
into Jtaly, and surrounded himself with a band of 
desperate men, marched to the gates of Rome. 
The city, weakened by dissensions and famine, 
was compelled to surrender; upon which Marius 
gave free course to his thirst for vengeance ; after 
which he had himself chosen consul for the seventh 
time, but died about two weeks after, from the 
effects of excitement and a dissolute life. 
Sylla gains a victory over the generals of Mithrida- 
tes near Cheronea, and soon after at Orchomenas. 

85 Demetrius having been taken by the Parthians, Anti-. 
ochus Dionysius, the fifth son of Grypus, is set 
upon the throne of Syria, and killed the following 
year. 

84 Treaty of peace between Mithridates and Sylla, which 
terminated the war, which had cost the lives of one 
hundred thousand men. 
10 



146 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

B.C. 

83 Sylla landed in Italy, after the termination of the first 
Mithridatic war, and marched, with the support of 
the aristocracy, upon Koine, and in a murderous 
battle before the gates of the city, annihilated the 
Marian party and the rebellious Samnites, eight 
thousand of whom he slaughtered before the eyes 
of the Senate. 
Mithridates puts his son to death. 
The Syrians, weary of so many changes, choose Ti- 

granes, king of Armenia, for their king. 
Eusebes takes refuge in Cilicia, where he remains 
concealed. 

82 Sylla is named dictator for an indefinite period ; he 
proclaims the Cornelian law, by which the whole 
power of the government fell into the hands of the 
aristocracy, and the influence of the tribunes was 
destroyed. 
Latbyrus ruins Thebes, in Egypt, where the rebels, 

whom he had before defeated, had taken refuse. 
Decline of agriculture in Italy ; corn supplied from 
the provinces. 

81 Death of Lathyrus. Alexander II., son of Alexander 
I., under the protection of Sylla, is elected king. 

80 Julius Caesar's first campaign. 

79 Posidonius, a philosopher of Apamea, calculates the 
height of the atmosphere to be about four hundred 
stadia, nearly agreeing witli the ideas of moderns. 
Alexander Janneus dies, after many successes and 
cruelties, and is succeeded in the regal authority 
by his wife Alexandra, who, conciliating the Phari- 
sees, reigns peaceably over Judea to the end of her 
life. 

78 Sylla, having retired to his estate, died of a frightful 
distemper. 
Second war between Mithridates and the Romans. It 
lasted nearly three years. 

77 The Pharisees, managing the affairs of Alexandra, 
grievously oppress their opponents. 
Sertorius, a Roman general in Spain, having rebelled 
against the government of Sylla, defeated every 
army sent against him. 

76 Mithridates makes an alliance with Sertorius. 

Death of Nicomedes, king of Bithynia. His kingdom 
and Cyrenaica are reduced to Roman provinces the 
same year. 



SYNCHRONOLOGY. 147 

B.C. 

75 Beginning of the third war of Mithridates against the 
Romans. 
Lucullus and Cotta are placed at the head of the Ro- 
man army. 
74 Cotta is defeated by sea and land, and forced to shut 
himself up in Chalcedon. Lucullus goes to his aid. 
The cherry tree brought to Europe about this time, 

from Asia, by Lucullus. 
M. Terentius Varro, one of the most learned of the 
Romans, writes three books on agriculture, which 
have been handed down perfect to the present time. 
73 The servile war, under Spartacus, a Thracian shep- 
herd and gladiator, commences, and continues two 
years. 
Mithridates forms the siege of Cyzicum. Lucullus 
compels him to raise it, at the end of two years, 
and pursues and beats *him near the Granicus. 
72 Herod the Great is born. 

Sertorius assassinated by his lieutenant, Pompey 
killed the assassin, when he gave himself up, and 
destroyed all the documents he brought with him. 
71 Spartacus defeated and killed by Crassus and Pom- 
pey, which finishes the servile war. Spain com- 
pletely recovered. 
70 Alexandra dies. Hyrcanus seizes the kingdom, but 
is soon deprived of it by Aristobulus, his younger 
brother. 
Damascus possessed by the Romans. 
Pompey and Crassus consuls. 
69 Tigranes recalls Magdalus, his viceroy in Syria. 

Antiochus Asiaticus takes possession of Syria, and 
reigns four years. 
Lucullus defeats the two kings, Mithridates and Tigra- 
nes, in a great battle in Armenia, the day before 
the nones of December, and takes Tigranocerta, 
with all the royal treasures. 
67 Mithridates recovers all his dominions in consequence 
of the misunderstanding that takes place in the 
Roman army. 
Pompey conquers the pirates of the Mediterranean. 
66 Mithridates defeated by Pompey in a night battle in 
the Upper Armenia. Crete conquered by Metul- 
lus, after a war of two years, and reduced to a Ro- 
man province. 
Ebony introduced at Rome by Pompey. 



148 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

B.C. 

66 Vikramadity, a king of Ozcne, in India, patron of 

literature. 
65 Pompey the Great, after many conquests, reduces 
Syria to a Roman province, thus terminating the 
Macedonian or Grecian kingdom, and establishing 
that of the Romans, the fourth great monarchy in 
Daniel's prophecy (Scott). 

Alexander is driven out of Egypt. Ptolemy Auletes, 
natural son of Lathyrus, is set in his place. 

Antiochus XII. defeated by Pompey. The race of 
the Seleucidas becomes extinct. 

Ariobarzanes II. king of Cappadocia. 
64 Armenia Minor seized by the king of Galatia. 
63 The conspiracy of Catiline detected by Cicero in Oc- 
tober, and defeated by Antony about the middle 
of December. 

Pompey appealed to by Hyrcanus and Aristobulus, 
and promising to arbitrate between them, discovers 
that Aristobulus is preparing for war ; and in conse- 
quence marches against Jerusalem, and takes it 
after a siege of three months, and restores Hyrcanus. 
At this time he enters into the holy of holies, and 
many have remarked that he never after prospered 
in any N undertaking. From this period the Jews be- 
came dependent on the Romans, after having been 
for a long time independent, by reason of the weak- 
ness of the Syrian and Egyptian kings. 

Augustus Caesar born. 

Mithridates stabs himself and dies. 
62 Magnificent houses of the nobles. Marble theatre of 

Scaurus, to hold thirty thousand spectators. 
61 Pompey enters Rome in triumph. 
60 Cicero, statesman and orator, Sallust, historian, Lu- 
cretius and Catullus, poets. 

The first triumvirate, in the persons of Julius Caesar, 
Pompey, and Crassus. 

Reign of Sciold, first king of Denmark. The Danish 
chronicles mention eighteen kings to the time of 
Ragnor Lodbrog, A. D. 750. 
58 Clodius procures the banishment of Cicero. 

The Helvetii defeated by Julius Caesar. 

Ptolemy Auletes goes to Rome. Berenice, his eldest 
daughter, reigns in his absence. 

The Romans depose Ptolemy, king of Cyprus, and 



SYNCHRONOLOGY. 149 

B.C. 

seize that land. Cato is charged with that commis- 
sion. 

57 Cicero recalled from banishment. 

Sallust expelled from the Senate. Gylf reigns in 
Sweden. The early history of Sweden is involved 
in fable and obscurity. 
Gabinius, a Roman commander, defeats Alexander, 
and besieges him in the castle of Alexandrion. 
Alexander surrenders, with all his strong places. 

56 Aristobulus escapes, returns into Judea, and endeav- 
ors to repair the castle of Alexandrion ; is hin- 
dered by the Romans, who put his little army to 
flight. He flies to Machaeron with a design to for- 
tify it, but is presently besieged in it. After some 
resistance, he is taken and sent a second time pris- 
oner to Rome. 
Pompey makes himself master of Caina, in which the 
treasures of Mithridates were laid up. 

55 Caesar passes the Rhine, defeats the Germans and 
Gauls, and invades Britain. 
Ptolemy Auletes, king of Egypt, by money induces 
Gabinius to come into Egypt to restore him to the 
throne. John Hyrcanus furnishes Gabinius with 
provisions for his army, and writes to the Jews in 
Pelusium to favor the Romans. 
Gabinius and Antony restore Auletes to the entire 

possession of his dominions. 
While Gabinius is in Egypt, Alexander, son of Aristo- 
bulus, wastes Judea. Gabinius defeats him at the 
foot of Mount Tabor. 

54 Caesar invades Britain a second time, and conquers 
part of it. 
Crassus succeeds Gabinius in the government of 
Syria. Passing into Syria and finding the province 
quiet, he makes war with the Parthians. 

53 He comes to Jerusalem, and takes ten thousand tal- 
ents out of the temple. He marches against the 
Parthians, is defeated and killed, and his army 
cut to pieces by the Parthians under Surenas, at 
Sinnaca, in Mesopotamia, June 9. 

52 Pompey sole consul. 

51 Death of Ptolemy Auletes. He leaves his dominions 
to his eldest son, and eldest daughter, the famous 
Cleopatra. 



150 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

B.C. 

51 Caesar completes the conquest of Gaul, which becomes 

a Roman province. 
50 The Roman civil war begins on the 22d of October, 
when the Senate ordered Caesar to disband his army. 

Caesar • besieges Pompey in Brundusium, Decem- 
ber 26. 

A water mill on the Tiber at Rome. 
49 Pompey sails from Brundusium January 3. Caesar 
enters it on the 4th, and comes to Rome about the 
19th. He besieges Marseilles in the spring, and 
defeats Pompey's lieutenants in Spain in the sum- 
mer. Returns to Rome in September, and passes 
into Epirus October 15. 
48 Battle of Pharsalia, between Julius Caesar and Pom- 
pey, in which the former obtained a great and mem- 
orable victory, May 12. Caesar's loss was but about 
twelve hundred, while Pompey is reported to have 
lost twenty-five thousand, besides twenty-four thou- 
sand prisoners. Pompey flees into Egypt, where 
lie is treacherously slain by order of Ptolemy the 
younger, then a minor, and his naked body thrown 
upon the strand, where it lay till it was burned by his 
faithful freedman Philip. Antipas, or Antipater, 
made governor of Judea. 

Ponthinus and Achillas, the young king's guardians, 
deprive Cleopatra of her share in the government, 
and drive her out of the kingdom. 

The Alexandrian library of four hundred thousand 
volumes burned. 
47 Death of Ptolemy Dionysius, king of Egypt. 

Ca?sar places Cleopatra upon the throne with Ptolemy, 
her youngest brother. m 

The war of Alexandria. That city taken by Julius 
Caesar. He conquers Pharnaces, king of Bos- 
phorus. 

Caesar, having finished the war in Egypt, comes into 
Syria. Confirms Hyrcanus in the high priest- 
hood. 

Antigonus, son of Aristobulus, remonstrates to 
Caesar, but Caesar is prejudiced against him by 
Antipater. 

Antipater takes advantage of the indolence of Hyrca- 
nus, makes his eldest son, Phazael, governor of 
Jerusalem, and Herod, another of his sons, gov- 
ernor of Galilee. 



SYNCHRONOLOGY. 151 

B.C. 

47 Herod is summoned to Jerusalem to give an account 
of his conduct; but finding himself in danger of 
being condemned, retires to his government. 
46 Caesar passes into Africa. Cato fortifies himself in 
Utica. On the approach of Caesar, he disdains to 
flee, and, rather than fall alive into the conqueror's 
hands, he stabbed himself, after he had read Plato's 
treatise on the immortality of the soul, and died 
February 5, in the fifty-ninth year of his age. 

This year is called the year of confusion, because the 
calendar was corrected by Sosigenes, an Egyptian 
astronomer. He proposed to regard the year as con- 
sisting of three hundred and sixty-five and a quarter 
days, and to keep the average year accurate by the 
intercalation of one day in four years. 
45 The first Julian year began January 1. 

Hyrcanus sends ambassadors to Julius Caesar to re- 
new alliances, which was done in a manner very 
advantageous to the Jews. 

Caesar rebuilds Carthage and Corinth. 

Battle of Munda, fought March 17, between Caesar 
and the republican forces of Rome, under Labienus 
and the sons of Pompey. Caesar obtained the vic- 
tory after an obstinate and bloody battle, and by 
this blow put an end to the Roman republic. Pom- 
pey lost thirty thousand men, and Caesar only one 
thousand, and five hundred wounded. 

Julius Caesar at this time is made perpetual dictator 
of Rome, and the empire of the Caesars begin. 
44 Antipater, by permission from the Romans, rebuilds 
the walls of Jerusalem. 

Caesar killed in the Senate House by Brutus, Cas- 
sius, and the other conspirators, having killed eleven 
hundred and ninety-two thousand men. 

After the death of Julius Caesar, the ambassadors of 
the Jews are introduced into the Senate, and obtain 
their whole request. 

The Jews of Asia confirmed in their privilege of not 
being compelled to serve in the wars. 

A comet seen in China. 
43 Cleopatra poisons her brother when he comes of age 
to share the sovereign authority according to the 
laws. She afterwards declares for the Roman tri-? 
umviri. 



152 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

B. C. 

43 The second triumviri of Octavius, Antony, and Lepi- 
dus began November 27. 
Cicero put to death December 7. 
Battle of Mutina. 

Cassius demands seven hundred talents from Judea. 
Malchus causes Antipater to be poisoned, but his sons, 
Phazael and Herod, revenge his death by that of 
the murderer. 
42 Antigonus,. son of Aristobulus, excites disturbances 
in Judea; but is vanquished by Herod. 
Cassius and Brutus defeated at Phiiippi in two bat- 
tles, having an interval, in October. Cassius orders 
one of his frecdmen to kill him, which he does with 
the same sword that wounded Caesar. Brutus, af- 
ter the death of his friend Cassius, kills himself 
by falling upon his own sword. 
41 Cleopatra goes to Antony at Tarsus, in Cilicia. She 
gains the ascendant of him, and carries him with 
her to Alexandria. 
The short Persian war, in which Antony's brother 
Lucius is overpowered by Octavius. 
40 The Parthians, having obtained many advantages 
against the Romans, slay Phazael, make Ilyrcanus 
prisoner, and appoint Antigonus king of Judea; but 
Herod, fleeing to Rome, is there constituted king by 
the ruling party. 
39 Herod besieges Jerusalem. 

Lepidus is expelled from the triumvirate. 
Pacorus, general of Parthia, defeated by Ventidius, 
fourteen years after the disgrace of Crassus, and on 
the same day. 
37 Jerusalem taken by Socius and Herod the Great, 
being by birth an Edomite, and a Jew only as pros- 
elyted. This terminates the government of the 
Maccabees. 
36 Sextus Pompeius conquered in Sicily. 

Cleopatra obtains from Antony a grant of Phoenicia, 
Cyrene, and Cyprus. 
33 Antony makes himself master of Armenia, which be- 
comes a Roman province, and brings the prisoners 
to Cleopatra. Coronation of Cleopatra and all her 
children. 
Rupture between Caesar and Antony. Cleopatra ac- 
companies the latter, who repudiates Octavia at 
Athens. 



SYNCHIiONOLOGY. 153 

B.C. 

32 War begins between Octavius and Antony. 

32 Atticus, a Roman knight and author, whose works 

are lost, dies, aged seventy-seven years. 
31 Battle of Actium, between the fleets of Octavianus 
Caesar on the one side and Mare Antony and Cleo- 
patra on the other; and which decided the fate of 
Antony, three hundred of his galleys going over to 
Caesar. Fought September 2, This battle made 
Augustus (the title afterwards conferred by the Sen- 
ate upon Caesar) master of the world ; and the com- 
mencement of the Roman empire is usually dated 
from this year, the republic becoming a monarchy. 

Marc Antony drives Ariarathes out of Cappadocia, 
and sets Archelaus in his place. On the death of 
that prince, Cappadocia becomes a Roman prov- 
ince. 

At the instance of Marc Antony, Herod attacks and 
subdues Malchus, king of Arabia Petrea. 

Octavius (afterwards Augustus Caesar), having van- 
quished Mark Antony, Herod with difficulty suc- 
ceeds in making his peace with him. 

Herod seizes Hyrcanus, who attempted to take shel- 
ter with the king ot the Arabians, and puts him to 
death. 
30 Herod goes to Rome to make his court to Augustus. 
Obtains the confirmation of the kingdom of Judea. 

Antony, being falsely informed of the death of Cleo- 
patra, attempts to kill himself. His wound not 
being mortal, he is carried to Cleopatra, who drew 
him up by a cord from a window of the monument 
where she had concealed herself. Here Antony 
soon after died of his wounds in the arms of the 
queen. 

Cleopatra destroys herself by the bite of an asp, not 
to fall into the hands of her conqueror. 

Egypt is reduced to a Roman province at her death. 

Golden age of Roman literature. 

First standing army in Rome. 

Silk and linen manufactories in the Roman empire. 

The end of the kings of Alexandria, two hundred and 
ninety-three years after the death of Alexander the 
Great, who died on his return to Babylon, April 21, 
323 B. C, at the age of thirty-two years and eight 
months. 

Direct trade of Rome with India. 



154 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

B.C. 

29 Ephesus, next to Alexandria, the chief place of trade 
in the Eoman empire. 

Octavius's three days' triumph at Rome. 

The temple of Janus closed, there being now a gen- 
eral peace. 

Rome contains four millions one hundred and one 
thousand and seventeen citizens. 

Augustus comes into Syria, passes through Palestine, 
and is magnificently entertained by Herod. 

Herod, in a furious rage and jealousy, puts to death 
Mariamne, his beloved wife, who was descended 
from the Maccabees. 
28 And the year after, Alexandra, her mother. 
27 Octavius, by a decree of the Senate, January 13, le- 
gally obtains the title of Augustus Caesar, and the 
absolute power of the state. 

Treasures of Egyptian art brought to Rome. 

The Pantheon built. 
26 Herod, to conciliate the Romans, occasionally con- 
forms to heathen observances, winch greatly dis- 
gusts the Jews. 

Salome, Herod's sister, divorces herself from Costo- 
barus. 
25 Herod rebuilds Samaria, and calls it Sebaste, from 
the Greek word Sebastos, or August, which was the 
title given to the Roman emperor. 

In the same year he takes great care to relieve the 
Jews, under the pressure of a grievous famine, 
which conciliated their minds towards him. 

The Egyptians adopt the Julian year. 

About this time flourished Ovid, Tibullus, Propertius, 
and ^Emilius Macer, poets ; Livy, historian ; Mecae- 
nas, minister of Augustus, patron of literature; 
Varrus and Tucca, critics; Strabo, geographer; 
Agrippa, warrior, and patron of the arts, &c. 

Coin first used in Britain. 

The Germans withstand the attempts of the Romans 
to subdue them, although they conquer some part 
of them. 
22 Pantomimic dances on the Roman stage. 

Herod undertakes several buildings, contrary to the 
religion of the Jews. He builds Csesarea of Pales- 
tine. 

The conspiracy of Muraena against Augustus. 
21 Augustus visits Greece and Asia. 



SYXCHRONOLOGY. 155 

B. C. 

21 Athens finally subjected to Borne. 
20 Augustus gives Trachonitis to Herod. 
One hundred and ninetieth Olympiad. 
The Roman ensign recovered from the Parthians by 
Tiberius. 
19 Aqueducts constructed by Agrippa. 

Herod undertakes to rebuild the temple at Jeru- 
salem. 
P. Virgilius Maro (Virgil), called the prince of Latin 
poets, born at Andes, a village near Mantua, seventy 
years B. C, on October 15, died September 22, 
aged fifty-one years. His Georgics, written a few 
years after the ten Bucolics, is considered the most 
perfect of all Latin composition. The iEneid, his 
great epic poem, was begun, as some suppose, at 
the particular request of Augustus. 
18 Juba, king of Mauritania, and historian, died. 
17 The secular games celebrated at Rome. 

Dedications of books first introduced. 
16 Herod makes a journey to Rome to recommend him- 
self to Augustus. 
Lollius defeated by the Germans. 
15 Cantabria, Austrin, Rhoebia, Vindelencia, and Moesia 
become Roman provinces, being conquered by Dru- 
sus. 
Herod marries his two sons, Alexander and Aris- 
tobulus. 
14 Herod comes to meet Agrippa, and engages him to 
visit Jerusalem. 
Polemon conquers Bosphorus. 
13 Augustus assumes the title of Pontifex Maximus. 
Domestic divisions in Herod's family. Salome, Phe- 
roras, and Antipater at variance with Alexander and 
Aristobulus. 
12 The legions distributed over the provinces in fixed 
camps, which soon grew into cities. Among them 
were Bonn and Mayence. 
Caeeilius Lsidorus, of Rome, left to his heirs four thou- 
sand one hundred and sixteen slaves. 
Pannonia, conquered by Tiberius, becomes a Roman 
province. 
11 Germany subdued by Germanicus. 

Herod goes to Rome and accuses his two sons, Alex- 
ander and Aristobulus, to Augustus. 



156 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

B.C. 

10 The solemn dedication of the city of Caesarea, that 

Herod had built in honor of Augustus. 
9 Augustus continues the Jews of Alexandria in their 
ancient rights and privileges. 

Herod causes David's tomb to be opened to take out 
treasure. 

New disturbances in Herod's family. 
8 Archelaus, king of Cappadccia, goes to Rome with 
Herod. He reconciles his son-in-law Alexander to 
his father Herod. 

Temple of Janus shut by Augustus. 

Augustus corrects the calendar by ordering that the 
next twelve years be without intercalation. 

The style was altered by ordering leap year to be ob- 
served but once in four years, and the month Sex- 
tilis to be called Augustus. 

Horatius Quintus Flaccus (Horace), a celebrated 
Latin poet, born at Venusia, a town of Apulia, 
B. C. 65; died aged fifty-seven. 
7 Herod makes war in Arabia. 
G He is accused to Augustus of killing several Arabs. 

Tiberius retires to Rhodes for seven years. 
5 Herod condemns and slays his two sons, Alexander 
and Aristobulus. 

Antipater, son of Herod, aims at the kingdom. 

The artifices of Antipater are discovered. 

Herod sends Antipater to Rome. 

The census or register of estates and families through- 
out Judea was made at this time; but the taxes 
were not imposed or collected until some years 
after. 

Q. Varrus appointed governor of Judea. 

The angel appears to Zacharias while offering incense 
in the temple, and informs him of the approaching 
conception and birth of his son John the Baptist 
(Luke i. 2(5). 
4 Cymbeline, king of Britain. 

Birth of John the Baptist, six months before the birth 
of Jesus. 

Jesus Christ born at Bethlehem about the close of the 
four thousandth year of the world, and the fourth 
year before the vulgar Christian era. 
3 Circumcision of Jesus Christ. 

Purification of the Holy Virgin. Jesus presented in 
the temple forty days after his birth. 



SYXCHROXOLOGY. 157 

B.C. 

3 Flight into Egypt. 

Herod in vain attempts to murder the infant Saviour, 
but cruelly massacres the male children near Beth- 
lehem. He puts his son Antipater to death on an 
accusation of treason and parricide, and five days 
after dies himself, in the most dreadful manner. 

Archelaus goes to Rome to procure of Augustus the 
confirmation of Herod's will in his favor. 

Archelaus succeeds Herod, his father, in Judea. Idu- 
mea, and Samaria. Herod Antipas in Galilee and 
Petraea, and Philip in Auronitis, Trachonitis, Paneas, 
and Batanaea. 

Mary, with the child Jesus, returns out of Egypt, and 
settles at Nazareth, in Galilee. 
2 An impostor assumes the character of Alexander, 

son of Herod and Mariatnne. 
1 Archelaus takes the high priesthood from Joazar, and 
gives it to Eleazar. 
A~ D- The Vulgar iEra, or Anno Domini; the fourth 
year of Jesus Christ. 

1 Caius Caesar makes war with the Parthians. 

2 Tiberius returns to Rome. 

4 The leap year corrected, having formerly been every 

third year. 
6 Quintus Varrus. encamped on the TVeser, governs 
Lower Germany like a Roman province. 

8 Archelaus. the son of Herod, having been convicted 

of maladministration in his government, is deposed 
and banished into Gaul; and Judea is made a prov- 
ince of the Roman empire by Quirinius, or Cyre- 
nius, governor of Syria, who first levied the taxes 
according to the census, or register, before made; 
and Coponius is placed over it. Thus the sceptre 
was departing from Judah, for Shiioh was come, 
though not manifested. 

In this year. Jesus, being twelve years old. went up to 
Jerusalem, and at the temple sat in the midst of 
teachers of the law, both hearing them and asking 
them questions. 

Judas the Gaulonite, as he is termed by Josephus, 
opposed the levying of taxes by Cyrenius ; but he 
was soon cut off, and all his followers dispersed. 

9 The Germans under Arminius defeat and kill Varrus. 
Ovid is banished to Tonios. 



158 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

A. D. 

9 Cornelius Celsus, the physician ; Phaedrus, the fabu- 
list; Velleius Paterculus, Roman historian. 
10 Marcus Ambivius succeeds Coponius as procurator 
of Judea. 

12 Tiberius is admitted to share the authority with Au- 

gustus, whence it is supposed his fifteen years are 
dated (Luke iii. 1.). 

13 Annius Rums succeeds Marcus Ambivius. 

14 Augustus dies at Nola, and is succeeded by Tiberius, 

his adopted son, 

15 Who appoints Valerius Gratus procurator of Judea. 
The age of Asinius Gallus and Germanicus. 

17 Twelve cities in Asia destroyed by an earthquake. 
Germanicus conquers Cappadocia. 

19 Germanicus, poisoned by Piso, dies at Antioch. 
The Jews banished from Rome. 

The Marcomanni conquered by Drusus. 

20 Tiberius expels from Italy all who profess the Jewish 

religion or Egyptian superstitions. 

21 Arminius killed. 

The theatre of Pompey destroyed by fire. 
23 Valerius Gratus removes Annas, the high priest, and 
substitutes Ismael, the son of Fabus. 
Eleazar, the son of Annas, is made high priest. 

25 Simon, the son of Camith, is made high priest in the 

place of Eleazar. 

26 Joseph, surnamed Caiaphas, the son of Annas, is made 

high priest instead of Simon. 

The retreat of Tiberius to Capreae. 

The Druids in Germany. 

Pontius Pilate is made procurator of Judea, and in 
the same year John begins his ministry. 

Jesus, entering upon the thirtieth year of his age, 
comes from Galilee to the Jordan, and is baptized 
of John ; at which time a most illustrious manifes- 
tation is made of the blessed Trinity ; for the Son 
of God ascending out of the water, and praying, 
the heavens are opened, and the Spirit of God, in 
the shape of a dove, descends upon him ; and the 
voice of the Father is heard from heaven, saying, 
" This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well 
pleased." Luke iii. 22. (Doddridge.) 

27 Fifty thousand men are said to have been killed by 

the fall of an amphitheatre at Tridena. 



SYXCHRONOLOGY. 159 

A. D. 

27 Great fire in Rome, which consumed all the quarter 

of Mount Celius. 

28 John the Baptist slain by order of Herod Antipas, at 

the instigation of Herodias, in the seventeenth year 
of Tiberius. (This was the seventeenth of his prin- 
cipality, but the fifteenth of his monarchy, for he 
was joint emperor with Augustus prior to the death 
of the latter.) 
Transfiguration of Christ. 

29 Revolt of the Frisians, which is soon terminated. 
Conquest of Mauritania. 

Jesus retires to Ephraim, on the Jordan, to avoid the 
snares and malice of the Jews at Jerusalem. 

He comes to Jerusalem, to be present . at his fourth 
and last passover. Institutes the Lord's Supper ; 
is betrayed and crucified. His resurrection and 
appearance to many. Ascension into heaven, and 
the miraculous effusion of the Holy Ghost. (The 
date of the crucifixion varies in different chronol- 
ogies, being placed in some as late as 33.) 

Miserable death of Judas, the traitor. 

About this time flourish Philo, Alexandrian Jew, dis- 
ciple to Plato ; Seneca, moral philosopher ; Vale- 
rius Maximus, historian, and Appion, of Alexandria, 
grammarian, called the '* Trumpet of the World." 

After Christ's ascension, the apostles are warned by 
two angels to depart, and to set their minds upon 
his second coming ; they accordingly return, and 
giving themselves to prayer, choose Matthias to be 
an apostle in place of Judas. 

On the day of Pentecost (May 24), the Holy Spirit 
descends on the apostles in the form of cloven 
tongues, like as of fire, enabling them so to speak, 
that people of all nations heard them in their own 
language. Peter the same day preached Christ and 
the resurrection, and declares that this was what 
the prophet Joel had foretold (Joel ii. 28), and shows 
that Jesus, whom they crucified, was the true Mes- 
siah, and had risen from the dead. About three 
thousand believers are added to the church (Acts ii.). 

Peter and John heal a man at the gate of the temple 
who had been lame from his birth (Acts iii.). 

The rulers of the Jews, offended by Peter's sermon 
and the miraculous cure of the lame man, cast 
Peter and John into prison, and when brought be- 



160 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

A. D. 

fore the Sanhedrim for trial, they boldly avouch 
the lame man was healed by the name of Jesus, 
and declare their resolution to persist in preaching 
in his name. They are severely threatened and 
dismissed (Acts iv.). 

30 Ananias and Sapphira are suddenly struck dead for 

hypocrisy. The apostles are again apprehended by 
the high priest and cast into prison, but are set at 
liberty by an angel. Being again found teaching in 
the temple, they are brought before the council, 
but by the prudent advice of Gamaliel, a Pharisee 
and doctor of the law, are discharged. 

31 The number of believers increasing at Jerusalem, the 

apostles ordain seven deacons, who should distrib- 
ute the alms of the whole church to the widows 
and poorer sort of believers. Stephen, one of 
these deacons, disputing strenuously with the Jews, 
is brought before the Sanhedrim. Being accused 
of blasphemy, he makes a long defence, but is in- 
terrupted in it, and tumultuously stoned to death, 
Saul heartily concurring in the execution (Acts 
vi., vii.). 

A great persecution of the church at Jerusalem fol- 
lows the death of the first martyr, Stephen, where 
Saul makes havoc of the church, who are all dis- 
persed but the apostles, and go into other parts 
and preach the word (Acts viii. 1-5). Philip, one 
of the seven deacons, preaches Christ at Samaria, 
where many are converted. 

Simon, the sorcerer, seeing the wonders that are 
done by Philip, professes to believe, and is baptized. 

The apostles at Jerusalem, hearing that Samaria had 
received the word, send Peter and John to confirm 
and enlarge the church. Simon Magus offers the 
apostles money for power to confer the Holy Ghost; 
his hypocrisy is detected, and he is sharply re- 
buked by Peter. Having preached the word in 
many villages in Samaria, the two apostles return 
to Jerusalem (Acts viii. 5-15). 

Sejanus, a native of Tuscany, who had distinguished 
himself at the court of Tiberius, is seized by order 
of the emperor, and strangled in prison the same 
day, for his conspiracy against Tiberius, whom he 
had before persuaded to retire to Capreae. 

Death of Nero, eldest son of Germanicus. 



SYNCHRONOLOGY. 161 

A. D. 

32 An angel sends Philip to teach and baptize the Ethi- 

opian eunuch (Acts viii. 26). 

33 Galba, afterwards emperor, is consul this year. 
Death of Drusus, son of Germanicus. 

Saul, setting out for Damascus with a commission 
from the high priest and the council to apprehend 
and bring bound to Jerusalem all Christians in 
those parts, is converted by Christ's appearing to 
him on the way, who bids him go to Damascus, 
where he should learn what he must do. Three 
days after, he is baptized, and preaches Christ at 
Damascus with great boldness, and confounds the 
Jews, proving that Jesus is the true Messiah 
(Acts ix.). 

He then goes into Arabia and preaches there ; from 
whence he returns to Damascus, where the Jews 
seek to kill him, but he makes his escape in the 
night (Gal. i. 17; 2 Cor. xi. 32, 33). 

35 Troubles and revolutions among the Parthians and 

Armenians. 

36 Commotions in Cappadocia, which are soon quelled 

by the Romans. 

Tiberius declares himself friendly to the Christians, 
and wishes to enroll Christ among the gods, but is 
opposed by the Senate. 

Fire at Rome, which destroyed part of the circus, and 
the quarter of Mount Aventine. 

Three years after Saul's conversion, he returns to 
Jerusalem, and is introduced by Barnabas to Peter, 
and James, the brother of our Lord, and remains 
with them fifteen days (Gal. i. 18) ; but being again 
in danger from the Jews, the brethren conduct him 
to Caesarea, and sent him away to Tarsus ; and from 
thence he travels into Syria and Cilicia. 

The persecution ceases, and the churches have rest, 
and are multiplied. 

37 Peter makes a journey through the neighboring parts, 

visiting the churches in Judea, Samaria, and Galilee. 
At Lydda he cures Eneas of the palsy, and raises 

Dorcas from the dead at Joppa (Acts ix. 32, 33). 
Tiberius dies. Caligula becomes emperor of Rome. 
Disgrace and death of Pilate. 

38 Caligula makes Herod Agrippa, grandson of King 

Herod- by his son Aristobulus, and nephew to 
Herod Antipas, who beheaded John the Baptist, 
11 



162 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

A. D. 

and brother of Herodias, and father to King Agrippa, 
tetrarch, or king, of Galilee. 

38 Matthew writes his Gospel about this time. 

The believers who had been scattered throughout 
Phenice and Cyprus, since the persecution which 
followed the martyrdom of Stephen, come now to 
Antioch, and preach the gospel to the Greeks there, 
having before preached to none but Jews. 

39 Herod the tetrarch goes to Rome, in hopes of obtain- 

ing some favor from the emperor ; but Caligula, be- 
ing prepossessed by Agrippa, banishes him to Lyons. 

40 The church at Jerusalem, hearing that a great num- 

ber of Greeks had believed at Antioch, send Barna- 
bas thither to confirm them. He goes to Tarsus, 
takes Saul along with him to Antioch, where they 
remain a whole year, converting multitudes to the 
faith. 

41 Cornelius, a devout centurion, by divine admonition 

sends to Joppa for Peter, who, in obedience to the 
divine command, comes with his messengers to 
Csesarea, preaches the gospel to him and his friends, 
though Gentiles, and receives them into the church 
by baptism (Acts x.). 

Peter returns to Jerusalem, is questioned by the breth- 
ren for conversing with the uncircumcised ; his ac- 
count of the matter being satisfactory, they acqui- 
esce, and bless God for his grace to the Gentiles. 

The emperor Caligula slain on the fourth day of the 
Palatine games. He is succeeded by his uncle 
Claudius Caesar. 

Seneca banished to the Island of Corsica. 

War of the Romans against the Germans and Jews. 

Mauritania reduced into a Roman province. 

The Jews quit Babylon, and retire to Seleucia. 

Claudius adds Judea and Samaria to Agrippa's do- 
minions. 

Agrippa takes the high priesthood from Cantharus, 
and gives it to Matthias. 

42 The disciples first called Christians at Antioch. 

43 Claudius invades Britain with his general, Plautius. 
Agrippa deprives Matthias of the priesthood, and be- 
stows it on Elioneus. 

Agabus comes to Antioch from Jerusalem, and fore- 
tells an approaching famine. A collection is 
resolved upon for the poor brethren in Judea, 






SYNCHRONOLOGY. 163 

X. D. 

which is sent to Jerusalem by the hands of Barna- 
bas and Saul. 

44 About this time, James, the brother of John, is be- 

headed by order of Herod Agrippa ; he also impris- 
oned Peter, who is delivered by an angel. The 
same Herod, not long after, being extravagantly 
applauded at Caesarea, is smitten by an angel of the 
Lord, and being eaten of worms, dies (Acts xii.). 

Barnabas and Saul, having executed their commission, 
and carried the contributions to the poor brethren at 
Jerusalem, return to Antioch, and bring with them 
John, surnamed Mark. 

Vespasian fought thirty battles with the Britons, took 
twenty of their towns, subdued two of the British 
nations, and possessed himself of the Isle of Wight. 

45 An eclipse of the sun occurs on the birthday of the 

Emperor Claudius. To prevent the superstitious 
drawing thence any inauspicious omens concerning 
him, he caused notice to be posted up some time 
before it happened, giving a physical explanation 
of the phenomenon. 

The dreadful famine predicted by Agabus rages in 
Judea (Acts xi. 27, 28). 

Vespasian general in Britain. 

Cuspius Fadus sent into Judea as governor. 

Barnabas and Saul being set apart, by order of the 
Holy Spirit, to preach the gospel to the Gentiles, 
attended by John, they plant the Christian faith in 
Seleucia, Cyprus, and other places. 

At Paphos they preach the gospel to Sergius Paulus, 
governor of that country. Elymas, a sorcerer, with- 
standing them, and endeavoring to turn away Ser- 
gius from the faith, is, at Saul's rebuke, struck blind. 
From this time Saul is called by his new name, 
Paul. 

From hence they sail to Perga, in Pamphylia, where 
John, departing from them, returns to Jerusalem. 

46 Paul and Barnabas go on to Antioch, in Pisidia, where 

Paul makes a long discourse in the synagogue. 
The Jews gainsay and blaspheme, but the Gentiles 
believe and desire to hear him again ; whereupon he 
and his associates turn to the Gentiles. A persecu- 
tion being raised against them by the Jews, they are 
driven away, and go to Iconium. Many converts 
are made there, both of Jews and Greeks. The 



164 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

A. D. ~~~^ 

unbelieving Jews stir up the multitude against them, 
and they depart to Lystra, where they cure a lame 
man, for which they are taken to be gods by the 
people, who are hardly restrained from sacrificing 
to them (Acts xiv. 18). 

46 The Jews, having followed them thither, persuade the 

people to stone Paul, who, being- left for dead, re- 
covers and goes with Barnabas to Derbe, from 
whence they return to Pisidia and Pamphylia; and 
sailing from Attalia, come back to Antioch, in Syria, 
where they call the church together, and report the 
wonderful success of their ministry among the 
Gentiles. 

Paul and Barnabas continued a long time with the 
disciples at Antioch. 

Cuspius Fadus recalled; the government of Judea 
given to Tiberius Alexander. 

Asinius Gallus, half brother to Drusus, son of Tibe- 
rius, conspires against the emperor, and is banished. 

Thrace, which had hitherto its own king, is made a 
Roman province. 

About this time a new island appears in the JEgean 
Sea. It is named Therasia by Seneca. 

47 The emperor takes upon himself the title of Censor. 
Secular games celebrated at Rome in honor of the 

eight hundredth year of Rome. 

Claudius adds three new letters to the Roman alpha- 
bet, the names of two of which only remain ; the 
JEolic digamma, which answers to our v ; and the 
Antisigma, which answers to a p and an s joined 
together. 

Many of the greatest men of Rome put to death by 
Claudius, to gratify the revenge and covetousness 
of Messalina, his wife. 

Commotions in the East, and in Germany. 

48 Claudius, the emperor and censor, causes a census of 

Rome to be taken, by which he finds the number 

of citizens to be six million nine hundred thousand. 
Herod, king of Chalcis, takes the pontificate from 

Joseph, son of Camides, and gives it to Ananias, 

son of Nebedeus. 
Herod, king of Chalcis, dies. 
Ventidius Cumanus made governor of Judea, in place 

of Tiberius Alexander. 



SYNCHRONOLOGY. 165 

A D. 

48 The Gauls admitted into the Senate, and to the digni- 

ties of the empire. 

49 London founded by the Romans. 

Troubles in Judea under the government of Cuma- 

nus. 
Seneca recalled from banishment, and made preceptor 

to A grip pa's son. 

50 Columella, born in Spain, left twelve books on hus- 

bandry. 
Cologne founded by Agrippina. 

51 Great dearth in the Roman empire. 

The Britons, making incursions into the Roman set- 
tlements, are vanquished by P. Ostorius Scapula, 
and Caractacus, the British king, sent in chains to 
Rome. 

The Jews expelled from Rome, under the reign of 
Claudius. 

Felix sent governor into Judea, instead of Cumanus. 

52 The Jewish converts urge the necessity of circum- 

cision. 

Debates arise at Antioch ; and Paul and Barnabas, 
with some others, are sent to consult the brethren 
at Jerusalem. Passing through Phoenicia and Sa- 
maria in their way, they come to Jerusalem, where 
the matter is debated in a full assembly. After 
Peter and James had spoken for their liberty, the 
celebrated decree is made in favor of the Gentile 
converts. 

They send back messengers, with Paul and Barnabas, 
with the decree, to Antioch. After making some 
stay there, Judas returns to the apostles, but Silas 
chooses to continue longer there. 

Peter comes down to Antioch, and is publicly re- 
proved by Paul for dissimulation in his conduct. 

Paul with Silas, and Barnabas with John, surnamed 
Mark, set out in different directions to visit the 
churches they had planted. 

Paul and Silas travel through Syria and Cilicia, and 
several provinces of the lesser Asia, and come to 
Derbe and Ly>tra ; where having associated Timo- 
thy with tiiem, they go on to Phrygia, Galatia. and 
Mysia, and from thence come to Troas, where they 
are called to Macedonia. Being joined by Luke at 
Troas, they sail from thence, and cross the sea to 



166 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

A.D. 

Europe, passing by Samothracia toNeapolis, where 
they land, and go to Philippi. 

52 The aqueduct at Rome, begun fourteen years before 

by Caligula, finished this year by Claudius. 

53 Nero's marriage with Octavia. 

Paul and his companions having preached at Philippi, 
Lydia is converted, and receives them into her 
house. They cast a spirit of divination out of a cer- 
tain maid servant who had brought her master much 
gain. The master, thereby losing considerable gain, 
brings Paul and Silas before the magistrates, who 
cause them to be scourged and thrown into prison. 
The jailer, ready to kill himself, is converted to the 
faith, and, with his whole household, baptized the 
same night. On pleading they were Romans, the 
magistrates come themselves the next day and dis- 
miss them ; and, having visited the brethren, they 
depart out of Philippi. 

Passing through Amphipolis and Apollonia, they 
come to Thessaloniea, where Paul having preached 
in the synagogue, and planted a Christian church, 
the unbelieving Jews stir up the mob against them, 
and oblige them to depart. 

Being come to Beraea, they are received more can- 
didly by the Jews there, many of whom, and of the 
Greeks, believe. But being followed thither by 
the Jews of Thessaloniea, Paul goes awa} T to Athens, 
appointing Silas and Timothy to follow him. 

Paul, greatly moved at the idolatry which prevailed 
at Athens, disputes with the philosophers, and de- 
clares unto them that unknown God whom they 
had ignorantly worshipped. He converts Dio- 
nysius the Areopagite, and then passes to Corinth, 
where he finds Aquila and Priscilla, and. lodging 
at their house, works as a tent-maker for the space 
of one year and six months, but preaches every 
Sabbath day to the Jews and Greeks. 

54 Silas and Timothy come to him here ; and Paul, re- 

jected by the Jews, turns to the Gentiles, many of 
whom believe and are baptized. Paul is accused 
by the Jews, and brought before Gallio, proconsul 
of Achaia. who refuses to be judge in a controversy 
about religion, and so drives them away from the 
judgment seat. 
Claudius, the emperor, dies, being poisoned by the 



SYNCHRONQLOGY. 167 

A. D. 

Empress Agrippina. He is succeeded by Nero, his 
wife's son, a profligate and bloody tyrant. 

55 Britannicus, son of Claudius Caesar by Messalina, 

poisoned by the emperor, his brother. 

War of the Romans against the Parthians. 

Paul departs from Cenchrea, where, in performance 
of a ^ ow which he had made, he shaves his head. 
From thence he sails to Ephesus, where he leaves 
Aquila and Priscilla, whom he had brought with 
him from Corinth, — and spending but one Sabbath 
there, as he was hastening to the passover, pursues 
his voyage to Csesarea, where he lands and goes up 
to Jerusalem. There he salutes the church, and, 
having kept the feast, returns to Antioch, in Syria. 
Having continued there some time, Paul sets out on 
another progress (which was the third that began 
from thence since his conversion), in which he 
visits the Asiatic churches, and especially those of 
Galatia and Phrygia. 

Apollos, in the mean time, preaches at Ephesus, and 
being further instructed in the Christian religion 
by Aquila and Priscilla, goes over to Achaia, and 
preaches at Corinth, and other places in that prov- 
ince. 

56 While Apollos was watering what Paul had planted 

at Corinth, Paul comes to Ephesus, where some. of 
John's disciples, being instructed by him, are bap- 
tized, and receive the Spirit (Acts xix.). 

57 Having taught there in the synagogue for the space 

of three months, meeting with opposition from the 
Jews, he separates the disciples, and discourses 
daily, for two years, in the school of Tyrannus. 
He performs extraordinary miracles, while the ex- 
orcist Jews are beaten by a demoniac they would 
have dispossessed ; and preaching the gospel with 
such success that many believe, and burn their 
magical books. 

58 Paul thinks of setting out for Macedonia and Achaia, 

from whence he would go to Jerusalem, and after- 
wards to Koine ; but sending Timothy and Erastus 
into Macedonia, he alters his design, and tarries 
some time longer in that part of Asia. Demetrius, 
the silversmith, raising a tumult against him, the 
mob is enraged, and cries out for Diana. Paul is 



168 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

A.D. 

advised not to venture among them. The chancel- 
lor comes and appeases the tumult. 

58 The Druids massacred. 

Armenia totally subdued by Corbulo, a prefect of 
Belgium, while governor of Syria, who, having 
routed the Parthinns, destroyed Artaxata, and made 
Tigranes king of Armenia. 

59 Paul, leaving Timothy, who was now returned to him 

at Ephesus, departs from thence, and, having 
crossed through Troas in his way, crosses the sea 
to Macedonia, where he visits the several churches, 
gathering a contribution as he passes for the poor 
brethren in Judea. 

In this journey lie writes his Second Epistle to Timo- 
thy, as also, probably, his First Epistle to Timothy. 

From Macedonia he goes on to Greece, where he 
visits the churches at Corinth, and in the neighbor- 
ing parts of Achaia; and having finished his collec- 
tions, after three months' abode there, being now- 
ready to embark for Syria to avoid the Jews, he 
chooses to return by Macedonia. 

Agrippina, Nero's mother, is put to death by his or- 
der. 
•Laodicea, one of the most famous cities in Asia, de- 
stroyed by an earthquake. 

60 Christianity said to have been preached in Great 

Britain. 

The pantomimes recalled by Nero. 

Appearance of a comet, by which the vulgar are 
greatly alarmed. 

The city of Puteoli, or Pozzuoli, obtains from Nero 
the title of August or Imperial Colony. 

China. Religion of the followers of Fo commenced 
about this time. 

After the days of unleavened bread, Paul sails from 
Philippi and comes to Troas. There he restores 
Eutychus to life. Having passed through several 
cities of Greece, he arrives at Miletus ; from thence 
he sends to call the elders of the church of Ephe- 
sus, whom he earnestly exhorts to the performance 
of their duties. 

Notwithstanding the repeated warnings of inspired 
persons of what the Jews would do to him, Paul 
resolutely goes up to Jerusalem. He is appre- 
hended in the temple, and confined in the cas- 



SYNCHRONOLOGY. 169 

A. D. 

tie ; he claims the privilege of a Roman citizen, 
and thus escapes scourging. 

60 Paul pleads his cause hefore Ananias, the high priest. 

The chief captain, understanding that above forty 
Jews had bound themselves, under a curse, neither 
to eat nor drink till they had killed him, sends him 
to Felix, the governor of the province, by whom 
he is imprisoned at Caesarea. 
On hearing Paul's discourse before him and his wife 
Drusilla, Felix trembles, and puts him off to an- 
other opportunity. 

61 The Britons form a league to recover their indepen- 

dence. They take advantage of the absence of Sue- 
tonius Paulinus, their governor, to take up arms 
against the Romans. Boadicea, the British queen, 
defeats the Romans, killing seventy thousand in 
various places ; but the Britons are at last defeated 
by Suetonius, the Roman general, with the loss 
of eighty thousand. 

Pedanius Secundus, prefect of Rome, assassinated 
by one of his slaves. 

King Agrippa confers the high priesthood on Israel, 
the son of Phabius. 

62 Nero puts the Empress Octavia to death. 

Aulus Persius Flaccus, the poet, dies in the thirtieth 
year of his age. 

When Paul had been in custody two years, Felix goes 
out of office, and is succeeded by Porcius Festus, 
but to gratify the Jews, he leaves Paul a prisoner. 

The Jews come to Csesarea, accuse Paul before Fes- 
tus. Paul makes his defence, and to avoid his 
sending him to Jerusalem, appeals to Caesar. 

King Agrippa and Bernice coming to visit the new 
governor at Caesarea, Festus opens the whole mat- 
ter to Agrippa. 

Paul, being permitted to speak for himself, makes 
such a defence before Agrippa that he is almost 
persuaded to be a Christian, and declares he might 
.have been set at liberty if he had not appealed to 
Caesar. Paul is shipped for Italy, with some other 
prisoners, in custody of a centurion, and is attended 
in his voyage by Luke and Aristarchus. Having 
suffered much in a storm, Paul is assured by an 
angel that none of them should perish. The storm 
continues many days, and they at length are ship- 



170 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

A. D. 

wrecked on the coast of Malta ; but all get safe to 
land. They are treated with great kindness by the 
inhabitants there, and after three months' stay, 
they depart for Rome. 

63 When they were come to Rome, Paul is allowed to 

dwell in his own hired house there, while the rest 
of the prisoners are delivered to the captain of the 
guard. 

Soon after his arrival, Paul has an audience of the 
Jews, and gives them an account of the Christian 
faith; but most of them being hardened in their 
unbelief, he declares the salvation of God is sent 
to the Gentiles. 

He spends two years confined to his own hired house, 
preaching the things concerning Christ to all that 
came to him. 

Here ends the history of the Acts of the Apostles, 
written by St. Luke, St. Paul's beloved companion 
in his travels. 

On the fifth of February a violent earthquake oc- 
curred in Campania, which destroyed a great part of 
the city of Pompeii, at the foot of Mount Vesuvi- 
us, and did considerable damage to Herculaneum. 

About this time Nero reduced the Cottian Alps into 
a Roman province, after the death of Cottius. 

The Parthians vanquished by the Romans under 
Corbulo. 

Tiridates, king of Parthia, lays down his crown at 
the foot of Nero's statue. 

James, the brother of our Lord, is, according to 
Eusebius, thrown down from the pinnacle of the 
temple, and stoned ; and a fuller, striking him on 
the head with a club, kills him. 

64 The emperor of Rome sends two centurions up the 

Nile to discover its source; but the centurions fail 
in their expedition, being stopped by the cataracts 
and marshy grounds. 

Great fire in Rome, by which more than two thirds 
of this great city is consumed. Nero, charging the 
contiagration of the city upon the Christians, per- 
secutes them witli all manner of cruelties and tor- 
ments. 

First of the ten heathen persecutions before Con- 
stantine. 

The Jews revolt from the Romans, and pelt their 



SYNCHRONOLOGY. 171 

k.V. 

governor Florus, with stones, which begins the first 
Jewish war. 
65 Several great men conspire against the emperor; but 
the plot is discovered. 

Death of Seneca and Lucan. 

Campania wasted by an epidemical sickness and great 
tempests. 

Great fire at Lyons, which nearly consumed the 
whole city. Nero made the inhabitants of this city 
a present of four millions of sesterces (about thir- 
ty-two thousand pounds), toward repairing their 
losses. 

About the latter end of this year, St. Paul is set at lib- 
erty, and a little before his departure out of Italy 
into Asia, he writes his Epistle to the Hebrews. 

He preached the gospel in the Isle of Crete, and 
leaves Titus there to set things in order, and or- 
dains elders in every city. 

65 Tiridates receives the crown of Armenia at the hands 

of Nero. ■ 

66 Vespasian sent by Nero to make war against the 

Jews. 

Disturbances in Caesarea between the Jews and the 
idolaters who inhabited that city. The Jews of 
Caesarea slain to the number of twenty thousand, 

All Syria filled with slaughter by the battles between 
the Jews and the Syrians. 

Caestius Gallus, governor of Syria, comes into Judea. 
He enumerates the Jews at the passover, in Jerusa- 
lem, besieges the city, is defeated by the Jews, and 
retires. 

The Christians leave Jerusalem, and fly to Pella, in 
Ccelosyria. 

Josephus, Jewish historian, made governor of Galilee. 
61 Vespasian invades Judea with an army of sixty thou- 
sand men, and carries fire and sword wherever he 
goes. Immense numbers of the Jews are slain in 
the various sieges. 

Eleven thousand six hundred Samaritans, who had 
assembled on Mount Gerizim, slain by order of 
Vespasian. 

Joppa taken and destroyed by the Romans. 

Death of Corbulo. 

Vespasian subdues Galilee. Josephus surrenders him- 
self to Vespasian. St. Paul and St. Peter are sup- 



172 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

A. D. 

posed to have suffered martyrdom at Rome, near 
the close of Nero's reign. 

67 Cerintlms was the first Ciiristian writer against the 

divinity of Christ. (The divinity of Christ was 
adopted at the Council of Nice, A. D. 325, by two 
hundred and ninety-nine bishops against eighteen.) 

68 Vespasian takes all the places of strength, in Judea, 

about Jerusalem. 

Dread calamities in Jerusalem occasioned by the 
Zealots, who divide themselves into two different 
parties, and murder one another by thousands, 
committing the most horrible cruelties. 

The Emperor Nero is obliged to flee from Rome on 
account of his great cruelties. He takes refuge at 
the house of one of his freedmen, where he kills 
himself. 

Galba is declared emperor by the Senate. 

69 Galba is slain seven months after the death of Nero, 

and Otho is proclaimed emperor. 
* A civil war ensues between Otho and Vitellius, who 
had been saluted emperor by the army; Otho's 
army is defeated at the battle of Bedriacum, upon 
which Otho kills himself, after a reign of three 
months ; he is succeeded by Vitellius. 

Civil war between Vitellius and Vespasian. 

Vespasian acknowledged emperor by a great part of 
Italy and the western provinces. The capital be- 
sieged and taken by Vetellius's soldiers. 

The Batavians, under Civilis, revolt from the Ro- 
mans, over whom they obtain two great victories. 

70 Vitellius is killed, after a reign of eight months, and 

Vespasian succeeds him in the empire. 

Josephus set at liberty. 

Vespasian orders the capital to be rebuilt, the first 
stone of which was laid on the 21st of June. 

Titus, the son of Vespasian, sent by the emperor to 
besiege Jerusalem. The city is taken by the Ro- 
mans, Sept. 7, and all the awful predictions of our 
Lord, as well as those of the ancient prophets, are 
exactly accomplished. The city is desolated, the 
temple destroyed, so that not one stone is left on an- 
other. Josephus reckons that not less than eleven 
hundred thousand persons perished in this siege by 
fire, sword, misery, and famine. If to this be added 
the number killed in the battles outside of Jerusa- 



STNCHROXOLOGY. 173 

A. D. 

lem, and in taking the several towns the Romans 
stormed, it will be found that the Jews lost, in the 
whole course of the war, thirteen hundred and 
fifty-seven thousand six hundred and sixty men. 
The number of prisoners during the war, according 
to the same historian, amounted to ninety-seven 
thousand. 

70 The remnant of the Jews are scattered to all nations, 

and dispersed among them. 

71 Magnificent triumph of Vespasian for his victories 

over the Jews. 
Peace being reestablished in the earth, the temple of 
Janus is shut. This is the sixth time of its being 
shut, according to Orosius. 

73 The philosophers expelled from Rome. 

Vespasian conquers Lycia, Rhodes, Thrace, Cilicia, 
Byzantium, and Samos. 

75 Dedication of the temple of Peace. Vespasian places 
in it the golden vessels belonging to the temple of 
Jerusalem, and great numbers of the finest perform- 
ances of the best artists and sculptors. 

75 Nero's colossus, erected by his order at the entrance 

of the golden palace, is dedicated to Apollo, or the 
sun, by Vespasian. 

76 Three cities in the Island of Cyprus destroyed by an 

earthquake. 

77 A great plague in Rome. Ten thousand persons said 

to have died in one day. 

78 Agricola appointed governor of Britain. 
Scotland circumnavigated. 

79 Vespasian dies, and is succeeded by his son Titus. 
Herculaneum, Pompeii, and StabiaB overwhelmed by 

an earthquake of Mount Vesuvius. Pliny, the 
naturalist, loses his life, while employed in examin- 
ing this dreadful phenomenon. 

80 Terrible fire at Rome, which raged three days and 

three nights. Many public buildings were de- 
stroyed, including the Pantheon, the Octavian li- 
brary, and the Capitol, which had not long been 
rebuilt. 

81 Titus dies, and is succeeded by his brother Domitian. 
83 Domitian's expedition against the Catti, a people of 

Germany. 
The emperor returns without having seen the enemy, 
but causes triumphal honors to be decreed him. It 



174 NEW TESTAMENT MANUAL. 

A. D. 

is supposed that about this time he assumed the 
surname Germanicus. 

84 Sabinus is made colleague with Domitian in the con- 

sulate. 

The Caledonians defeated by Agricola with the loss 
of ten thousand men. 

The fleet of Agricola sails round Great Britain. Be- 
fore this circumnavigation was made, the Romans 
were not sure that Britain was an island. 

85 Domitian orders the nativity of all the great men in 

Rome to be cast; and such as were said to be born 

for empire he destroyed. 
Philosophers banished from Rome by Domitian. 
Fulvius is made colleague this year, with the emperor, 

in the consulate. 

86 Capitoline games instituted by Domitian, and cele- 

brated every fourth year. 

The Dacian war begins tins year, according to Euse- 
bius. 

The Dacians enter the Roman provinces, and make 
great depredations, but are at last completely over- 
thrown by Julianus. 

88 The secular games celebrated at Rome. 

89 Domitian banishes the astrologers from Rome. 

93 St. John banished to Patmos by Domitian, and there 
receives and writes his Revelation. 

95 The second persecution against the Christians com- 

mences, and continues until the death of Domitian, 
the next year. 

96 Domitian put to death by Stephanus, and is succeed- 

ed by Nerva. 

97 About this time Timothy is stoned. St. John returns 

to Ephesus, and, at the request of the Christians, 
writes his Gospel. 

98 Nerva dies, and is succeeded by Trajan, a great sov- 

ereign and warrior. 

Christian assemblies prohibited by Trajan. 

His persecutions of the Christians are stopped by the 
interference of the humane Pliny; but he was 
severe upon the Jews, who had murdered two hun- 
dred thousand of his subjects. 

The Roman empire at its greatest extent. 

The Ulpian library ; public schools in all the prov- 
inces ; jurisprudence flourishes j the city adorned 



SYNCHRONOLOGY. 175 

4. D. 

with the Forum; pillar of Trajan, and baths; a 

bridge built over the Danube. 
100 The Huns emigrate westward. 

St. John dies at Ephesus, aged ninety-four years. 

Persons interested in the events recorded in history 
before and after the period included in the foregoing 
pages, are referred to a larger work, by the same author, 
entitled, " Synchronology of Sacred and Profane History, 
from the Creation to the Present Time," from most of 
which this " Synchronology" is copied. 



SYNCHRONOLOGY 

— OF THE — 

PRINCIPAL EVENTS 



Sacred and Profane History, 

From the Creation of Man to the 
Present Time* 



Compiled from the most Authentic Sources, by 

STEPHEN HAWES. 



8vo. Cloth. $3.50. 

LEE & SHEPARD, Publishers, BOSTON. 



TESTIMONIALS. 



From the Massachusetts Teacher. 

To every student of history this compilation is one of 
great value. It gives, in carefully prepared tables, the 
names of the successive rulers of every country in the 
world, with their appropriate dates ; a very full record 
of events, in chronological order, from the creation of 
man to the close of 1868 ; a biographical index, whereby 
easy reference is made to particular events ; and a list 
of battles, with their several dates. Those who have oc- 
casion to teach history will find this work very useful. 
The chief events of the contemporaneous history of all 
countries, in all ages of the world, are here seen at a 
glance ; the period in which any historical person lived 
is found in a moment ; in a word, the outlines of all his- 
tory are here presented in one panoramic view. We 
heartily recommend the work. It can be obtained by 
application to the publishers. 



Prom the Maine Journal of Education. 

This book will interest the student of history, as well 
as the general reader ; but its value to teachers is beyond 
all price. It is multum in parvo — the quintessence of 
many libraries condensed into a single volume. We can 
unhesitatingly commend this work as one that will be of 
great practical use to teachers in their work, and one of 
constant and permanent value in the family as a work 
for reference and consultation. 

Prom the Morning Star. 

We have looked through this work with an increasing 
conviction of its general accuracy and value. As a 
work of reference, it deserves a place by the side of 
every student, and writers in every department of litera- 
ture will find it a labor-saving and convenient epitome 
of history. 

Prom the Bureau of Information. 

We have carefully examined every page of this work, 
and believe that among the ten thousand events recorded 
therein there is not one that cannot be verified by other 
reliable histories. For general use we consider it indis- 
pensable. 

From the New York Tribune. 
It enables one to see at a glance what happened at any 
particular time in all parts of the world. It seems to be 
quite complete, and we have discovered in it no serious 
errors. 

From the Harvard (College) Advocate. 

The compiler has spent a great deal of time in the ar- 
rangement of this book, and has succeeded in giving us one 
of the most valuable books for reference of the present 
day. 

From the Pioneer. 

It is a work of great labor in the compilation, and 
should have a place in the family next to the Webster 
Unabridged. 

From the Weekly Chronicle. 

It is printed on good paper, thoroughly bound in cloth, 
and well worth the price asked. Every one should 
have it. 



From the Albany Evening Journal. 

It is an exceedingly valuable work. The examination 
we have been enabled to give it satisfies us that it has 
been carefully prepared, and fills a place unoccupied by 
other chronological works. We therefore commend it 
as a work of great value and reliability. 

Prom the Banner of Light. 

We know of no one book that so conveniently con- 
denses and summarizes the history of the world for the 
enjoyment and use of the reader, the student, and the 
literary worker. 

Prom the Hudson Register. 

Our school superintendents have acted wisely in intro- 
ducing this work into the public schools, and it should 
certainly have a place in every family. 

Prom Warren Johnson, A. M., 

SupH Public Schools, Maine. 
I have examined and used your " Synchronology " 
with great satisfaction, and can most cheerfully testify to 
its value and convenience. 

Prom Hon. T. W. Bicknell, 

Commissioner Public Schools, Rhode Island. 
This work is a valuable compend of universal knowl- 
edge. 

Prom the Gazette and Courier. 
It is remarkably correct and reliable. 



MANUAL 



BIBLE SELECTIONS 



RESPONSIVE EXERCISES 



PUBLIC AND PEIVATE SCHOOLS OF ALL GRADES, 

SABBATH, MISSION, AND REFORM SCHOOLS, 

AND FAMILY WORSHIP. 

BY 

MRS. S. B. PERRY. 



" Thy Word is a lamp unto my feet, and a light unto my path." — Ps. cxix. 105. 

44 The grass withereth, the flower fadeth : but the word of our God shall stand 
for ever." — Is a. xl. 8. 

NOTE. 

The Responsive Exercises and Lessons which comprise the 
first sixty-five pages of "Perry's Bible Manual " are issued 
in separate form. The Introduction, Table of Contents, and 
Chapter to Teachers, being the same in both. 
The work is issued in the following styles and prices : — 

In cloth binding $1.00 

Leather backs 60 

Responsive Exercises .... .30 

LEE AND SHEPARD, Publishers, Boston. 



INTRODUCTION. 



Hon. Schuyler Colfax, giving an account 
of the early Washingtonian Temperance Reform, 
quotes the fifth article of their organization thus : 
" No creed in Religion and no party in Politics 
to be recognized, and no political or religious ac- 
tion to be introduced into their operations." He 
says : " This last point was carried even farther 
than this, some objecting to prayer at the open- 
ing of their meetings ; but this prejudice rapidly 
disappeared, and the distinction was made there- 
after between Sectarianism and a Reverential 
Acknowledgment of the Divine" 

It is just this distinction, so well expressed, 
that we need to make in our use of the Bible and 
Devotion in our Public Schools. In the work of 
Education, as in the Temperance work, all forms 
of faith and no faith meet, and must mingle har- 
moniously. Let Sectarianism disappear, but Rev- 
erential Acknowledgment of the Divine — never ! 

As Parents and Teachers, Boards of Education 
and State Authorities, as a Republican nation, 



IV INTRODUCTION. 

we cannot afford to dispense with this acknowl- 
edgment of God as a purifying, invigorating ele- 
ment in the education of the young. 

" When the people that are to be — the chil- 
dren of to-day — are assembled for the profound 
purposes of education ; when, from all these vari- 
ous beliefs and no beliefs, they come together to 
prepare for perpetuating the Republic which se- 
cures these very rights, — and for that was every 
free school throughout our borders founded, — 
then must these differences be forgotten, and only 
the great fact borne in mind, that we are to per- 
petuate a Christian Republic ; that Reverence to 
God is our corner-stone, and that constant recog- 
nition of Him, as such, is both a duty and a ne- 
cessity." — Miss Seymour, in Old and New. 

Certain truths are common to all Christian be- 
lievers. Certain portions of the Bible most clear- 
ly present those truths. And such selections of 
Scripture are proved by experience to be best 
adapted to the use of the young in school. They 
are indicated by the aim we have in view, namely, 
to impress the great elementary truths admitted 
by all, whether Roman Catholic or Protestant ; to 
inculcate those Bible precepts which lie at the 
foundation of all religious teaching. This " Bible 
Manual " is an attempt to select and arrange these 
fundamental truths in a convenient form for the 
use of schools. Every Exercise or Selection has 



INTRODUCTION. V 

been subjected to at least two test questions. 
First, Does this passage convey the same truth, — 
not exactness of mere words, but exactness of 
meaning, — whether read from Catholic or from 
Protestant versions of the Bible ? Secondly, 
Does this passage, by a simple and natural read- 
ing of it, convey truth accepted by all Christian 
believers ? 

In making the Selections, leading representa- 
tives of all denominations have been consulted; 
and we trust the book has been so carefully 
and candidly prepared that it may prove accepta- 
ble to all, and that it may help to solve the great 
question now so widely discussed, — " Shall the 
Bible be banished from our Public Schools?" 
— by showing how the Bible may be retained in a 
true spirit and practice of Christian reciprocity. 

As Teachers, have we not felt the need of such 
a guide-book ? If we attempt simply the reading 
of the Scriptures as a matter of daily routine, we 
find that a wise selection is of the utmost impor- 
tance. But many of us have been obliged to own 
that this method has often proved weak and in- 
effectual. It is next to impossible, unless the 
reader has something new, something exciting, in 
this age of excitements, to hold the attention of 
any considerable number of children, listening to 
that in which they take no part. And there is 
danger lest by a listless, inattentive reading of 



VI INTRODUCTION. 

the Word we rob it of future power. There is 
a better method ; one far more attractive and 
powerful in its influence upon the young. It is 
that of responsive concert recitation or reading of 
the Bible text. 

For this practice, " Responsive Exercises " have 
been here arranged, hoping this may yet prove 
the favorite method for daily use. 

It is believed that this Manual may prove 
equally acceptable to Sabbath Schools, giving the 
best selections for devotional reading, al^o Respon- 
sive Recitations to vary the regular services of 
Sabbath School and Sabbath School Concert. 

To High Schools, Academies, and Colleges it 
is recommended as furnishing in convenient form 
such selections from Scripture as are best adapted 
to morning devotional services. 

To Parents it may prove an efficient helper on 
the Sabbath. To all children and youth it pre- 
sents the Bible in an intelligible and inviting as- 
pect. 

It is here affectionately dedicated to all who 
love the Oracles of God, and would have them 
written in letters of light upon the memory and 
the heart of the young ; who would give them an 
honored place and a living power in every school, 
to charm the heart of childhood, and to instruct 
and purify the heart of youth. 



TESTIMONIALS. 



The manuscript of this Manual was submitted by the author 
before publication to eminent clergymen of different denomina- 
tions, and to gentlemen interested in the general subject of edu- 
cation. Impressed with the importance of the plan, and aware 
of the difficulties attending its successful execution, they exam- 
ined the work with care and thoroughness, and from the opinions 
given by them, the following are selected that the public may 
know the views of those, who, as all will acknowledge, are emi- 
nently qualified to judge of its merits. Many other letters might 
be given, but the following are sufficient to show that the "Man- 
ual " is what it professes to be and therefore is worthy the confi- 
dence of the public. 

From Hon. Joseph "White, 

Secretary of the Massachusetts Board of Education. 
Commonwealth of Massachusetts, 
State House, State Library, and Office of Board of Education, 
Boston, September 14, 1870. 
I have examined carefully and with deep interest the Bible Manual pre- 
pared by Mrs. S. B. Perry for the use of schools. In my judgment it is an 
excellent book, evincing rare skill and good taste in the selection and arrange- 
ment of such portions of Scripture as shed a Divine light upon the great doc- 
trines of life, duty, and immortality, in which all Christian people of what- 
ever denomination agree. 

Its general use in the family and the school cannot fail to lay broader and 
deeper the foundations of a religious education, without which all other is a 
delusion and a sham. 

From Rev. Wm. Barrows, D. D. 

Acting Secretary Congregational Publishing Society. 

No. 13 Cornhill, Boston. 
A very desirable work, and most happily executed. A careful examination 
of the manuscript has been a pleasure to me. The range of topics is very 
wide and varied, adapted to our highest and lowest institutions of learning, 
where Bible reading is properly a daily exercise. The different seasons of the 
year, the changing phases of nature, the ordinary and extraordinary occasions 
incident to school life, the Christian virtues and great moral lessons of life, 
— all have their appropriate selections. For family readings and Sabbath- 
school openings the book must have great value. The selections are made 
and arranged with perfect fidelity to the context, and the les ons are such ss to 
be entirely unexceptionable to Christians of any shade of faith. The editorial 
judgment, taste, and skill are admirable. The entire volume is such a com- 
pilation of the literary beauties and, at the same time, moral teachings of the 
Bible, in lessons adapted to occasions, that it must meet a want long and 
deeply felt — and never before so well met — by those who have need to use 
daily the Scriptures in public. 



TESTIMONIALS. 



From Rev. Samuel L* Jackson, D. D. 

Assistant Secretary Board of Education, 
Commonwealth of Massachusetts, 
State House, State Library, and Office of Board of Education, 
Boston, July 11, 1870. 
The " Bible Manual " I have examined with unexpected interest and with 
great satisfaction. Its object is of the highest importance, and I rejoice that 
a work has been prepared so admirably adapted to attain it. Its plan and 
method are executed with so much judgment, skill, and especially with such 
perfect regard to all varieties of opinion and belief, that I see not how any 
person of any sect or denomination, who is really in favor of any moral and 
religious instruction in our schools, can object to its use. 

From Rev. Andrew P. Peabody, D. D« 

Harvard University. 

Harvard University, June 17, 1870. 
I have examined Mrs. Perry's book of Scriptural Selections and Responsive 
Exercises from the Bible. She has, in my opinion, performed the work with 
great skill, with a pure devotional taste, and with a fine perception — derived 
from her own long experience as a teacher — of the needs of teachers and 
schools. I can see many reasons why such a manual is much to be preferred 
to the entire Bible for use in schools, and I feel confident that this is, in 
judicious selection, in the proportion of parts and subjects, and in compre- 
hensiveness, fully equal to the best works of the kind that liave appeared. 
I believe that it would receive the warm approval of the best teachers and 
friends of education. 

From Rev. Mark Hopkins, D. D. 

President of Williams College. 

Williams College, July 4, 1870. 
So far as I have been able to examine the plan and the Selections of Mrs. 
Perry, they meet my hearty approval. 

From Rev. A. A. Miner, D. I>. 

President of Tufts College. 

Boston, June 22, 1870. 
Having examined the little work in course of preparation by Mrs. Perry, 
consisting of Services and Selections from the Scriptures for the use of teach- 
ers and pupils in our public schools, I am of the opinion that it is excellently 
well adapted to its purpose. The services are well arranged and the selections 
wisely made- Its convenience must be at once appreciated by all. If any 
such work is allowed to take the place of the Bible as a whole, a better than 
this is scarcely to be expected. To all who desire Biblical Selections made 
ready at their hands, I would heartily commend Mrs. Perry's book. 

From George B. Emerson, IX. D. 

Boston, June 16, 1870. 
I have carefully examined the book of Bible Selections prepared by Mrs. 
Perry, and am so entirely pleased with it that 1 should rejoice to see it in- 
troduced into every school, public and private, in the country. It contains 
the great truths of religion in the belief in which all Christians are united, 
and the great principles of morality to which all good men, everywhere hold. 

From Rev. Alexander H. Vinton, D. D. 

Emmanuel Church. 

Boston, June 8, 1870. 
I take great pleasure in writing my approval of Mrs. Perry's plan of using 
the Scriptures in our schools. 
It presents those parts of the sacred teaching which are most valuable to 



TESTIMONIALS. 



all, in a way which makes them especially available to the young ; and so re- 
lieves that branch of school exercise from the objections commonly made to 
reading the Bible indiscriminately. I sincerely hope, therefore, that Mrs. 
Perry will easily find a publisher for her work, the fruit of experience and 
of earnest zeal in the cause of right education. 

From Rev. Phillips Brooks, D. D. 

Boston, June 4, 1870. 
I have examined with much interest and with considerable care, Mrs. 
Perry's arrangement of Selections from the Bible for school use, and am 
much impressed with the justness of the plan on which the selection has 
been made, and the apparent faithfulness and success with which it has been 
carried out. It must certainly be of great use to teachers, and help to pre- 
serve with the school use of the Bible, that interest and vividness of reverence 
which alone can make it desirable that it should be retained. I hope that 
her work may come before the public and be found useful. 

From Rev. L.. J. Livermore, 

Secretary of the Unitarian Sunday School Society. 

Boston, May 31, 1870. 

I have examined the Scripture Lessons prepared by Mrs. S. B. Perry for 
use in common schools. I thiuk the plan is based on a practical and judi- 
cious view of what is likely to do good, and it is carried out with a skill and 
taste that could only come from experience in school life, and a pure religious 
feeling It seems hardly possible that the work, if put into a neat and con- 
venient form should fail to find a ready welcome in every school room. 

It would be almost equally a pleasant and profitable manual for Sunday 
schools and for the family. 

From Rev. John Todd, D. D. 

PlTTSFIELD, AugUSt 8, 1870. 

Our mutual friend, Mr. White, read to me quite a number of your Bible 
Selections And while I don't pretend I could have made as good a selection, 
yet I can admire what others do : and I pronounce them admirably executed. 
They will, I doubt not, be highly appreciated and useful. I wish you every 
success. 

From Rev. S. Irenseus Prime, D. D. 

Senior Editor of the Neiv York Observer. 

New York, June 2, 1870. 

On my return from Williamstown, I embrace an early moment to return 
to you my thanks for the opportunity you gave me of examining portions of 
Mrs. Perry's Selections from Holy Scripture for use in schools. 

The plan is admirable : the execution appears to be happy, judicious, unex- 
ceptionable : and I regard the idea as well fitted to secure, under most ad- 
vantageous circumstances the perusal of God's Word in our primary institu- 
tions 

From Rev. John W. Olmstead, D. D. 

Editor of the Watchman and Reflector. 

I have examined with much satisfaction the manuscript of a manual of 
Biblical Selections compiled by Mrs. S. B. Perry, which I hope erelong to see 
in print. It is intended both for school and family use, and >eems to meet 
successfully the chief difficulties in the great question of Bible reading in our 
schools 

Subjects are well classified, the arrangement is good, the taste in the selec- 
tion of topics and texts excellent, and the volume gives the gems of Scripture, 
genuine teachings of Holy Writ, in a manner that commends the work to all 
denominations. 

Mrs. Perry's plan and its execution are indorsed by leading clergymen and 



4 TESTIMONIALS. 

gentlemen interested in education and morals, and the long years of experi- 
ence and practical trial of her Manual have given her an opportunity to test 
its value. The separate exercises or readings are so presented as to interest 
the pupil, and convey the honest meaning of the texts. 

This attempt to solve the questions now agitating the people is well nvorth 
examination by all good citizens. 

From Rev. Gilbert Haven, D. D. 

Editor of Ziorts Herald. 

36 Bromfield Street, Boston, June 20, 1870. 
I have examined a Bible Manual prepared by Mrs. S B. Perry for the use 
of schools. I think it a very valuable compend of Scripture and well adapted 
for the use of public and Sabbath schools. Every church can adopt it with- 
out violation of its principles, and the public schools will find in it nothing 
that conflicts with the feelings of the most sensitive objector. I hope it will 
be universally used. 

From Rev. Pliny Wood, 

Rector Trinity M. Episcopal Church. 

Cambridge, June 19, 1870. 
I have examined with some degree of care Mrs. Perry's Scripture Selec- 
tions and Responsive Exercises from the Bible for use in schools : and most 
cordially recommend it as being well calculated to interest, instruct, and lead 
the scholar to a decidedly devotional frame of mind. 

I can but bid her God speed in her chosen work, which I heartily do. 

From Rev. Henry M. Dexter, D. D. 

Editor of the Congregationa/ist and Boston Recorder. 

No. 15 Corn hill, Boston, May 31, 1870. 
I have examined the plan and execution of Mrs. Perry's Manual of Selec- 
tions from the Bible for use in schools and have been favorably impressed by 
them. And entirely aside from the question of the retaining of the whole 
Bible in schools or its rejection from them, it seems to me that her plan pro- 
poses an extremely interesting, effective, and useful style of school exercise ; 
and that she has managed it so well as to avoid all reasonable — aud 1 think 
indeed I might safely add unreasonable — denominational prejudice j so that 
no objection could lie against it anywhere. 

From Rev. George W. Blagden, D» I>. 

Old South Church. 

Boston, June 20, 1870. 

The longer I have thought of your selections from the Scriptures for reading 

in schools, the more hopeful I have felt that they may lead to union among 

those who may now have convicting (pinions respecting the reading of the 

Bible as a school exercise by the pupils. 

Your selections contain the essentials of religion. They have been made 
with taste. And they are admirably adapted to awaken the attention, and 
excite the emotions and exercise the conscience of the young. 

From Rev. George Gannett, 

Principal of the Chester Square School. 

I am entirely satisfied that the plan of your work is one of superior excel- 
lence. 

The Selections which you have made, are such as convey ail the essential 
truths of our common < 'hristianity 5 and ought to be more than acceptable 
to every believer in the Bible as an inspired book. If your book is published, 
as I trust it soon will be, T shall certainly adopt it as a text-book in my 
school } in which case we should probably require about a hundred copies 
annually. 



TESTIMONIALS. 



From Rev.. Edward N. Kirk, D. D., Boston. 

So far as I have examined your Manual, I think it will help us in our effort 
to save the sy3tein of American Education from becoming utterly Pagan. 

It is not the Bible, but a judicious selection from its contents, which I 
shall be surprised if all who love the Bible do not accept, as furnishing in- 
structors the very guide they have needed in using the Sacred Word in the 
exercises of the school. 

God save the youth of America from an education that disregards the Bible ! 

From Austin Phelps. 

Theological Seminary. 

Andover, Mass., November 11, 1870. 
The Manual of Biblical Selections by Mrs. S. B. Perry appears to me to be 
skilfully adapted to its purpose. Its materials are chosen with good judg- 
ment, its rauge of topics is extensive, and the arrangement is faithful to the 
connections of Biblical thought 

The volume bears evidence throughout of the experience of a Christian 
teacher in the use of the Bible. 

From S. H. Taylor. 

Phillips Academy, Andover. 

A careful examination of Mrs. Perry's Bible Selections and Responsive 
Exercises satisfies me that the book is very happily adapted for the use of 
schools. The selections are made wit 1 excellent taste and judgment, and 
contain nothing to waich any one who believes in the great truths of the 
Bible can object. 

I trust the volume may come into general use in our schools, as it cannot 
fail to interest and profit those who adopt it as a manual of devotion. 

Mr dear Mrs. Perry, — 

If the accompanying statement in regard to your Manual will be of any 
service to yon, yon are at liberty to use it either in whole or in part. 

You have done an invaluable service in the preparation of this book, and I 
pray that you mav he abundantly rewarded for it 

Very truly yours, S. H. TAYLOR. 

From Gideon L,. Soule. 

Phillips Academy. 

Exeter November 25. 1870. 

I have examined with deep interest the Bible Manual which you so kindly 
placed on my table 

It is excellent, and must be welcomed by all who believe in our need of 
the moral teaching of the Scriptures. I hope you will be rewarded by its 
introduction into our schools generally. I am sure they would be made bet- 
ter by it, and the people through tiiem. 

From Rev. Thomas "Wilson, 

Chairman School Committee, Stoughton, Mass. 

Stoughtox, December 8, 1870. 

The Bible Selections and Responsive Exerci-es compiled by Mrs. S. B. Perry 
have just been introduced into all the Public Schools of this town. The 
teachers have been supplied with the Manual, and they are all greatly grati- 
fied with it. It meets a want which has long been felt, but which hitherto 
has not i.een suitably provided for. 

Tnis excellent compilation fully answers all the reasonable requirements of 
such a Manual The admirable taste s iowii in ks preparation, and its entire 
freedom from scorni-ian bias, commeij'i ir strong! n a* a material help toward 
the solution of the question of " tne Bible in Schools." 



TESTIMONIALS. 



From A. St. John Chambre, 

Professor of Mental and Moral Philosophy, Dean College, Franklin, Mass. 

Stoughton, Mass., December 10, 1870 

Mrs. Perry's Manual of Bible Selections and Responsive Exercises lias re- 
ceived from me the consideration such a work justly demands. Deigned not to 
displace the Bible, but to deepen reverence and love for it, by presenting in con- 
venient form, for short readings and responses, its richest treasures, it seems 
to me admirably suited for the uses of Sunday Schools Private Schools gen- 
erally, and especially our " Common Schools." 

Such a Manual in the public schools would do much toward settling the 
vexed question of the " Bible in Schools." 

I have not anywhere found any arrangement of Scripture by Mrs. Perry 
desigued to teach a controverted dogma. Her work has been done with evi- 
dent conscientiousness, reverence, and affectionate zeal for truth. 

No reasonable person, that would not wholly shut out the Bible from our 
schools, could object to these readings. 

From Rev. Asa Smith, D. D. 

President of Dartmouth Coll* gt . 

Dartmouth College, Feb. 24, 1871. 
Mrs. Perry's book seems to me well suited to its end, — the very important 
one of promoting the systematic, orderly, and intelligent use of the Bible in 
our institutions of learning. 

From Prof. E. T. Quimby. 

Dartmouth College 

Hanover, N H., Jan 10, 1871. 

I have examined Mrs. Perry's Bible Manual, and have introduced it to our 
Sabbath School. I am much pleased with the plan of the book and the man- 
ner in which it has been executed. I think it will be the means of inspiring a 
new interest in the Scriptures wherever it is used. 

If the book meets with the success it deserves it will find a large sale. 



THE BEST SUNDAY-SCHOOL SINGING-BOOK 

18 

SABBATH SONGS FOR CHILDREN'S WORSHIP. 

By Leonard Marshall, assisted by J C. Prootor and Samuel Burnham. 

A new book of Hymns and Tunes for use in Sabbath Schools. 

Paper, 30 cents. Boards, 45 cents. 






■ ■ 



1 r 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: June 2005 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724) 779-2111 



■ ■ 




' I ■*' I I « 



■ 



• I tit- - 

■ 
1 1 




1 



II 
BSE 



HBBS^BBi^BBBBBI^B^^^^IBI 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




014 382 221 7 




ran 

Hi 



SaBeS 



mx 



HP 

■;■-' •"'■'■'.' •■'•'.•'•'. 
. ' .. SM I . Mj 

HH 

H 






■•"v-'" : 



